E-Class: Sedan and Wagon Operator's Manual

E-Class Sedan and Wagon Operator's Manual E-Class
Sedan and Wagon

Operator's Manual
É2125847502VËÍ
2125847502
Order no. 6515 3655 13 Part no. 212 584 75 02 Edition A-2016
Symbols X This symbol indicates an instruction Publication details
Registered trademarks: that must be followed. Internet
RBluetooth® X Several of these symbols in succes-
is a registered trademark of
sion indicate an instruction with sev- Further information about Mercedes-Benz
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
eral steps. vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
(Y This symbol tells you where you can on the following websites:
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
page) find more information about a topic. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
of DOLBY Laboratories.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or an http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are
instruction that is continued on the only)
registered trademarks of Daimler AG. next page.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Dis‐ This text indicates a message in the
Johnson Controls. play multifunction/COMAND/Audio dis- Editorial office
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade- play.
marks of Apple Inc. ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated
~ This symbol tells you that you can find
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har- further information in the Digital or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
man International Industries. Operator's Manual. without written permission from Daimler AG.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg-
istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- Vehicle manufacturer
tion.
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
Daimler AG
XM Radio Inc.
Mercedesstraße 137
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-
70327 Stuttgart
uity Digital Corporation.
Germany
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-
istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you. As at 27.06.2014
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-
tions and warning notices in this manual.
Ignoring them could result in damage to the
vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Apple® iOS
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
This Operator's Manual provides information
on the most important functions of your vehi-
cle.
Additional information on convenience func-
Android™
tions can be found in COMAND in your Digital
Operator's Manual. Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides
The equipment or product designation of your App may not yet be available in your country.
vehicle may vary depending on: The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
Rmodel
motoring.
Rorder
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Rcountry specification Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Ravailability
A Daimler Company
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
RDigital Operator's Manual
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
You can also use the E‑Class Guide smart-
phone app:
2125847502 É2125847502VËÍ
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 35
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 25 Safety ................................................... 47
Introduction ......................................... 27 Opening and closing ........................... 89
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 113
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 119
Climate control ................................. 129
Driving and parking .......................... 135
On-board computer and displays .... 187
Audio 20/COMAND .......................... 213
Stowage and features ...................... 237
Maintenance and care ...................... 261
Roadside Assistance ........................ 269
Wheels and tires ............................... 287
Technical data ................................... 333

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 80
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 167
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Adaptive Highbeam Assist
tion System) Display message ............................ 191
4MATIC (permanent all-wheel
Function/notes ............................. 122
drive)
Switching on/off ........................... 123
Function/notes ............................. 168 Address book
12 V socket
see also Digital Operator's Man-
see Sockets ual .................................................. 214
115 V socket ...................................... 251 Air bags
360° camera Deployment ..................................... 63
Cleaning ......................................... 268 Display message ............................ 198
Function/notes ............................. 173 Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) ....................................... 56
A Important safety notes .................... 54
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Introduction ..................................... 54
Display message ............................ 192 Knee bag .......................................... 56
Function/notes ................................ 75 Occupant Classification System
Warning lamp ................................. 205 (OCS) ............................................... 58
Access data of the mobile phone PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-
network provider tor lamp ........................................... 49
Making entries ............................... 234 Pelvis air bag ................................... 57
Selecting ........................................ 233 Side impact air bag .......................... 56
Accident Window curtain air bag .................... 57
Automatic measures after an acci- Air-conditioning system
dent ................................................. 67 see Climate control
Activating/deactivating cooling AIRMATIC
with air dehumidification ................. 133 Function/notes ............................. 166
Active Blind Spot Assist Alarm
Activating/deactivating (on- ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 87
board computer) ............................ 190 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 87
Display message ............................ 191 Switching the function on/off
Function/information .................... 180 (ATA) ................................................ 87
Active Driving Assistance package .. 180 Alarm system
Active Lane Keeping Assist see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating (on- Ambient lighting
board computer) ............................ 190 Setting the brightness (on-board
Display message ............................ 191 computer) ...................................... 190
Function/information .................... 183 Setting the color (on-board com-
Active multicontour seat .................. 116 puter) ............................................. 190
Active Parking Assist AMG adaptive sport suspension
Display message ............................ 191 system ................................................ 167
Function/notes ............................. 170 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 190
Important safety notes .................. 170 Animals in the vehicle ......................... 75
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 84 Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Index 5
Anti-Theft Alarm system Driving tips .................................... 144

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Emergency running mode .............. 144
Ashtray ............................................... 251 Engaging drive position .................. 143
Assistance display (on-board com- Engaging neutral ............................ 143
puter) .................................................. 190 Engaging park position (AMG vehi-
Assistance menu (on-board com- cles) ............................................... 142
puter) .................................................. 190 Engaging park position automati-
ASSYST PLUS cally ............................................... 143
Displaying a service message ........ 266 Engaging reverse gear ................... 143
Hiding a service message .............. 266 Engaging the park position ............ 143
Notes ............................................. 266 Kickdown ....................................... 144
Resetting the service interval dis- Manual drive program .................... 144
play ................................................ 266 Manual drive program (AMG vehi-
Service message ............................ 266 cles) ............................................... 144
Special service requirements ......... 266 Overview ........................................ 142
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Problem (malfunction) ................... 144
Activating/deactivating ................... 87 Program selector button ................ 144
Function ........................................... 87 Pulling away ................................... 140
Switching off the alarm .................... 87 Selector lever ................................ 142
ATTENTION ASSIST Starting the engine ........................ 140
Activating/deactivating ................. 190 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 144
Display message ............................ 191 Transmission position display ........ 142
Function/notes ............................. 175 Transmission position display
Audio 20 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 143
Components .................................. 216 Transmission positions .................. 144
Controller ...................................... 222 Automatic transmission emer-
Display ........................................... 217 gency mode ....................................... 144
Functions ....................................... 216
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center B
see Qualified specialist workshop
Back button ....................................... 222
Authorized workshop
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 76
see Qualified specialist workshop
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
AUTO lights
PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist
Display message ............................ 191
Function/notes ................................ 76
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 267
Important safety notes .................... 77
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
Battery (SmartKey)
stop function) .................................... 141
Checking .......................................... 93
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
Replacing ......................................... 93
start/stop function) .......................... 141 Battery (vehicle)
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 121 Charging ........................................ 278
Automatic transmission Important safety notes .................. 275
Accelerator pedal position ............. 144 Jump starting ................................. 279
Automatic drive program ............... 144 Belt
Changing gear ............................... 144 see Seat belts
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 142 Blind Spot Assist
Display message ............................ 191 Activating/deactivating ................. 190
Drive program display .................... 143
6 Index
Activating/deactivating (on- Buttons and controller ...................... 222

board computer) ............................ 190
Notes/function .............................. 178 C
see Active Blind Spot Assist
BlueTEC California
Adding DEF .................................... 149 Important notice for retail cus-
BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 341 tomers and lessees .......................... 29
Calling up a malfunction
Bluetooth®
see Display messages
Connecting another mobile Car
phone ............................................ 231
see Vehicle
Entering the passcode ................... 229 Car key
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 229
see SmartKey
see also Digital Operator's Man- Care
ual .................................................. 214
360° camera ................................. 268
Telephony ...................................... 227
Car wash ........................................ 267
Box (trunk) ......................................... 245
Carpets .......................................... 268
Brake Assist
Display ........................................... 268
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Exterior lights ................................ 268
Brake fluid
Gear or selector lever .................... 268
Display message ............................ 194 Interior ........................................... 268
Notes ............................................. 342 Matte finish ................................... 268
Brake force distribution
Notes ............................................. 266
see EBD (electronic brake force Paint .............................................. 268
distribution) Plastic trim .................................... 268
Brake lamps
Power washer ................................ 268
Display message ............................ 191 Rear view camera .......................... 268
Brakes
Roof lining ...................................... 268
ABS .................................................. 75 Seat belt ........................................ 268
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 80 Seat cover ..................................... 268
BAS .................................................. 76 Sensors ......................................... 268
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Tail pipes ....................................... 268
Assist ............................................... 76 Trim pieces .................................... 268
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 342 Washing by hand ........................... 268
Display message ............................ 192 Wheels ........................................... 268
High-performance brake system .... 154 Windows ........................................ 268
HOLD function ............................... 165 Wiper blades .................................. 268
Important safety notes .................. 154 Wooden trim .................................. 268
Maintenance .................................. 154 Cargo compartment
Parking brake ................................ 152 Opening/closing (from outside,
Riding tips ...................................... 154 HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 99
Warning lamp ................................. 204 Cargo compartment cover
Breakdown
Important safety notes .................. 243
see Flat tire Cargo compartment enlargement ... 241
Brightness control (instrument
Cargo compartment floor ................. 248
cluster lighting) ................................... 37
Cargo net
Bulbs
Attaching ....................................... 245
see Replacing bulbs
Important safety information ......... 244
Index 7
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 242 Problem with the rear window
CD defroster ........................................ 133
see also Digital Operator's Man- Problems with cooling with air
ual .................................................. 214 dehumidification ............................ 133
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 190 Rear control panel ......................... 132
Center console Refrigerant ..................................... 344
Lower section .................................. 42 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 344
Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 43 Setting the air distribution ............. 133
Upper section .................................. 41 Setting the air vents ...................... 133
Central locking Setting the airflow ......................... 133
Automatic locking (on-board com- Setting the climate mode ............... 133
puter) ............................................. 190 Setting the temperature ................ 133
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 90 Switching air-recirculation mode
Changing bulbs on/off ............................................ 133
High-beam headlamps ................... 124 Switching on/off ........................... 133
Turn signals (front) ......................... 125 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 133
Child Switching the rear window
Restraint system .............................. 69 defroster on/off ............................ 133
Child seat Switching the ZONE function on/
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 73 off .................................................. 133
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Coat hooks ......................................... 245
anchors ............................................ 70 Cockpit
On the front-passenger seat ............ 73 Overview .......................................... 36
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 73 see Instrument cluster
Top Tether ....................................... 71 Collapsible spare wheel
Child-proof locks Inflating ......................................... 331
Important safety notes .................... 73 see Emergency spare wheel
Rear doors ....................................... 74 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Children PLUS
Special seat belt retractor ............... 69 Display message ............................ 191
Cigarette lighter ................................ 251 Operation/notes .............................. 78
Cleaning COMAND
Mirror turn signal ........................... 268 Components .................................. 216
Clear button ....................................... 222 Control panel ................................. 219
Climate control Controller ...................................... 222
Automatic climate control (3- Display ........................................... 217
zone) .............................................. 132 Functions ....................................... 216
Controlling automatically ............... 133 Combination switch .......................... 121
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 133 Combined cargo cover and net ........ 243
Defrosting the windows ................. 133 Connecting a USB device
Defrosting the windshield .............. 133 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Dual-zone automatic climate con- ual .................................................. 214
trol ................................................. 131 Consumption statistics (on-board
General notes ................................ 130 computer) .......................................... 190
Indicator lamp ................................ 133 Control panel ..................................... 221
Maximum cooling .......................... 133 Controller ........................................... 222
Overview of systems ...................... 130 Convenience box ............................... 245
8 Index
Coolant (engine) Declarations of conformity ................. 31

Checking the level ......................... 265 DEF
Display message ............................ 199 Adding ........................................... 149
Filling capacity ............................... 343 Filling capacity ............................... 341
Important safety notes .................. 342 Important safety notes .................. 341
Temperature (on-board com- Delayed switch-off
puter) ............................................. 190 Exterior lighting (on-board com-
Temperature gauge ........................ 188 puter) ............................................. 190
Warning lamp ................................. 209 Interior lighting .............................. 190
Cooling Diagnostics connection ...................... 31
see Climate control Diesel .................................................. 339
Copyright ............................................. 34 Digital Operator's Manual
Cornering light function Help ................................................. 25
Display message ............................ 191 Introduction ..................................... 25
Function/notes ............................. 121 Digital speedometer ......................... 190
Crash-responsive emergency light- DIRECT SELECT lever
ing ....................................................... 123 Automatic transmission ................. 142
Cruise control Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 268
Activation conditions ..................... 156 Display messages
Cruise control lever ....................... 156 ASSYST PLUS ................................ 266
Deactivating ................................... 156 Calling up (on-board com-
Display message ............................ 191 puter) ............................................. 191
Driving system ............................... 155 Driving systems ............................. 191
Function/notes ............................. 155 Engine ............................................ 199
Important safety notes .................. 155 General notes ................................ 191
Selecting ........................................ 156 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 191
Setting a speed .............................. 156 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 191
Storing and maintaining current Lights ............................................. 191
speed ............................................. 156 Safety systems .............................. 192
Cup holder SmartKey ....................................... 191
Center console .............................. 251 Tires ............................................... 200
Important safety notes .................. 251 Vehicle ........................................... 201
Rear compartment ......................... 251 Distance recorder ............................. 190
Customer Assistance Center see Odometer
(CAC) ..................................................... 32 see Trip odometer
Customer Relations Department ....... 32 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 210
Distance warning function
D Function/notes ................................ 79
Dashboard DISTRONIC PLUS
see Instrument cluster Activating ....................................... 158
Data Activation conditions ..................... 158
see Technical data Deactivating ................................... 161
Daytime running lamps Display message ............................ 191
Display message ............................ 191 Displays in the multifunction dis-
Switching on/off (on-board com- play ................................................ 161
puter) ............................................. 190 Function/notes ............................. 156
Switching on/off (switch) .............. 121 Important safety notes .................. 157
Index 9
Setting the specified minimum PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 84

distance ......................................... 161 STEER CONTROL ............................. 86
Stopping ........................................ 160 Driving systems
Doors 360°camera .................................. 173
Automatic locking (on-board com- Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 180
puter) ............................................. 190 Active Driving Assistance pack-
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 95 age ................................................. 180
Central locking/unlocking Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 183
(SmartKey) ....................................... 90 Active Parking Assist ..................... 170
Control panel ................................... 45 AIRMATIC ...................................... 166
Display message ............................ 191 AMG adaptive sport suspension
Emergency locking ........................... 96 system ........................................... 167
Emergency unlocking ....................... 96 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 175
Important safety notes .................... 95 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 178
Opening (from inside) ...................... 95 Cruise control ................................ 155
Drinking and driving ......................... 153 Display message ............................ 191
Drive program DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 156
Automatic ...................................... 144 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
Display ........................................... 142 Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 163
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 143 HOLD function ............................... 165
Manual ........................................... 144 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 179
Manual (AMG vehicles) .................. 144 Lane Tracking package .................. 177
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 190 PARKTRONIC ................................. 168
Drive program selector ..................... 144 RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 166
Driver's door Rear view camera .......................... 171
see Doors Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 176
Driving abroad Driving tips
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 266 AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 154
Driving on flooded roads .................. 155 Automatic transmission ................. 144
Driving safety systems Brakes ........................................... 154
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 75 Break-in period .............................. 136
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 84 Downhill gradient ........................... 154
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 80 Drinking and driving ....................... 153
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 76 Driving in winter ............................. 155
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Driving on flooded roads ................ 155
Assist ............................................... 76 Driving on wet roads ...................... 155
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Exhaust check ............................... 154
PLUS ................................................ 78 Fuel ................................................ 153
Distance warning function ............... 79 General .......................................... 153
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Hydroplaning ................................. 155
bution) ............................................. 84 Icy road surfaces ........................... 155
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Limited braking efficiency on sal-
gram) ............................................... 80 ted roads ....................................... 154
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Snow chains .................................. 291
System) ........................................... 81 Wet road surface ........................... 154
Important safety information ........... 75 DVD video
Overview .......................................... 75 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 190
10 Index
see also Digital Operator's Man- Vehicle ............................................. 96

ual .................................................. 214 Emergency spare wheel
General notes ................................ 329
E Important safety notes .................. 329
Removing ....................................... 329
E10
Storage location ............................ 329
see Fuel
Stowing .......................................... 330
EASY-ENTRY feature
Technical data ............................... 332
Activating/deactivating ................. 190 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Function/notes ............................. 117
Activation ......................................... 63
EASY-EXIT feature
Emergency unlocking
Function/notes ............................. 117
Tailgate .......................................... 103
Switching on/off ........................... 190 Emissions control
EASY-PACK cargo compartment
Service and warranty information .... 28
management system ........................ 246 Engine
EASY-PACK folding floor
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 202
Important safety notes .................. 248 Display message ............................ 199
EASY-PACK folding luggage-com-
ECO start/stop function ................ 141
partment floor
Engine number ............................... 337
Opening and closing ...................... 249 Irregular running ............................ 142
EASY-PACK load-securing kit
Jump-starting ................................. 279
Components and storage .............. 246 Starting problems .......................... 142
Inserting the brackets into the Starting the engine with the
loading rail ..................................... 247 SmartKey ....................................... 140
EASY-PACK rear sill protector .......... 249 Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 140
EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 245 Switching off .................................. 152
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 284
bution) Engine electronics
Display message ............................ 194 Problem (malfunction) ................... 142
Function/notes ................................ 84 Engine oil
ECO display Adding ........................................... 264
Function/notes ............................. 154 Checking the oil level ..................... 263
ECO start/stop function Checking the oil level using the
Automatic engine start .................. 141 dipstick .......................................... 264
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 141 Display message ............................ 191
Deactivating/activating ................. 141 Filling capacity ............................... 342
General information ....................... 141 Notes about oil grades ................... 341
Important safety notes .................. 141 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 263
Introduction ................................... 141 Temperature (on-board com-
Electronic Stability Program puter) ............................................. 190
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Entering an address
Emergency see also Digital Operator's Man-
Automatic measures after an acci- ual .................................................. 214
dent ................................................. 67 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Emergency release gram)
Driver's door .................................... 96 Activating/deactivating (except
Fuel filler flap ................................. 147 AMG vehicles) .................................. 81
Trunk ............................................. 103
Index 11
Activating/deactivating (on- Flat tire

board computer, except AMG MOExtended tires .......................... 272
vehicles) ........................................ 190 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 271
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 190 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 273
Characteristics ................................. 81 see Emergency spare wheel
Deactivating/activating (button Floormats ........................................... 259
in AMG vehicles) .............................. 82 Frequencies
Deactivating/activating (except Mobile phone ................................. 334
AMG vehicles) ................................ 190 Two-way radio ................................ 334
Display message ............................ 192 Front fog lamps
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 81 Display message ............................ 191
Function/notes ................................ 80 Fuel
General notes .................................. 80 Additives ........................................ 339
Important safety information ........... 81 Consumption statistics .................. 190
Trailer stabilization ........................... 84 Displaying the current consump-
Warning lamp ................................. 206 tion ................................................ 190
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- Displaying the range ...................... 190
tem) ...................................................... 81 Driving tips .................................... 153
Exhaust check ................................... 154 Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 340
Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instruc- Fuel gauge ....................................... 37
tions) .................................................. 268 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 338
Exterior lighting Important safety notes .................. 337
Setting options .............................. 120 Premium-grade unleaded gaso-
see Lights line ................................................. 338
Exterior mirrors Problem (malfunction) ................... 149
Adjusting ....................................... 117 Quality (diesel) ............................... 339
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 117 Refueling ........................................ 145
Folding in when locking (on-board Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 338
computer) ...................................... 190 Fuel filler flap
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 117 Emergency release ........................ 147
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 117 Opening ......................................... 146
Setting ........................................... 117 Fuel level
Storing settings (memory func- Calling up the range (on-board
tion) ............................................... 117 computer) ...................................... 190
Storing the parking position .......... 117 Fuel tank
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 239 Capacity ........................................ 338
Problem (malfunction) ................... 149
F Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool
kit) ...................................................... 270
Favorites Fuses
Adding ........................................... 223 Allocation chart ............................. 284
Deleting ......................................... 224 Before changing ............................. 284
Displaying and calling up ............... 223 Fuse box in the cargo compart-
Moving ........................................... 224 ment .............................................. 285
Overview ........................................ 223 Fuse box in the engine compart-
Renaming ....................................... 224 ment .............................................. 285
Filler cap Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 285
see Fuel filler flap Important safety notes .................. 284
12 Index
G Home address
Garage door opener ual .................................................. 214
Clearing the memory ..................... 259 Hood
General notes ................................ 256 Closing ........................................... 263
Important safety notes .................. 257 Display message ............................ 201
Opening/closing the garage door .. 259 Important safety notes .................. 262
Programming (button in the rear- Opening ......................................... 262
view mirror) ................................... 257 Hydroplaning ..................................... 155
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 257
Gear indicator (on-board com-
I
puter) .................................................. 190
Gear or selector lever (cleaning Ignition lock
guidelines) ......................................... 268 see Key positions
Genuine parts ...................................... 27 Immobilizer .......................................... 87
Glove box ........................................... 239 Indicator and warning lamps
Google™ Local Search COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
see also Digital Operator's Man- PLUS .............................................. 210
ual .................................................. 214 Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
H Indicators
see Turn signals
HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 99 Insect protection on the radiator .... 263
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 120 Instrument cluster
Head bags Overview .......................................... 37
Display message ............................ 196 Settings ......................................... 190
Head restraints Warning and indicator lamps ........... 38
Adjusting ....................................... 116 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 190
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 116 Interior lighting
see NECK-PRO head restraints Automatic control .......................... 123
see NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Delayed switch-off (on-board
Headlamps computer) ...................................... 190
Fogging up ..................................... 120 Emergency lighting ........................ 123
see Automatic headlamp mode Manual control ............................... 123
Heating Overview ........................................ 123
see Climate control Reading lamp ................................. 123
High-beam headlamps Setting the brightness of the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 122 ambient lighting (on-board com-
Changing bulbs .............................. 124 puter) ............................................. 190
Display message ............................ 191 Setting the brightness of the dis-
Switching on/off ........................... 121 play/switch (on-board computer) .. 190
Hill start assist .................................. 141 Setting the color of the ambient
HOLD function lighting (on-board computer) ......... 190
Activating ....................................... 165 Internet
Deactivating ................................... 166 Selecting/setting access data ....... 232
Function/notes ............................. 165 Setting up an Internet connection .. 232
Index 13
iPod® Automatic headlamp mode ............ 121

see also Digital Operator's Man- Cornering light function ................. 121
ual .................................................. 214 Hazard warning lamps ................... 120
High beam flasher .......................... 121
J High-beam headlamps ................... 121
Light switch ................................... 120
Jack Low-beam headlamps .................... 121
Storage location ............................ 270 Parking lamps ................................ 121
Using ............................................. 310 Rear fog lamp ................................ 121
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 279 Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board com-
K puter) ............................................. 190
Key positions Setting the brightness of the dis-
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 138 play/switch (on-board computer) .. 190
SmartKey ....................................... 137 Setting the color of the ambient
KEYLESS-GO lighting (on-board computer) ......... 190
Deactivation ..................................... 91 Standing lamps .............................. 121
Display message ............................ 191 Switching the daytime running
Locking ............................................ 91 lamps on/off (on-board com-
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 139 puter) ............................................. 190
Start/Stop button .......................... 138 Switching the daytime running
Starting the engine ........................ 140 lamps on/off (switch) .................... 121
Unlocking ......................................... 91 Switching the exterior lighting
Kickdown delayed switch-off on/off (on-
Driving tips .................................... 144 board computer) ............................ 190
Manual drive program .................... 145 Switching the surround lighting
Knee bag .............................................. 56 on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 190
L Turn signals ................................... 121
see Replacing bulbs
Lamps List of access data
see Warning and indicator lamps New provider ................................. 233
Lane Keeping Assist List of mobile phone network pro-
Activating/deactivating ................. 190 viders
Function/information .................... 179 With the selected provider ............. 233
Lane Tracking package ..................... 177 Loading guidelines ............................ 238
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 190 Locking
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat see Central locking
anchors ................................................ 70 Locking (doors)
License plate lamp (display mes- Automatic ........................................ 95
sage) ................................................... 191 Emergency locking ........................... 96
Light function, active From inside (central locking but-
Display message ............................ 191 ton) .................................................. 95
Light sensor (display message) ....... 191 Locking centrally
Lights see Central locking
Activating/deactivating the inte- Locking verification signal (on-
rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 190 board computer) ............................... 190
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 122
14 Index
Low-beam headlamps Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

Display message ............................ 191 360°camera .................................. 173
Switching on/off ........................... 121 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......... 75
Luggage holder (EASY-PACK load- Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 180
securing kit) ....................................... 247 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 183
Lumbar support Active Parking Assist ..................... 170
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 175
port ................................................ 116 BAS (Brake Assist) ........................... 76
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS)
M with Cross-Traffic Assist .................. 76
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 178
M+S tires ............................................ 290 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Malfunction message PLUS ................................................ 78
see Display messages Cruise control ................................ 155
Matte finish (cleaning instruc- DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 156
tions) .................................................. 268 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
mbrace Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 163
Call priority .................................... 256 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Display message ............................ 191 gram) ............................................... 80
Downloading destinations General notes ................................ 155
(COMAND) ..................................... 252 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 179
Downloading routes ....................... 252 PARKTRONIC ................................. 168
Emergency call .............................. 253
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-
General notes ................................ 252
pant protection) ............................... 66
Geo fencing ................................... 252
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 252 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 84
MB info call button ........................ 255 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
Remote vehicle locking .................. 252 occupant protection PLUS) .............. 67
Roadside Assistance button .......... 254 Rear view camera .......................... 171
Search & Send ............................... 252 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 176
Self-test ......................................... 252 Message memory (on-board com-
Speed alert .................................... 252 puter) .................................................. 191
System .......................................... 252 Messages
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 252 see Display messages
Vehicle remote malfunction diag- Mirrors
nosis .............................................. 252 see Exterior mirrors
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 252 see Rear-view mirror
Mechanical key see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Function/notes ................................ 92 Mobile phone
Inserting .......................................... 92 Authorizing .................................... 229
Locking vehicle ................................ 96 Connecting (Bluetooth® inter-
Removing ......................................... 92 face) .............................................. 227
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 96 Connecting another mobile
Media Interface phone ............................................ 231
see Separate operating instructions De-authorizing ............................... 231
Memory card (audio) ......................... 190 Enabling for Internet access .......... 233
Memory function ............................... 117 Frequencies ................................... 334
Installation ..................................... 334
Index 15
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 190 O

Transmission output (maximum) .... 334
Modifying the programming Occupant Classification System
(SmartKey) ........................................... 92 (OCS)
MOExtended tires .............................. 272 Conditions ....................................... 58
Mounting wheels Faults ............................................... 62
Operation ......................................... 58
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 313
System self-test ............................... 60
Mounting a new wheel ................... 313
Occupant safety
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 309
Automatic measures after an acci-
Raising the vehicle ......................... 310
dent ................................................. 67
Removing a wheel .......................... 312
Children in the vehicle ..................... 68
Securing the vehicle against roll-
Important safety notes .................... 49
ing away ........................................ 310
MP3 Introduction to the restraint sys-
tem .................................................. 48
Operation ....................................... 190
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 58
ual .................................................. 214
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
see separate operating instructions
Multifunction display lamps ............................................... 49
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 75
Function/notes ............................. 188
Permanent display ......................... 190 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-
Multifunction steering wheel pant protection) ............................... 66
Operating the on-board computer .. 189 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
Overview .......................................... 39 occupant protection PLUS) .............. 67
Music files Restraint system warning lamp ........ 49
see also Digital Operator's Man- OCS
ual .................................................. 214 Conditions ....................................... 58
Faults ............................................... 62
N Operation ......................................... 58
System self-test ............................... 60
Navigation Odometer ........................................... 190
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 190 Oil
see also Digital Operator's Man- see Engine oil
ual .................................................. 214 On-board computer
Showing/hiding the menu ............. 225 AMG menu ..................................... 190
Switching to ................................... 225 Assistance menu ........................... 190
see separate operating instructions Audio menu ................................... 190
NECK-PRO head restraints Convenience submenu .................. 190
Operation ......................................... 65 Display messages .......................... 191
Resetting triggered .......................... 65 Displaying a service message ........ 266
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 161
Important safety notes .................... 65 Factory settings submenu ............. 190
Operation ......................................... 65 Important safety notes .................. 188
Resetting when triggered ................. 66 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 190
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- Lighting submenu .......................... 190
cle ....................................................... 136 Menu overview .............................. 190
Message memory .......................... 191
Navigation menu ............................ 190
16 Index
Operation ....................................... 189 Position of exterior mirror, front-

RACETIMER ................................... 190 passenger side ............................... 117
Service menu ................................. 190 Rear view camera .......................... 171
Settings menu ............................... 190 see PARKTRONIC
Standard display ............................ 190 Parking aid
Telephone menu ............................ 190 Active Parking Assist ..................... 170
Trip menu ...................................... 190 see Exterior mirrors
Vehicle submenu ........................... 190 see PARKTRONIC
Video DVD operation ..................... 190 Parking assistance
Online and Internet functions see PARKTRONIC
Enabling a mobile phone for Inter- Parking brake
net access ..................................... 233 Display message ............................ 191
Manually setting the access data Notes/function .............................. 152
of the mobile phone network pro- PARKTRONIC
vider .............................................. 233 Deactivating/activating ................. 170
Selecting the access data of the Driving system ............................... 168
mobile phone network provider ..... 233 Function/notes ............................. 168
Setting up an Internet connection .. 232 Important safety notes .................. 168
Operating safety Problem (malfunction) ................... 170
Declaration of conformity ................ 31 Range of the sensors ..................... 169
Important safety notes .................... 30 Warning display ............................. 170
Operating system PASSENGER AIR BAG
see On-board computer Display message ............................ 198
Operation Problems (malfunction) .................. 198
Digital Operator's Manual ................ 25 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Operator's Manual Indicator lamp .................................. 49
Vehicle equipment ........................... 28 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 75
Outside temperature display ........... 188 Phone book
Overhead control panel ...................... 44 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Override feature ual .................................................. 214
Rear side windows ........................... 74 Phone call
Dialing ........................................... 232
P Plastic hooks ..................................... 242
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-
Paint code number ............................ 336
tions) .................................................. 268
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 268
Power washers .................................. 268
Panic alarm .......................................... 48 Power windows
Panorama roof with power tilt/
see Side windows
sliding panel
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection)
Opening/closing ............................ 108
Display message ............................ 191
Opening/closing the roller sun-
Operation ......................................... 66
blind ............................................... 109
PRE-SAFE® Brake
Problem (malfunction) ................... 111
Resetting ....................................... 109 Activating/deactivating ................. 190
Parking Display message ............................ 191
Important safety notes .................. 151 Function/notes ................................ 84
Parking brake ................................ 152 Important safety notes .................... 85
Index 17
Warning lamp ................................. 210 Rear view camera

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory Cleaning instructions ..................... 268
occupant protection PLUS) Displays in the Audio display ......... 173
Operation ......................................... 67 Displays in the COMAND display ... 173
Program selector button .................. 144 Function/notes ............................. 171
Protection against theft Switching on/off ........................... 172
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 87 Rear window blind ............................ 251
Immobilizer ...................................... 87 Rear window defroster
Protection of the environment Problem (malfunction) ................... 133
General notes .................................. 27 Switching on/off ........................... 133
Pulling away Rear window wiper
Automatic transmission ................. 140 Replacing the wiper blade .............. 126
General notes ................................ 140 Switching on/off ........................... 125
Rear-view mirror
Q Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 117
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 117
QR code Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 tem)
Rescue card ..................................... 33 Important safety notes .................. 344
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 31 Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 37
R Important safety notes .................. 145
RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 166 Refueling process .......................... 146
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 190 see Fuel
Radiator cover ................................... 263 Remote control
Radio Garage door opener ....................... 256
Displaying radio text ...................... 236 Programming (garage door
Overview ........................................ 235 opener) .......................................... 257
Selecting a station ......................... 190 Replacing bulbs
Setting the waveband .................... 235 Important safety notes .................. 123
Switching on .................................. 234 Overview of bulb types .................. 124
see separate operating instructions Reporting safety defects .................... 32
Radio mode Rescue card ......................................... 33
see also Digital Operator's Man- Reserve (fuel tank)
ual .................................................. 214 see Fuel
Radio-wave reception/transmis- Reserve fuel
sion in the vehicle Display message ............................ 191
Declaration of conformity ................ 31 Warning lamp ................................. 202
Reading lamp ..................................... 123 see Fuel
Rear fog lamp Residual heat (climate control) ........ 133
Display message ............................ 191 Restraint system
Switching on/off ........................... 121 Display message ............................ 195
Rear seats Introduction ..................................... 48
Folding the backrest forwards/ Warning lamp ................................. 208
back ............................................... 240 Warning lamp (function) ................... 49
Rear sill protector ............................. 249 Reverse gear
Engaging (automatic transmis-
sion) ............................................... 142
18 Index
Reversing feature Switching belt adjustment on/off

Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 107 (on-board computer) ...................... 190
Roller sunblinds ............................. 109 Warning lamp ................................. 202
Side windows ................................. 104 Warning lamp (function) ................... 54
Sliding sunroof ............................... 107 Seats
Trunk lid/tailgate ............................. 97 Active multicontour seat ................ 116
Reversing lamps (display mes- Adjusting (electrically) ................... 116
sage) ................................................... 191 Adjusting the 4‑way lumbar sup-
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 29 port ................................................ 116
Roller sunblind Adjusting the head restraint .......... 116
Panorama roof with power tilt/ Cleaning the cover ......................... 268
sliding panel .................................. 108 Correct driver's seat position ........ 114
Rear side windows ......................... 251 Folding the backrest (rear com-
Rear window .................................. 251 partment) forwards/back .............. 241
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Important safety notes .................. 115
guidelines) ......................................... 268 Seat heating problem .................... 117
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 344 Storing settings (memory func-
Route (navigation) tion) ............................................... 117
see Route guidance (navigation) Switching seat heating on/off ....... 116
Route guidance Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 116
see also Digital Operator's Man- Securing cargo .................................. 242
ual .................................................. 214 Selecting stations
Route guidance (navigation) ............ 190 Radio ............................................. 235
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 268
S Service menu (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 190
Safety Service products
Children in the vehicle ..................... 68 Brake fluid ..................................... 342
Safety system Coolant (engine) ............................ 342
see Driving safety systems DEF special additives ..................... 341
SD memory card Engine oil ....................................... 341
see also Digital Operator's Man- Fuel ................................................ 337
ual .................................................. 214 Important safety notes .................. 337
Search & Send Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
see also Digital Operator's Man- tem) ............................................... 344
ual .................................................. 214 Washer fluid ................................... 343
Seat belts Setting access data
Adjusting the driver's and front- Online and Internet ........................ 233
passenger seat belt ......................... 53 Setting the air distribution ............... 133
Adjusting the height ......................... 52 Setting the airflow ............................ 133
center rear-compartment seat ......... 53 Setting the date/time format
Cleaning ......................................... 268
Correct usage .................................. 51
ual .................................................. 214
Fastening ......................................... 52 Setting the language
Important safety guidelines ............. 50
Introduction ..................................... 50
ual .................................................. 214
Releasing ......................................... 53
Index 19
Setting the time Rear compartment ......................... 251

see also Digital Operator's Man- Spare wheel
ual .................................................. 214 Stowing .......................................... 330
Settings Special seat belt retractor .................. 69
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 190 Specialist workshop ............................ 31
On-board computer ....................... 190 Speed, controlling
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 190 see Cruise control
Side impact air bag ............................. 56 Speedometer
Side marker lamp (display mes- In the Instrument cluster ................. 37
sage) ................................................... 191 Segments ...................................... 188
Side windows Selecting the unit of measure-
Cleaning ......................................... 268 ment .............................................. 190
Important safety information ......... 104 see Instrument cluster
Opening/closing (all) ..................... 105 SPORT handling mode
Opening/closing (front) ................. 105 Activating/deactivating (AMG
Problem (malfunction) ................... 106 vehicles) .......................................... 82
Resetting ....................................... 105 Warning lamp ................................. 207
SIRIUS services Standing lamps
see also Digital Operator's Man- Display message ............................ 191
ual .................................................. 214 Switching on/off ........................... 121
Sliding sunroof Start/stop function
Important safety notes .................. 106 see ECO start/stop function
Opening/closing ............................ 107 Starting (engine) ................................ 139
Problem (malfunction) ................... 111 STEER CONTROL .................................. 86
Resetting ....................................... 108 Steering (display message) .............. 201
see Panorama roof with power Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
tilt/sliding panel (DISTRONIC PLUS)
SmartKey Activating/deactivating ................. 190
Changing the battery ....................... 93 Display message ............................ 191
Changing the programming ............. 92 Steering assistant STEER CON-
Checking the battery ....................... 93 TROL
Display message ............................ 191 see STEER CONTROL
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 90 Steering wheel
Important safety notes .................... 90 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 117
Loss ................................................. 94 Button overview ............................... 39
Mechanical key ................................ 92 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 189
Overview .......................................... 90 Important safety notes .................. 117
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 137 Paddle shifters ............................... 144
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 94 Steering wheel heating .................. 117
Starting the engine ........................ 140 Storing settings (memory func-
SMS tion) ............................................... 117
see also Digital Operator's Man- Steering wheel (cleaning instruc-
ual .................................................. 214 tions) .................................................. 268
Snow chains ...................................... 291 Steering wheel heating
Sockets Switching on/off ........................... 117
Center console .............................. 251 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 144
General notes ................................ 251 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 190
Luggage compartment ................... 251
20 Index
Stowage areas ................................... 238 Emergency spare wheel ................. 332

Stowage compartments Information .................................... 334
Armrest (under) ............................. 239 Tires/wheels ................................. 314
Center console .............................. 239 Vehicle data ................................... 344
Cup holders ................................... 251 Telephone
Display message) ........................... 191 Accepting a call ..................... 190, 231
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 239 Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
Glove box ....................................... 239 necting) ......................................... 229
Important safety information ......... 239 Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
Rear ............................................... 239 eral information) ............................ 227
Stowage net ................................... 239 De-authorizing (disconnecting) a
Under driver's seat/front- mobile phone ................................. 231
passenger seat .............................. 239 Ending an active call ...................... 232
Stowage net ....................................... 239 Entering phone numbers ................ 232
Stowage well beneath the trunk Establishing the connection from
floor .................................................... 248 the mobile phone ........................... 230
Summer tires ..................................... 290 Making a call ................................. 232
Sun visor ............................................ 251 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 190
Surround lighting (on-board com- Number from the phone book ........ 190
puter) .................................................. 190 Reconnecting a mobile phone
Suspension tuning automatically ................................. 231
AIRMATIC ...................................... 167 Redialing ........................................ 190
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 190 Rejecting a call .............................. 232
Switching air-recirculation mode Rejecting/ending a call ................. 190
on/off ................................................. 133 see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 214
T Switching between mobile
phones ........................................... 231
Tachometer ........................................ 188 Using the telephone ....................... 231
Tail lamps Telephone number
Display message ............................ 191 Entering ......................................... 232
Tailgate Telescopic rod (EASY-PACK load-
Display message ............................ 201 securing kit) ....................................... 248
Emergency unlocking ..................... 103 Temperature
Important safety notes .................... 96 Coolant .......................................... 188
Limiting the opening angle ............. 102 Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 190
Opening dimensions ...................... 344 Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 190
Opening/closing (automatically Outside temperature ...................... 188
from inside) ................................... 101 Setting (climate control) ................ 133
Opening/closing (automatically Through-loading feature ................... 239
from outside) ................................... 98 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 190
Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 97 Tire pressure
Tank Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 294
see Fuel tank Checking manually ........................ 294
Tank content Display message ............................ 200
Fuel gauge ....................................... 37 Maximum ....................................... 294
Technical data Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 274
Capacities ...................................... 337 Notes ............................................. 292
Index 21
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 274 Load index (definition) ................... 307

Recommended ............................... 291 Maximum load on a tire (defini-
Tire pressure monitor tion) ............................................... 308
Checking the tire pressure elec- Maximum loaded vehicle weight
tronically ........................................ 296 (definition) ..................................... 307
Function/notes ............................. 294 Maximum permissible tire pres-
General notes ................................ 294 sure (definition) ............................. 308
Important safety notes .................. 295 Maximum tire load ......................... 305
Radio type approval for the tire Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 308
pressure monitor ........................... 297 MOExtended tires .......................... 290
Restarting ...................................... 297 Optional equipment weight (defi-
Warning lamp ................................. 211 nition) ............................................ 308
Warning message .......................... 296 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-
Tire-change tool kit ........................... 270 inition) ........................................... 308
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 273 Replacing ....................................... 309
Tires Service life ..................................... 290
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 308 Sidewall (definition) ....................... 308
Average weight of the vehicle Speed rating (definition) ................ 307
occupants (definition) .................... 307 Storing ........................................... 309
Bar (definition) ............................... 306 Structure and characteristics
Changing a wheel .......................... 309 (definition) ..................................... 306
Characteristics .............................. 306 Temperature .................................. 302
Checking ........................................ 289 TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Curb weight (definition) ................. 308 (definition) ..................................... 308
Definition of terms ......................... 306 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 308
Direction of rotation ...................... 309 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 308
Display message ............................ 200 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 307
Distribution of the vehicle occu- Tire size (data) ............................... 314
pants (definition) ............................ 309 Tire size designation, load-bearing
DOT (Department of Transporta- capacity, speed rating .................... 303
tion) (definition) ............................. 307 Tire tread ....................................... 289
DOT, Tire Identification Number Tire tread (definition) ..................... 308
(TIN) ............................................... 306 Total load limit (definition) ............. 309
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Traction ......................................... 302
(definition) ..................................... 307 Traction (definition) ....................... 308
General notes ................................ 314 Tread wear ..................................... 302
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- Uniform Tire Quality Grading
inition) ........................................... 307 Standards ...................................... 301
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- Uniform Tire Quality Grading
ing) (definition) .............................. 307 Standards (definition) .................... 307
Important safety notes .................. 288 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 308
Increased vehicle weight due to Wheel and tire combination ........... 316
optional equipment (definition) ...... 307 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 307
Information on driving .................... 288 see Flat tire
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 307 Top Tether ............................................ 71
Labeling (overview) ........................ 303 Tow-starting
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 308 Emergency engine starting ............ 284
Load index ..................................... 305 Important safety notes .................. 281
22 Index
Towing a trailer Trunk lid

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 268 Display message ............................ 191
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Opening dimensions ...................... 344
gram) ............................................... 84 Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 344
Towing away Turn signals
Important safety guidelines ........... 281 Changing bulbs (front) ................... 125
Installing the towing eye ................ 282 Display message ............................ 191
Removing the towing eye ............... 283 Switching on/off ........................... 121
With both axles on the ground ....... 283 Two-way radio
With the rear axle raised ................ 283 Frequencies ................................... 334
Towing eye ......................................... 270 Installation ..................................... 334
Traffic reports Transmission output (maximum) .... 334
see also Digital Operator's Man- Type identification plate
ual .................................................. 214 see Vehicle identification plate
Traffic Sign Assist
Activating/deactivating the warn- U
ing function .................................... 190 Unlocking
Function/notes ............................. 176
Emergency unlocking ....................... 96
From inside the vehicle (central
Instrument cluster display ............. 177
unlocking button) ............................. 95
Transfer case ..................................... 145
Transmission
V
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position display ......... 143 Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 252
Transmission position display Vehicle
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 143 Correct use ...................................... 32
Transporting the vehicle .................. 283 Data acquisition ............................... 33
Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- Display message ............................ 201
tions) .................................................. 268 Equipment ....................................... 28
Trip computer (on-board com- Individual settings .......................... 190
puter) .................................................. 190 Limited Warranty ............................. 32
Trip odometer Loading .......................................... 298
Calling up ....................................... 190 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 96
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 190 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 90
Trunk Lowering ........................................ 313
Emergency release ........................ 103 Maintenance .................................... 29
Important safety notes .................... 96 Parking for a long period ................ 153
Locking separately ......................... 102 Pulling away ................................... 140
Opening/closing (automatically Raising ........................................... 310
from inside) ................................... 101 Reporting problems ......................... 32
Opening/closing (automatically Securing from rolling away ............ 310
from outside) ................................... 98 Towing away .................................. 281
Opening/closing (from outside, Transporting .................................. 283
HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 99 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 96
Opening/closing (manually from Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 90
outside) ............................................ 97 Vehicle data ................................... 344
Vehicle data ....................................... 344
Index 23
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 344 Checking ........................................ 289

Vehicle emergency locking ................ 96 Cleaning ......................................... 268
Vehicle identification number Emergency spare wheel ................. 329
see VIN General notes ................................ 314
Vehicle identification plate .............. 336 Important safety notes .................. 288
Vehicle level Information on driving .................... 288
AIRMATIC ...................................... 166 Interchanging/changing ................ 309
Vehicle maintenance Mounting a new wheel ................... 313
see ASSYST PLUS Mounting a wheel .......................... 309
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 270 Removing a wheel .......................... 312
Video Storing ........................................... 309
see also Digital Operator's Man- Tightening torque ........................... 313
ual .................................................. 214 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 314
Video (DVD) ........................................ 190 Window curtain air bag
VIN Operation ......................................... 57
Seat ............................................... 336 Windows
Type plate ...................................... 336 see Side windows
Voice Control System Windshield
see Separate operating instructions Defrosting ...................................... 133
Windshield washer fluid
W see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Warning and indicator lamps Adding washer fluid ....................... 266
ABS ................................................ 205 Important safety notes .................. 343
Brakes ........................................... 204 Windshield wipers
Check Engine ................................. 202 Problem (malfunction) ................... 127
Coolant .......................................... 209 Rear window wiper ........................ 125
Distance warning ........................... 210 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 125
ESP® .............................................. 206 Switching on/off ........................... 125
ESP® OFF ....................................... 207 Winter driving
Fuel tank ........................................ 202 Important safety notes .................. 290
General notes ................................ 202 Slippery road surfaces ................... 155
Overview .......................................... 38 Snow chains .................................. 291
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 49 Winter operation
Reserve fuel ................................... 202 Radiator cover ............................... 263
Restraint system ............................ 208 Winter tires
Seat belt ........................................ 202 M+S tires ....................................... 290
SPORT handling mode ................... 207 Wiper blades
Tire pressure monitor .................... 211 Cleaning ......................................... 268
Warranty .............................................. 28 Important safety notes .................. 125
Washer fluid Replacing (rear window) ................ 126
Display message ............................ 191 Replacing (windshield) ................... 126
Wheel and tire combination Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
see Tires tions) .................................................. 268
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 313 Workshop
Wheel chock ...................................... 310 see Qualified specialist workshop
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 309
24 Index
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 133
Digital Operator's Manual 25
Introduction Operation
The printed Operator's Manual provides infor- Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-
mation about the safe operation of your vehi- ual
cle. The Digital Operator's Manual addition- X Press the Ø button in the center con-
ally describes further functions and equip- sole.
ment installed in your vehicle. The vehicle The overview relating to the vehicle
functions and functions of Audio 20 or appears.
COMAND are described in the Digital Opera- X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item
tor's Manual. You can call up the Digital Oper- by turning 3 or pressing 7 the con-
ator's Manual via Audio 20 or COMAND. troller.
i You will not incur any costs when calling X Confirm 7 the message about the warning
up the Digital Operator's Manual. The Dig- and safety notes.
ital Operator's Manual works without con- The basic menu for the Digital Operator's
necting to the Internet. Manual appears.
There are three ways to access the topics of
the Digital Operator's Manual:
Operating the Digital Operator's Man-
RVisual search
ual
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the General notes
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you Please observe the information about the
can access many of the different topics operation of the controller (Y page 222).
covered by the Digital Operator's Manual.
To access the vehicle interior section,
Content pages
select the "Vehicle interior" view.
RKeyword search The content pages can be accessed by means
The keyword search allows you to search of a visual search, a keyword search or using
for a keyword by entering characters. Fur- the contents.
ther information can be found in the Digital
Operator's Manual in the "Audio 20" or
"COMAND" section under the "Character
entry (telephony)" keyword.
RContents
You can select individual sections in the
contents.
i The Digital Operator's Manual is deacti-
vated for safety reasons while driving.
X To scroll forwards/backwards: turn

3 the controller.
X To display in full-screen or animation:
slide 8 the controller to the left :.
26 Digital Operator's Manual
X To select information texts or save

bookmarks: slide 9 the controller to
the right ;.
X To select a link: slide 6 the controller
downwards =.
X To exit a content page: select the %
symbol ?.
X To call up the basic menu of the Digital
Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol
A.
X To switch functions to Audio 20 or
COMAND using the buttons on the cen-
ter console: press the $, %, Õ or
Ø button.
The selected menu appears. The Digital
Operator's Manual remains open in the
background.
Introduction 27
Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations
that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the operating instructions require
and humanity into account. you to dispose of materials, first try to regen-
You too can help to protect the environment erate or re-use them. Observe the relevant
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- environmental rules and regulations when
tally responsible manner. disposing of materials. In this way you will
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, help to protect the environment.
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating conditions of your vehicle Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Ryour personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind: Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions:
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
sumption. parts.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures
are correct. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
the following areas of your vehicle:
them.
Rdoors
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should Rdoor pillars
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rdoor sills
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rseats
qualified specialist workshop. Rcockpit
Personal driving style: Rinstrument cluster
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rcenter console
starting the engine. Do not install accessories such as audio
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle systems in these areas. Do not carry out
is stationary. repairs or welding. You could impair the
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
from the vehicle in front. tems.
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
braking. qualified specialist workshop.
Z
28 Introduction
You could jeopardize the operating safety of The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels Booklet are important documents and should
as well as accessories relevant to safety be kept in the vehicle.
which have not been approved by Mercedes.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-
evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use Service and vehicle operation
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and Warranty
accessories that have been specifically The implied warranty for your vehicle applies
approved for your vehicle. in accordance with the warranty terms and
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to conditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- mation booklet.
cifically developed, manufactured or selected Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should accordance with the following warranty terms
therefore be used. and conditions:
More than 300,000 different genuine RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for REmission System Warranty
Mercedes-Benz models.
REmission Performance Warranty
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
tain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
for necessary service and repair work. In addi- setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
tion, strategically located parts delivery cen- Island and Vermont Emission Control Sys-
ters provide quick and reliable parts service. tem Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
Always specify the vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes- laws)
Benz parts (Y page 336). Replacement parts and accessories are cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-
sories warranties. These are available at any
Operator's Manual authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and War-

ranty Information booklet, have an author-
This Operator's Manual describes all models ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
and all standard and optional equipment of replacement. The new Service and War-
your vehicle available at the time of going to ranty Information booklet will be posted to
print. Country-specific differences are possi- you.
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Introduction 29
Information for customers in Califor- Maintenance

nia
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
Under California law you may be entitled to a all the necessary maintenance work which
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the should be done at regular intervals.
purchase price or lease price, if after a rea- Always have the Service and Warranty Book-
sonable number of repair attempts let with you when you bring the vehicle to an
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-
ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or vice advisor will record every service for you
more substantial defects or malfunctions in in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
the vehicle that are covered by its express
warranty. During the period of 18 months
from original delivery of the vehicle or the Roadside Assistance
accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately
29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
whichever occurs first, a reasonable number Program offers technical help in the event of a
of repair attempts is presumed for a retail breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
buyer or lessee if one or more of the following Assistance Hotline are answered by our
occurs: agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc- (USA)
tion results in a condition that is likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury if the 1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc- For additional information, refer to the
tion has been subject to repair two or Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
more times, and you have directly noti- gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-
fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing tance" section in the Service and Warranty
of the need for its repair, booklet (Canada). You will find both in your
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc- vehicle literature portfolio.
tion of a less serious nature than cate-
gory (1) has been subject to repair four or
more times and you have directly notified Change of address or change of own-
us in writing of the need for its repair, or ership
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of In the event of a change of address, please
repair of the same or different substantial send us the "Notification of Address Change"
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-
total of more than 30 calendar days. ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance Center (USA) at the hotline number
Please send your written notice to:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Service Center (Canada) at
Customer Assistance Center 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-
One Mercedes Drive tacting you in a timely manner should the
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
Z
30 Introduction
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Center (USA) at the hotline number Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or nance work as well as any required repairs
Customer Service (Canada) at carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
1-800-387-0100.
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
Vehicle operation outside the USA
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
and Canada
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign of fire.
countries, please be aware that: When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
Rservice facilities or replacement parts may check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
not be readily available. particular, remove parts of plants or other
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic flammable materials which have become
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
may cause damage to the catalytic con- qualified specialist workshop.
verter.
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower
G WARNING
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause Modifications to electronic components, their
engine damage. software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available
worked components. In particular, systems
for delivery in Europe through our European
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
Delivery Program. For details, consult an
result, these may no longer function as inten-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
one of the following addresses.
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
In the USA accident and injury.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
European Delivery Department tronic components or their software. You
One Mercedes Drive should have all work to electrical and elec-
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
In Canada specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
European Delivery Department
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
98 Vanderhoof Avenue curb or an unpaved road
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb or a hole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage
Operating safety
or parts of the chassis
Important safety notes In situations like this, the body, the under-
carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires
G WARNING could be damaged without the damage
If you do not have the prescribed service/ being visible. Components damaged in this
maintenance work or any required repairs way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of
Introduction 31
an accident, no longer withstand the strain Diagnostics connection

they are designed to.
The diagnostics connection is only intended
If the underbody paneling is damaged,
for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
combustible materials such as leaves,
a qualified specialist workshop.
grass or twigs can gather between the
underbody and the underbody paneling. If G WARNING
these materials come in contact with hot If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
parts of the exhaust system, they can catch connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
fire. operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
In such situations, have the vehicle the operating safety of the vehicle could be
checked and repaired immediately at a affected. There is a risk of an accident.
qualified specialist workshop. If on con- Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-
tinuing your journey you notice that driving tics connection in the vehicle.
safety is impaired, pull over and stop the
vehicle immediately, paying attention to G WARNING
road and traffic conditions. In such cases, Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
consult a qualified specialist workshop. pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Declarations of conformity
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
Vehicle components which receive stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
and/or transmit radio waves the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper- loose floormats and do not place floormats on
ation is subject to the following two condi- top of one another.
tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-
ful interference, and 2) These devices must ! If the engine is switched off and equip-
accept any interference received, including ment on the diagnostics connection is
interference that may cause undesired oper- used, the starter battery may discharge.
ation. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for com- Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
pliance could void the user’s authority to connection can lead to emissions monitoring
operate the equipment." information being reset, for example. This
may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle requirements of the next emissions test dur-
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt ing the main inspection.
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) These devices
may not cause interference, and (2) These Qualified specialist workshop
devices must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a
operation of the device." qualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-
essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-
fications to correctly carry out the work
required on your vehicle. This is especially the
case for work relevant to safety.
Z
32 Introduction
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book- 98 Vanderhoof Avenue

let. Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Always have the following work carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork relevant to safety Reporting safety defects
Rservice and maintenance work USA only:
Rrepair work The following text is published as required of
Ralterations, installation work and modifica- manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
tions Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
Rwork on electronic components
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
Correct use which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
If you remove any warning stickers, you or inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-
Leave warning stickers in position. ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
Observe the following information when driv- If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
ing your vehicle: open an investigation, and if it finds that a
Rthe safety notes in this manual safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
Rthe vehicle technical data may order a recall and remedy campaign.
Rtraffic rules and regulations
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
motor vehicles
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
Problems with your vehicle 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If you should experience a problem with your Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may SW., Washington, DC 20590.
affect its safe operation, we urge you to con- You can also obtain other information about
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center motor vehicle safety from
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
http://www.safercar.gov
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-
Limited Warranty
tact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA ! Follow the instructions in this manual
Customer Assistance Center about the proper operation of your vehicle
as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Damage to your vehicle that arises from
One Mercedes Drive culpable contraventions against these
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 instructions is not covered either by the
In Canada Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the
Customer Relations Department New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Introduction 33
QR codes for the rescue card Event data recorders

This vehicle is equipped with an event data
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
is to record data that will assist in under-
event of an accident, rescue services can use
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate
in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
rescue card for your vehicle. The current res-
such as during air bag deployment or when
cue card contains the most important infor-
hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed
mation about your vehicle in a compact form,
to record data related to vehicle dynamics
e.g. the routing of the electric cables.
and safety systems for a short period of time,
You can find more information under https:// typically 30 seconds or less.
portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
content/asportal/en/communication/
such data as:
informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.
Rhow various systems in your vehicle are
operating
Data stored in the vehicle Rwhether or not the driver and passenger
seat belts are fastened
Data recording
Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the
This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic accelerator and/or brake pedal and
information relating to vehicle operation, mal- Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling
functions, and user settings. This may include
This data can help provide a better under-
information about the performance or status
standing of the circumstances in which
of various systems, including but not limited
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is
to, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys-
recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
tems, that is stored and can be read out with
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
suitable devices, particularly when the vehi-
the EDR under normal driving conditions and
cle is serviced. The data obtained is used to
no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
properly diagnose and service your vehicle or
and crash location) are recorded. However,
to further optimize and develop vehicle func-
other parties, such as law enforcement, can
tions.
combine the EDR data with the type of per-
sonal identification data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
situations, and the location of the vehicle may the special equipment, such as law enforce-
be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace ment, can read the information by accessing
system. the vehicle or the EDR.
For additional information please refer to the EDR data may be used in civil and criminal
COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace matters as a tool in accident reconstruction,
Terms and Conditions. accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the
Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to
extract data from the EDR is commercially
available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Z
34 Introduction
("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-

bility arising from the extraction of this infor-
mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-
sonnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or,
if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of
the lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law
enforcement; by federal, state or local gov-
ernment; in connection with or arising out of
litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries
and affiliates; or, as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with,
altering, modifying or removing the EDR com-
ponent may result in a malfunction of the
Restraint System Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-
ted. This means that in the event of such con-
flict, the federal regulation governs. As of
February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws
relating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the fol-
lowing website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
35
Cockpit ................................................. 36
Instrument cluster .............................. 37
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 39
At a glance
Center console .................................... 41
Overhead control panel ...................... 44
Door control panel .............................. 45
36 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle F Adjusts the steering wheel
shifters ~ electrically 117
; Combination switch 121 Steering wheel heating ~
= Instrument cluster 37 G Cruise control lever ~
? Horn ~ H Parking brake ~
A DIRECT SELECT lever 142 I Diagnostics connection 31
B PARKTRONIC warning dis- J Opens the hood 262

play 168 K Releases the parking brake ~
C Overhead control panel 44 L Light switch 120
D Climate control systems 130
E Ignition lock 137
Start/Stop button 138
Instrument cluster 37
Instrument cluster
Displays
At a glance
: Fuel gage = Speedometer with seg-
Fuel filler flap location indi- ments ~
cator 8: the fuel filler ? Multifunction display ~
cap is on the right-hand
side. A Tachometer ~
; Coolant temperature ~
Information on displaying the outside tem-

perature in the multifunction display can be
found under "Outside temperature display"
(Y page 188).
i Set the instrument cluster lighting via the
on-board computer, see the Digital opera-
tor's manual.
38 Instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

: ÷ ESP® 206 G ü Seat belt 202
M SPORT handling H % Diesel engine: pre-
mode in AMG vehicles 207 glow ~
; · Distance warning 210 ÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 207
= å ESP® OFF 206 I ? Coolant 209
? $ Brakes (USA only) 204 J K High-beam head-
lamps ~
A #! Turn signals ~
K L Low-beam head-
B J Brakes (Canada only) 204 lamps ~
C ! ABS 205 L T Parking lamps ~
D 6 Restraint system 48 M R This lamp has no func-
E ; Check Engine ~ tion
F h Tire pressure monitor 211 N 8 Reserve fuel ~

Multifunction steering wheel 39
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display ~ ? ~
; Audio 20 or COMAND dis- Rejects or ends a call ~
play ~ Exits the telephone book/
redial memory
= ? 6
Vehicles with Audio 20: Makes or accepts a call
switches on voice-operated
Switches to the redial mem-
control for navigation (see
ory
manufacturer's operating
instructions) WX
Vehicles with COMAND: Adjusts the volume
switches on the Voice Con- 8
trol System (see the sepa- Mute
rate operating instructions)
A =;
Selects a menu ~
9:
Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists ~
a
Confirms a selection ~
Hides display messages ~
40 Multifunction steering wheel

B % (see the manufacturer's
Operating Instructions)
At a glance
Back 189
Vehicles with COMAND:
Vehicles with Audio 20:
switches off the Voice Con-
switches off voice-operated
trol System (see the sepa-
control of the navigation
rate Operating Instruc-
tions)
Center console 41
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance
: Audio system or COMAND ~ C 4 5 Indicator lamp 58
; c Seat heating 116 D ATA indicator lamp 87
= s Seat ventilation ~ E Ü Retracts the rear seat
head restraints (Wagon) ~
? c PARKTRONIC 168
F u Sedan: rear window
A ¤ ECO start/stop func- roller sunblind ~
tion (AMG vehicles) ~
B £ Hazard warning
lamps 120
42 Center console
Center console, lower section

At a glance

G Stowage compartment ~ J Stowage compartment with
Ashtray ~ Media Interface ~
Cigarette lighter ~ K Ú Selects the drive pro-
Cup holder ~ gram ~
H e Adjusts the suspen- L COMAND controller
sion setting ~
I É Sets the vehicle level ~
Center console 43
Center console, lower section (AMG vehicles)
At a glance
G Ashtray ~ M ß Calls up or saves the
Cigarette lighter ~ suspension setting ~
H Engages park position P 152 N à Adjusts the suspen-

sion setting ~
I Selector lever 142
O å ESP® 82
J Cup holder ~
P Drive program selector ~
K Stowage compartment with
Media Interface ~
L Audio or COMAND control-
ler ~
44 Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel

At a glance

: u Switches the rear C Rear-view mirror ~
interior lighting on/off ~
D Buttons for the garage door
; | Switches the auto- opener 257
matic interior lighting con-
trol on/off ~ E Microphone for mbrace
(emergency call system),
= p Switches the right- telephone and Voice Con-
hand reading lamp on/off ~ trol System (see the sepa-
rate operating instructions)
? 3 Opens/closes the
sliding sunroof 107 F F Roadside Assistance
3 Opens/closes the call button (mbrace sys-
panorama roof with power tem) 254
tilt/sliding panel with roller G p Switches the left-
sunblinds 108 hand reading lamp on/off ~
A ï MB Info call button H c Switches the front
(mbrace system) 255 interior lighting on/off ~
B G SOS button (mbrace
system) 253
Door control panel 45
Door control panel
At a glance
: r45= B W Opens/closes the
Stores settings for the seat, side windows ~
exterior mirrors and steer-
ing wheel ~ C n Activates/deacti-
vates the override feature
; Adjusts the seats electri- for the side windows in the
cally ~ rear compartment ~
= %& Unlocks/locks D p Opens/closes the
the vehicle ~ trunk lid/tailgate 101
? Opens the door ~
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exte-
rior mirrors in/out electri-
cally ~
46
47
Useful information .............................. 48

Panic alarm .......................................... 48
Occupant safety .................................. 48
Children in the vehicle ........................ 68
Safety
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 75
Driving safety systems ....................... 75
Protection against theft ..................... 87
48 Occupant safety
Useful information Occupant safety

Restraint system: introduction
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip- The restraint system can reduce the risk of
ment of your vehicle available at the time of vehicle occupants coming into contact with
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Safety
parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of

Country-specific differences are possible. an accident. The restraint system can also
Please note that your vehicle may not be reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants
equipped with all features described. This are subjected during an accident.
also applies to safety-related systems and The restraint system comprises:
functions.
RSeat belt system
i Read the information on qualified special- RAir bags
ist workshops (Y page 31). RChild restraint system
RChild seat securing systems
Panic alarm The components of the restraint system work

in conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times,
all vehicle occupants:
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 51)
Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint
properly (Y page 115).
As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the cor-
rect driver's seat position (Y page 114).
X To activate: press the ! button : for You also have to make sure that an air bag can
approximately one second. inflate properly if deployed (Y page 54).
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
alarm system is armed. belt. As an additional safety device, the air
X To deactivate: press the ! button : bag increases the level of protection for vehi-
again. cle occupants in the event of an accident. For
example, if, in the event of an accident, the
or
protection offered by the seat belt is suffi-
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
cient, the air bags are not deployed. When an
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO: accident occurs, only the air bags that
X Press the Start/Stop button. increase protection in that particular accident
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. situation are deployed. However, seat belts
and air bags generally do not protect against
objects penetrating the vehicle from the out-
side.
Information on restraint system operation
can be found under "Triggering of the Emer-
gency Tensioning Devices and air bags"
(Y page 63).
Occupant safety 49
For more information about children traveling G WARNING

with you in the vehicle and on child restraint If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint
systems, see "Children in the vehicle" system components may be triggered unin-
(Y page 68). tentionally or might not be triggered at all in
the event of an accident with a high rate of
Safety
vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-
Important safety notes gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-
G WARNING ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The Have the restraint system checked and
restraint system may then not perform its repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as
intended protective function and may fail in an soon as possible.
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
Never modify parts of the restraint system. lamp
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details. USA only: for further information con-
tact our Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).
Restraint system warning lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp :
The functions of the restraint system are is part of the Occupant Classification System
checked after the ignition is switched on and (OCS).
at regular intervals while the engine is run-
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec-
informs you about the status of the front-
ted in good time.
passenger front air bag.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
the instrument cluster lights up when the igni-
lamp:
tion is switched on. It goes out no later than a
few seconds after the vehicle is started. The Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag is
components of the restraint system are in deactivated. It will then not be deployed in
operational readiness. the event of an accident.
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 Rdoes not light up: the front-passenger
restraint system warning lamp: front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is accident, all deployment criteria are met,
switched on the front-passenger front air bag is
deployed.
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with
the engine running
Rlights up again while the engine is running
Z
50 Occupant safety
Depending on the person in the front- If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
passenger seat, the front-passenger front air quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
bag must either be deactivated or enabled; retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be
see the following points. You must make sure extracted any further.
of this both before and during a journey. The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens
the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt
Safety
RChildren in a child restraint system:

whether the front-passenger front air bag is close against the body. However it does not
enabled or deactivated depends on the pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction
installed child restraint system, and the age of the backrest.
and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to The Emergency Tensioning Device does not
observe the notes on the "Occupant Clas- correct an incorrect seat position or the rout-
sification System (OCS)" (Y page 58) and ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 68). When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps
There you will also find instructions on rear- to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on
ward and forward-facing child restraint sys- the vehicle occupant.
tems on the front-passenger seat. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats
RAll other persons: depending on the clas- are synchronized with the front air bags,
sification of the person in the front- which absorb part of the deceleration force.
passenger seat, the front-passenger front This can reduce the force exerted on the vehi-
air bag is enabled or deactivated cle occupants during an accident.
(Y page 58). Be sure to observe the notes
on "Seat belts“ (Y page 50) and "Air bags" ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,
(Y page 54). There you can also find infor- do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle
mation on the correct seat position. of the front-passenger seat. This may oth-
erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device in the event of an
Seat belts accident, which will then need to be
replaced.
Introduction
Important safety notes
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occu- The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
pants in the event of an accident or the vehi- tems is required by law in:
cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi- Rall 50 states
cle occupants coming into contact with parts
Rthe U.S. territories
of the vehicle interior or being ejected from
the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps Rthe District of Columbia
to keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi- Rall Canadian provinces
tion in relation to the air bag. Even where this is not required by law, all
The seat belt system comprises: vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
RSeat belts their seat belts before starting the journey.
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the G WARNING
front seat belts and the outer seat belts in If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-
the rear not protect as intended. Furthermore, an
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-
belts and the outer seat belts in the rear tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-
ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-
Occupant safety 51
tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or (Y page 68) in addition to the child
even fatal injury. restraint system manufacturer's installa-
Make sure that all vehicle occupants are tion instructions
seated properly with a correctly fastened seat Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
belt. safety notes on the "Occupant classifica-
tion system (OCS)" (Y page 58)
Safety
G WARNING G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level The seat belts may not perform their intended
of protection if you have not moved the back- protective function if:
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain dirty, bleach or dyed
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal extremely dirty
injury. Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
Adjust the seat properly before beginning anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest fied
is in an almost vertical position and that the Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-
across the center of your shoulder. fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,
e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-
G WARNING sioning Devices could accidentally trigger or
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an
fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi- increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
tional suitable restraint system. If the seat Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia
as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas- reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
example, in an accident, during braking or an ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
abrupt change of direction. This poses an immediately at a qualified specialist work-
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. shop.
For this reason, always secure persons under
5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint Only use seat belts that have been approved
systems. for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any such
modifications could invalidate the vehicle's
If a child younger than twelve years old and general operating permit.
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle: Proper use of the seat belts
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz (Y page 50).
vehicle. The child restraint system must be All vehicle occupants must be wearing the
appropriate to the age, weight and size of seat belt correctly before beginning the jour-
the child ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu-
Ralways observe the instructions and safety pants are always wearing the seat belt cor-
notes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec- rectly while the vehicle is in motion.
tion of this Operator's Manual
Z
52 Occupant safety
When fastening the seat belt, always make Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
sure that:
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the (Y page 50) and the notes on correct use of
belt buckle belonging to that seat. seat belts (Y page 51).
Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. If the center rear seat belt is being used, also
Safety
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter observe the information about the seat belt
coat. for the center rear seat (Y page 53).
Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Only then can the forces which occur be
distributed over the area of the belt.
Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always
routed across the center of your shoulder.
The shoulder section of the belt must not
come into contact with your neck or be
routed under your arm. Where possible,
adjust the seat belt to the appropriate
height.
Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down
as possible across your lap.
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdo-
men. This applies particularly to pregnant
women. If necessary, push the lap belt X Adjust the seat (Y page 114).
down to your hip joint and pull it tight using The seat backrest must be in an almost
the shoulder section of the belt. vertical position.
Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet
pointed or fragile objects. = and engage belt tongue ; into belt
If you have such items located on or in your buckle :.
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the
store these in a suitable place. front-passenger seat may be tightened
Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a automatically, see "Belt adjustment"
time. (Y page 53).
Infants and children must never travel sit- X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
event of an accident, they could be crushed across your body.
between the vehicle occupant and seat
belt.
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe
the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,
luggage or loads (Y page 238).
Occupant safety 53
Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
will be trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This could damage the door,
Safety
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-
aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their
protective function and must be replaced.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Wagon: you can also adjust the belt height on

the outer rear bench seats.
The shoulder section of the seat belt must
always be routed across the center of the
shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.
The belt outlet will engage in various posi-
tions.
X To lower: hold belt outlet release ? and
slide belt outlet downwards.
X Let go of belt outlet release ? in the
desired position and make sure that the
belt outlet engages.
All seat belts in the vehicle with the exception
of the driver's seat belt and the seat belt on
X Press release button :, hold belt
the folding bench seat in the cargo compart- tongue ; firmly and guide it back towards
ment are equipped with a special seat belt belt outlet =.
retractor, to which a child restraint system
can be secured. Further information can be Seat belt adjustment
found under "Special seat belt retractor" The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
(Y page 69).
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This
function adjusts the driver's and front-
Seat belt for the center rear seat passenger seat belt to the upper body of the
If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded occupants.
down and back up again, the rear center seat The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle
pulled out. and
X To release the rear center seat belt: pull Rthe ignition is switched on
the seat belt out approximately 1 in
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain
(25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrest
retraction force if any slack is detected
and then release it again.
between the vehicle occupant and the seat
The seat belt is retracted and released.
belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly
while it is adjusting.
Z
54 Occupant safety
You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on Air bags

and off in the on-board computer.
Introduction
Belt warning for the driver and front The installation point of an air bag can be rec-
passenger ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.
Safety
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru- An air bag complements the correctly fas-
ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat
occupants must wear their seat belts. It may belt. The air bag provides additional protec-
light up continuously or flash. In addition, tion in applicable accident situations.
there may be a warning tone. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt The different air bag systems function inde-
has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt pendently from one another (Y page 63).
warning lamp lights up for six seconds each However, no system available today can com-
time the engine is started. If, after pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
six seconds, the driver or front-passenger It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
seat belt has not been fastened and the doors caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp which the air bag must be deployed.
lights up. As soon as the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are fastened or a front Important safety notes
door is opened again, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp goes out. G WARNING
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
the engine is started, an additional warning the air bag cannot protect as intended and
tone will sound. This warning tone stops after could even cause additional injury when
six seconds or when the driver's seat belt is deployed. This poses an increased risk of
fastened. injury or even fatal injury.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph To avoid hazardous situations, always make
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front- sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,
warning tone sounds. A warning tone also including pregnant women
sounds with increasing intensity for
Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great-
60 seconds or until the driver or front
est possible distance to the air bags
passenger have fastened their seat belts.
Rfollow the following instructions
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt Always make sure that there are no objects
warning is activated again. between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
pants.
i For more information on the 7 seat
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi- RAdjust the seats properly before beginning
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat your journey. Always make sure that the
belts" (Y page 202). seat is in an almost upright position. The
center of the head restraint must support
the head at about eye level.
RMove the driver's and front-passenger
seats as far back as possible. The driver's
seat position must allow the vehicle to be
driven safely.
Occupant safety 55
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out- Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-
side. This allows the air bag to be fully vent an air bag from functioning correctly.
deployed. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks
RAlways lean against the backrest while driv- resulting from the speed of the air bag as it
ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against deploys, make sure that:
the door or side window. You may other-
Safety
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
wise be in the deployment area of the air between the vehicle occupants and an air
bags. bag.
RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the and B-pillar.
dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth- Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on
erwise be in the deployment area of the air the grab handles or coat hooks.
bag.
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
RFor this reason, always secure persons less
attached to the vehicle within the deploy-
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side
systems. Up to this height, the seat belt windows, rear side trim or side walls.
cannot be worn correctly.
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also are in the pockets of your clothing. Store
observe the following notes: such objects in a suitable place.
RAlways secure children under twelve years
of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in G WARNING
suitable child restraint systems. If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
RChild restraint systems should be installed
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
function correctly. There is an increased risk
on the rear seats.
of injury.
ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
child restraint system on the front-
to it.
passenger seat when the front-passenger
front air bag is deactivated. If the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is G WARNING
permanently lit, the front-passenger front Sensors to control the air bags are located in
air bag is deactivated (Y page 49). the doors. Modifications or work not per-
RAlways observe the instructions and safety
formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-
function of the sensors being impaired. The air
tem (OCS)" (Y page 58) and on "Children
bags might therefore not function properly
in the vehicle" (Y page 68) in addition to
any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot
the child restraint system manufacturer's
protect vehicle occupants as they are
installation instructions.
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Z
56 Occupant safety
Front air bags Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steer-
ing column. The driver's knee bag is triggered
together with the front air bag.
The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh,
knee and lower leg protection for the occu-
pant in the driver's seat.
Safety
Side impact air bags

G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even
prevent the deployment of the air bags inte-
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the grated into the seats. Consequently, the air
steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove they are designed to do. In addition, the func-
box. tion of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) could be restricted. This poses an
When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
tional head and thorax protection for the
occupants in the front seats. You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Mercedes-Benz.
informs you about the status of the front-
passenger front air bag (Y page 49).
The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen-
sor readings, detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied (Y page 58)
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is not lit (Y page 58)
Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
high accident severity
Example: Sedan
Driver's knee bag Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer
bolster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. However, it does
not protect the:
Rhead
Rneck
Rarms
In the event of a side impact, the side impact
air bag is deployed on the side on which the
impact occurs.
Occupant safety 57
The side impact air bag on the front- The pelvis air bag is deployed on the side of
passenger side (front) deploys under the fol- the impact.
lowing conditions: The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
Rthe OCS system detects that the front- does not deploy under the following condi-
passenger seat is occupied or tions:
Safety
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
buckle of the front-passenger seat seat is unoccupied.
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fas-
buckle, the side impact air bag on the front- tened.
passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci- If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy- buckle, the pelvis air bag on the front-
ment is independent of whether the front- passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci-
passenger seat is occupied or not. dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy-
ment is independent of whether the front-
Pelvis air bags passenger seat is occupied or not.
G WARNING Window curtain air bags
Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even
prevent the deployment of the air bags inte-
grated into the seats. Consequently, the air
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. In addition, the func-
tion of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) could be restricted. This poses an
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Example: Sedan
Window curtain air bags : are integrated
into the side of the roof frame and deployed in
the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or
arms.
In the event of a side impact, the window cur-
tain air bag is deployed on the side on which
the impact occurs.
Pelvis air bags : deploy below next to the
If the system determines that they can offer
outer seat cushions.
additional protection to that provided by the
When activated, the pelvis air bag enhances seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
the level of protection of the vehicle occu- deployed in other accident situations
pants on the side of the vehicle on which the (Y page 63).
impact occurs.
Z
58 Occupant safety
Occupant Classification System rest and the head restraint position accord-
(OCS) ingly.
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
Introduction correctly. Always observe the child restraint
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
Safety
categorizes the person in the front-passenger

seat. Depending on that result, the front-
passenger front air bag is either enabled or Occupant Classification System opera-
deactivated. tion (OCS)
The system does not deactivate:
Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe pelvis air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
Prerequisites
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp :
Rin an almost upright position with their shows you whether the front-passenger front
back against the seat backrest air bag is deactivated.
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ble ignition lock or on vehicles with KEYLESS-
If the front passenger does not observe these GO, press the Start/Stop button once or
conditions, OCS may produce a false classi- twice.
fication, e.g. because the front passenger: The system carries out self-diagnostics.
Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
selves on a vehicle armrest must light up for approximately six seconds.
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
from the seat cushion then displays the status of the front-
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child passenger front air bag. If the status of the
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, front-passenger front air bag changes while
be sure to observe the correct positioning of the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display
the child restraint system. Never place message may appear in the instrument clus-
objects under or behind the child restraint ter (Y page 198). When the front-passenger
system, e.g. cushions. The entire base of the seat is occupied, always pay attention to the
child restraint system must always rest on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be
seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The aware of the status of the front-passenger
backrest of the forward-facing child restraint front air bag both before and during the jour-
system must lie as flat as possible against the ney.
backrest of the front-passenger seat.
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-
Occupant safety 59
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Make sure that the front-passenger front air
lamp: bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag is BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
deactivated. It will then not be deployed in
the event of an accident. G WARNING
Safety
Rdoes not light up: the front-passenger If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an restraint system on the front-passenger seat
accident, all deployment criteria are met, and you position the front-passenger seat too
the front-passenger front air bag is close to the dashboard, the child could, in the
deployed. event of an accident:
Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-
G WARNING
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator cator lamp is lit, for example
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is
Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function. A person in the front- This poses an increased risk of injury or even
passenger seat could then, for example, come fatal injury.
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- Move the front-passenger seat as far back as
cially if the person is sitting too close to the possible. Always make sure that the shoulder
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle
injury or even fatal injury. belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on
When the front-passenger seat is occupied, the child restraint system. The shoulder belt
always ensure that: strap must be routed forwards and down-
wards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If nec-
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
essary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and
passenger seat is correct and the front- the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- observe the child restraint system manufac-
bled in accordance with the person in the turer's installation instructions.
front-passenger seat
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved If OCS determines that:
back as far back as possible. Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
Rthe person is seated correctly. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Make sure, both before and during the jour- lights up after the system self-test and
ney, that the status of the front-passenger remains lit. This indicates that the front-
front air bag is correct. passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
G WARNING child of up to twelve months old, in a stand-
If you secure a child in a child restraint system ard child restraint system, the PASSENGER
on the front-passenger seat and the AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is the system self-test and remains lit. This
off, the front-passenger front air bag can indicates that the front-passenger front air
deploy in the event of an accident. The child bag is deactivated.
could be struck by the air bag. This poses an But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. child, in a standard child restraint system,
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp can go out after the system self-test.
Z
60 Occupant safety
This indicates that the front-passenger For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
front air bag is activated. The result of the mends that you only use seat accessories
classification is dependent on, among that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
other factors, the child restraint system If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
and the child's stature. It is recommended mean that the front-passenger front air bag
that you install the child restraint system on will also deploy. The Occupant Classification
Safety
a suitable rear seat. System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a front-passenger seat. Depending on that
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager result, the front-passenger front air bag is
or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG either enabled or deactivated.
OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit
after the system self-test depending on the System self-test
result of the classification or, alternatively,
goes out. G DANGER
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, move the front-passenger lamp does not light up during the system self-
seat as far back as possible. Alterna- test, then the system is malfunctioning. The
tively, a person of smaller stature can sit front-passenger front air bag might be trig-
on a rear seat. gered unintentionally or might not be trig-
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
gered at all in the event of an accident with
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature high deceleration. This poses an increased
should not use the front-passenger seat. risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
In this case the front-passenger seat may not
adult or a person of a stature correspond- be used. Do not install a child restraint system
ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the pant Classification System (OCS) checked
system self-test. This indicates that the and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
front-passenger front air bag is activated. cialist workshop.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure
G DANGER
to observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-
cle" (Y page 68). If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6 front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
restraint system warning lamp in the instru- not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG this case, the front-passenger front air bag
OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. cannot perform its intended protective func-
The front-passenger front air bag is deactivation, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-
ted in this case and does not deploy during an passenger seat.
accident. Have the system checked by quali-
fied technicians as soon as possible. Consult That person could, for example, come into
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
front-passenger seat should only be repaired if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
the seat cushion is damaged, have the nec-
essary repair work carried out at an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Occupant safety 61
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,

always ensure that:
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
Safety
bled in accordance with the person in the
Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-
rectly fastened seatbelt
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
passenger seat may not be used. Do not
install a child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
G WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
ation. This could result in the front-passenger
air bag not functioning as intended during an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
facing child restraint system must, as far as
possible, be resting on the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the sta-
tus of the front-passenger front air bag
(Y page 58).
For more information about the OCS, see
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System" (Y page 62).
Z
62 Occupant safety
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 60).
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is
Safety
BAG OFF indicator incorrect.

lamp lights up and X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-
remains lit, even son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 58).
though the front- X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the
passenger seat is occu-
front-passenger seat may not be used.
pied by an adult or a
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
person of a stature cor-
responding to that of an Mercedes-Benz Center.
adult.
The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
lamp does not light up child seat.
and/or does not stay X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests
on.
on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of
The front-passenger the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as pos-
seat is: sible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If nec-
Runoccupied essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
Roccupied by the X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
weight of a child up seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-
to 12 months old in a passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and
child restraint sys- the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.
tem X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the
child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint
accordingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
the seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, do
not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on
a suitable rear seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Occupant safety 63
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning be released. The 6 restraint system warn-

Devices and air bags ing lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your
Important safety notes hearing. The powder that is released gener-
G WARNING ally does not constitute a health hazard, but it
may cause short-term breathing difficulties in
Safety
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
people with asthma or other respiratory prob-
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
lems. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a the vehicle or open the windows as soon as it
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- is safe to do so.
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-
ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-
G WARNING rial, which may require special handling and
A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro- regard for the environment. National guide-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro- lines must be observed during disposal. In
tection in an accident. There is an increased California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
risk of injury. HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- index.cfm.
ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
bag replaced. Method of operation
It is important for your safety and that of your During the first stage of a collision, the
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced restraint system control unit evaluates impor-
and to have any malfunctioning air bags tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-
repaired. This will help to make sure the air ation or acceleration, such as:
bags continue to perform their protective Rduration
function for the vehicle occupants in the
Rdirection
event of a crash.
Rintensity
G WARNING Based on the evaluation of this data, the
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices restraint system control unit triggers the
that have been deployed are no longer opera- Emergency Tensioning Devices during a fron-
tional and are unable to perform their inten- tal or rear collision.
ded protective function. This poses an An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. triggered, if:
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-
Rthe ignition is switched on
sioning Devices which have been triggered
immediately replaced at a qualified specialist Rthe components of the restraint system are
workshop. operational; see "Restraint system warning

lamp" (Y page 49)
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
trigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz- the respective front-passenger seat
ardous situations. This procedure is reversi- The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the
ble. rear compartment are triggered independ-
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig- ently of the lock status of the seat belts.
gered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a If the restraint system control unit detects a
bang, and a small amount of powder may also more severe accident, further components of
Z
64 Occupant safety
the restraint system are activated independ- The vehicle can be deformed considerably,
ently of each other in certain frontal collision without an air bag being deployed. This is the
situations: case if only parts which are relatively easily
RFront air bags and driver's knee bag deformed are affected and the rate of decel-
RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter- eration is not high. Conversely, air bags may
be deployed even though the vehicle suffers
Safety
mines that deployment can offer additional

protection to that provided by the seat belt only minor deformation. This is the case if, for
example, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-
The front-passenger front air bag is activated
gitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient
or deactivated depending on the person on
deceleration occurs as a result.
the front-passenger seat. The front-
passenger front air bag can only deploy in an If the restraint system control unit detects a
accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the
cator lamp is off. Observe the information on applicable components of the restraint sys-
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp tem are activated independently of each
(Y page 49). other depending on the apparent type of acci-
dent.
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags.
RSide impact air bags and pelvis air bag on
During the first deployment stage, the front
air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the side of impact, independently of the
the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully Emergency Tensioning Device and the use
deployed with the maximum amount of proof the seat belt on the driver's seat and
pellant gas if a second deployment threshold outer seats in the second row
is reached within a few milliseconds. - the OCS system detects that the front-
The activation threshold of the Emergency passenger seat is occupied or

Tensioning Devices and the air bag are deter- - the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel- buckle of the front-passenger seat
eration or acceleration which occurs at vari- RWindow curtain air bag on the side of
ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre- impact, independently of the use of the
emptive in nature. Deployment should take seat belt and independently of whether the
place in good time at the start of the collision. front-passenger seat is occupied
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- REmergency Tensioning Device, if the sys-
tion and the direction of the force are essen- tem determines that deployment can offer
tially determined by: additional protection in this situation
Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and
sion front-passenger side in certain situations
Rthe collision angle when the vehicle rolls over, if the system
determines that deployment can offer addi-
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-
tional protection to that provided by the
cle
seat belt
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-
Factors which can only be seen and measured dent. The different air bag systems work
after a collision has occurred do not play a independently of each other.
decisive role in the deployment of an air bag.
Nor do they provide an indication of air bag
deployment.
Occupant safety 65
How the air bag system works is deter- protection will not be available in the event of
mined by the severity of the accident detec- another rear-end collision. You can see that a
ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or NECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO luxury
acceleration and the apparent type of acci- head restraint has been triggered if it is tilted
dent: forward and can no longer be adjusted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
Safety
Rfrontal collision
Rside impact the functionality of the NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Rrollover
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a rear-end collision.
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-
PRO luxury head restraints Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO head
restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head
Important safety notes restraint
G WARNING NECK-PRO head restraints

The function of the head restraint may be
impaired if you:
Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the
head restraints, for example
Ruse head restraint covers
If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill
their intended protective function in the event
of an accident. In addition, objects attached
to the head restraints could endanger other
vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk
of injury.
Do not insert your finger between the cushion
Do not attach any objects to the head of the head restraint and the cover. Pay par-
restraints and do not use head restraint cov- ticular attention while resetting the NECK-
ers. PRO head restraints.
X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint
Method of operation cushion forwards in the direction of
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury arrow :.
head restraints offer additional protection X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
against head and neck injuries. In the event of down as far as it will go in the direction of
a rear collision of a certain severity, the NECK- arrow ;.
PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-
restraints on the driver's and front-passenger PRO head restraint cushion backwards in
seats are moved forwards and upwards. This the direction of arrow = until it engages.
provides better head support. X Repeat this procedure for the second
If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO NECK-PRO head restraint.
luxury head restraints have been triggered in
an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints requires a lot of strength. If you have diffi-
on the driver's seat and the front-passenger culty resetting the NECK-PRO head
seat (Y page 65). Otherwise, the additional
Z
66 Occupant safety
restraints, have this work carried out at a PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant

qualified specialist workshop. protection system)
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Introduction
In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®
Safety
takes pre-emptive measures to protect the

vehicle occupants.

! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats. There is a dan-
ger that the seats and/or objects could be
damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.
Do not insert your finger between the cushion Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-
of the head restraint and the cover. Pay par- SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of
ticular attention while resetting the NECK- an accident cannot be ruled out. Always
PRO luxury head restraints. adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions and maintain a
X Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle
safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive
document wallet.
carefully.
X Slide resetting tool : into guide ;
between the NECK-PRO luxury head Function
restraint and the rear cover of the head
restraint. PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
X Push resetting tool : downwards until you Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when
hear the head restraint deployment mech- BAS is activated
anism engage. Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-
X Pull out resetting tool :. ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle
X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK- understeers or oversteers severely
PRO luxury head restraint cushion back- Ron vehicles with the Driving Assistance
wards in the direction of arrow = until it package: if BAS PLUS intervenes power-
engages. fully or the radar sensor system detects an
X Repeat this procedure for the second imminent danger of collision in certain sit-
NECK-PRO luxury head restraint. uations
X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
document wallet. depending on the hazardous situation detec-
ted:
i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-
Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
PRO luxury head restraints, have this work
carried out at a qualified specialist work- Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is
shop. in an unfavorable position.
Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof and
the side windows are closed so that only a
small gap remains. The panorama roof with
Occupant safety 67
power tilt/sliding panel is completely PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not perform braking
closed. actions while the vehicle is in motion or when
Rthe air pressure in the side bolsters of the Parking Guidance is active.
seat backrests of the front active multicon-
tour seats is raised. Function
Safety
If the hazardous situation passes without PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-
resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens tions if the radar sensor system detects an
the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with imminent head-on or rear-end collision.
active multicontour seats, the air pressure in
the side bolsters is reduced again. All settings PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following meas-
ures depending on the hazardous situation
made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.
detected:
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:
Rif the radar sensor system detects that a
X Move the seat backrest or seat back head-on collision is imminent, the seat
slightly when the vehicle is stationary. belts are pre-tensioned.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and Rif the radar sensor system detects that a
the locking mechanism is released. rear-end collision is imminent:
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of - the brake pressure is increased if the
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. You driver applies the brakes when the vehi-
will find information on the convenience func- cle is stationary.
tion under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 53). - the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is

canceled:
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-
pant protection system PLUS) Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when
a gear is engaged
Introduction Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no lon-
PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles ger detected
with the Driving Assistance package. Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® to pull away

PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear- If the hazardous situation passes without
end collision is imminent. In certain hazard- resulting in an accident, the original settings
ous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre- are restored.
emptive measures to protect the vehicle
occupants.
Automatic measures after an acci-
Important safety notes dent
The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot Immediately after an accident, the following
prevent an imminent collision. measures are implemented, depending on
the type and severity of the impact:
The driver is not warned about the interven-
Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
tion of PRE-SAFE® PLUS.
Rthe emergency lighting is activated
PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the
vehicle is backing up. Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
Rthe front side windows are lowered
Z
68 Children in the vehicle
Rvehicles with a memory function: the elec- In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
trically adjustable steering wheel is raised ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel sup- an accident and injury.
ply is cut off When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Safety
gency call leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Rvehicles with the hybrid drive system: the
hybrid system and the high-voltage electri- G WARNING
cal system are deactivated If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
Children in the vehicle fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Accident statistics show that children G WARNING
secured in the rear seats are safer than chil- If the child restraint system is subjected to
dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises dren may burn themselves on these parts,
that you install a child restraint system on a particularly on the metal parts of the child
rear seat. Children are generally better pro- restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
tected there. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
If a child under 12 years of age and under 5 ft you, always ensure that the child restraint
(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi- restraint system has been exposed to direct
cles. The child restraint system must be sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
appropriate to the age, weight and size of child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the child the vehicle.
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
safety notes in this section in addition to their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
the child restraint system manufacturer's ting properly. Particular attention must be
installation instructions paid to children.
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
safety notes on the "Occupant classifica- (Y page 50) and the notes on correct use of
tion system (OCS)" (Y page 58) seat belts (Y page 51).
Do not install a rearward-facing child restraint A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
system on the center rear seat. proper seat belt positioning for children over
G WARNING 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- a three-point seat belt fits properly without a
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: booster seat.
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
Children in the vehicle 69
Special seat belt retractor Removing a child restraint system and deac-
tivating the special seat belt retractor:
G WARNING
X Always comply with the child restraint sys-
If the seat belt is released while driving, the tem manufacturer's installation instruc-
child restraint system will no longer be tions.
secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
Safety
X Press the release button of the belt buckle,
tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back
portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
towards the belt outlet.
be immediately refastened. There is an
The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
ted.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
the special seat belt retractor and secure the
Child restraint system
child restraint system properly.
The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt and tems is required by law in:
the folding bench seat belts in the cargo com-
Rall 50 states
partment are equipped with a special seat
Rthe U.S. territories
belt retractor. When activated, the special
seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt Rthe District of Columbia
will not slacken once the child restraint sys- Rall Canadian provinces
tem has been secured. Do not install a rearward-facing child restraint
Installing a child restraint system: system on the center rear seat.
X Always comply with the child restraint sys- You can obtain further information about the
tem manufacturer's installation instruc- correct child restraint system from any
tions. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt G WARNING
outlet. If the child restraint system is installed incor-
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
buckle. intended. The child cannot then be restrained
Activating the special seat belt retractor: in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
sudden changes of direction. There is an
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
reel retract it again.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
belt retractor is activated.
that the base of the child restraint system is
X Push the child seat restraint system down
always resting completely on the seat cush-
so that the seat belt is tight and does not ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
loosen. or behind the child restraint system. Only use
child restraint systems with the original cover
designed for them. Only replace damaged
covers with genuine covers.
Z
G WARNING All child restraint systems must meet the fol-

If the child restraint system is installed incor- lowing standards:
rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a ards 213 and 225
sudden change in direction. The child RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
Safety
restraint system could be thrown about, strik- 213 and 210.2

ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased Confirmation that the child restraint system
risk of injury, possibly even fatal. corresponds to the standards can be found
Always install child restraint systems prop- on an instruction label on the child restraint
erly, even if they are not being used. Make system. This confirmation can also be found
sure that you observe the child restraint sys- in the installation instructions that are inclu-
tem manufacturer's installation instructions. ded with the child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
You will find further information on stowing
rior and on the child restraint system.
objects, luggage or loads under "Loading
guidelines" (Y page 238).
G WARNING LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-
Child restraint systems or their securing sys- ing system
tems which have been damaged or subjected
G WARNING
to a load in an accident can no longer protect
as intended. The child cannot then be LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy do not offer sufficient protective effect for
braking or sudden changes of direction. There children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt
fatal. integrated in the child restraint system. In the
event of an accident, a child might not be
Replace child restraint systems which have
restrained correctly. This poses an increased
been damaged or subjected to a load in an
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
ing systems on the child restraint system If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
checked at a qualified specialist workshop, only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
before you install a child restraint system systems with which the child is also secured
again. with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the
child restraint system with the Top Tether
The securing systems of child restraint sys- belt, if available.
tems are:
Always comply with the manufacturer's
Rthe seat belt system installation and operating instructions for the
Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings child restraint system used.
Rthe Top Tether anchorages Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is
the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO-
the information on the "Occupant Classifica- FIX) securing rings
tion System (OCS)" (Y page 58). There you ! When installing the child restraint system,
will also find information on deactivating the make sure that the seat belt for the middle
front-passenger front air bag. seat does not get trapped. The seat belt
could otherwise be damaged.
dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of

direction. As a result, child restraint systems
cannot perform their intended protective
function. Rear seat backrests that are not
locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
in the event of an accident. This poses an
Safety
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-
ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-
fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-
ests so that they are in an upright position.
When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system, fold protective caps ; of If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings : locked, this will be shown in the multifunction
inwards. display in the instrument cluster. A warning
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child tone also sounds.
restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-
FIX) securing rings :. Top Tether anchorages
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for Sedan
specially designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing The Top Tether anchorage points are installed
rings : for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child in the rear compartment behind the head
restraint systems are installed on the left and restraints.
right rear seats.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may
also be used and can be installed using the
vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child
seat according to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured
with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount
and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of
injury even further. If the child restraint sys-
tem is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this
should always be used.

G WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in the event of an acci-
Z
X Move head restraint : upwards.

X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
A.
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system with Top Tether. Always
Safety
comply with the child restraint system

manufacturer's installation instructions
when doing so.
X Route Top Tether belt = under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether
anchorage A.
X Make sure that Top Tether belt = is not
twisted.
X Tension Top Tether belt =. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchor-
age A.
X Move head restraint : back down again
X Move head restraint : upwards.
slightly if necessary (Y page 116). Make
sure that you do not interfere with the cor- X Remove combined cargo cover and net =
rect routing of Top Tether belt =. (Y page 243).
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
Wagon restraint system with Top Tether. Always
The Top Tether anchorages are located on the comply with the child restraint system
rear side of the rear seat backrests. manufacturer's installation instructions
when doing so.
X Route Top Tether belt B under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
X Hook Top Tether hook A into Top Tether
anchorage ? on the back of rear seat
backrest ;.
X Make sure that Top Tether belt B is not
twisted.
X Tension Top Tether belt B. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
X Move head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 116). Make
sure that you do not interfere with the cor- Forward-facing child restraint system
rect routing of Top Tether belt B.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a
X Install combined cargo cover and net =
forward-facing child restraint system on the
(Y page 243). front-passenger seat, always move the front-
passenger seat as far back as possible. The
Safety
entire base of the child restraint system must
Child restraint system on the front- always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat passenger seat. The backrest of the child
restraint system must lie as flat as possible
General notes
against the backrest of the front-passenger
Accident statistics show that children seat. The child restraint system must not
secured in the rear seats are safer than chil- touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the
dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat
this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises backrest and the head restraint position
that you install the child restraint system on a accordingly. Always make sure that the shoul-
rear seat. der belt strap is correctly routed from the
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, on the child restraint system. The shoulder
be sure to observe the instructions and safety belt strap must be routed forwards and down-
notes on the "Occupant Classification System wards from the vehicle belt outlet. If neces-
(OCS)" (Y page 58). sary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise front-passenger seat accordingly.
as a result of: Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
Ran incorrectly categorized person in the
instructions.
Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-
passenger front air bag Child-proof locks
Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash- Important safety notes
board
G WARNING
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
Rearward-facing child restraint system
could:
If it is absolutely necessary to install a rear- Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
ward-facing child restraint system on the or road users
front-passenger seat, always make sure that
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
traffic
ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 49)
is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva- trapped
ted. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always observe the child restraint system Always activate the child-proof locks and
manufacturer's installation and operating override feature if children are traveling in the
instructions. vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Z
Override feature for: Child-proof locks for the rear doors

Rthe rear doors (Y page 74)
Rthe rear side windows (Y page 74)
G WARNING
Safety
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-

cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- Child-proof lock, rear door (example: Sedan)
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of You secure each door individually with the
an accident and injury. child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
When leaving the vehicle, always take the secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never opened from inside the vehicle. When the
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
from the outside.
G WARNING X To activate: press the child-proof lock
If persons, particularly children are subjected lever up in the direction of arrow :.
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
working properly.
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
vehicle.
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to Override feature for the rear side win-
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- dows
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
X To activate/deactivate: press button ;.
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the
rear side windows is disabled. Operation is
only possible using the switches in the driv-
er's door. If indicator lamp : is off, oper-
Driving safety systems 75
ation is possible using the switches in the RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 84)
rear compartment. RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 86)
Pets in the vehicle Important safety notes
Safety
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you
G WARNING are inattentive, the driving safety systems can
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured neither reduce the risk of an accident nor
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or override the laws of physics. Driving safety
switches, for example. systems are merely aids designed to assist
As a result, they could: driving. You are responsible for maintaining
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
trapped, for example speed, for braking in good time, and for stay-
ing in lane. Always adapt your driving style to
Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
suit the prevailing road and weather condi-
endangering other road users
tions and maintain a safe distance from the
Unsecured animals could also be flung around vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
The driving safety systems described only
den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
work as effectively as possible when there is
cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
adequate contact between the tires and the
and injury.
road surface. Pay particular attention to the
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi- information regarding tires, recommended
cle. Always secure animals properly during minimum tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans- and tires" section (Y page 288).
port box.
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow
chains. Only in this way will the driving safety
Driving safety systems systems described in this section work as
Overview of driving safety systems effectively as possible.
In this section, you will find information about

the following driving safety systems: ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General information
(Y page 75)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 76) ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
Cross-Traffic Assist (Y page 76)
cle when braking.
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the
(distance warning function and Adaptive
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition
Brake Assist) (Y page 78)
is switched on. It goes out when the engine is
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
running.
(Y page 80)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 84)
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 84)
Z
76 Driving safety systems
Important safety notes Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 75). tion (Y page 75).
G WARNING G WARNING
Safety
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
braking. The steerability and braking charac- in an emergency braking situation is
teristics may be severely impaired. Addition- increased. There is a risk of an accident.
ally, further driving safety systems are deac- In an emergency braking situation, depress
tivated. There is an increased danger of skid- the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
ding and accidents. the wheels from locking.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
diately at a qualified specialist workshop. Braking
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
including driving safety systems, will also the emergency braking situation is over.
become inoperative. Observe the information ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 205) and The brakes will function as usual once you
display messages which may be shown in the release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
instrument cluster (Y page 192).
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi- BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) with
tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even if Cross-Traffic Assist
you only brake gently.
General information
Braking i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the tion (Y page 75).
brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit- BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with
uation is over. the Driving Assistance package.
X To make a full brake application: For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the
depress the brake pedal with full force. radar sensor system and the camera system
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a must be operational.
pulsing in the brake pedal. With the help of a sensor system and a cam-
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- era system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:
tion of hazardous road conditions, and func- Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an
tions as a reminder to take extra care while extended period of time
driving. Rthat cross the path of your vehicle
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your
vehicle can be detected.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typi-
General information cal characteristics such as the body contours
and posture of a person standing upright.
BAS operates in emergency braking situa-
tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, If the radar sensor system or the camera sys-
BAS automatically boosts the braking force, tem is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions
thus shortening the stopping distance. are restricted or no longer available. The
brake system is still available with complete Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
brake boosting effect and BAS. example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
i Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" sec- motorbike
tion“ (Y page 77). Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
Safety
Rvehicles quickly moving into the radar sen-
BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of
a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and sor system detection range
reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS Recognition by the camera system is also
PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are impaired in the event of:
assisted when braking. Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is cov-
ered
Important safety notes Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.
G WARNING from the sun being low in the sky

Rdarkness
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
objects and complex traffic situations. Rif:
In such cases, BAS PLUS may: - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the
path of the vehicle
Rintervene unnecessarily
- the camera system no longer recognizes
Rnot intervene
a pedestrian as a person due to special
There is a risk of an accident. clothing or other objects
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- - a pedestrian is concealed by other
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the objects
intervention in a non-critical driving situation. - the typical outline of a person is not dis-
tinguishable from the background
G WARNING
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
BAS PLUS does not react:
cle, have the configuration and operation of
Rto small people, e.g. children the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
Rto animals cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
Rto oncoming vehicles sions at low speeds where there is no visible
Rwhen cornering
damage to the front of the vehicle.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all
configuration and operation of the camera
critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-
system checked at a qualified specialist work-
dent.
shop.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
Function
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec- To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the
ognition can be impaired. brake force necessary if:
Recognition by the radar sensor system is Ryou approach an obstacle, and
also impaired in the event of:
RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
When driving at a speed under 20 mph
covering the sensors (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,
Rthere is interference by other radar sources BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake
Z
pressure will be carried out at the last possi- COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can
ble moment. help you to minimize the risk of a front-end
When driving at a speed above 20 mph collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal effects of such a collision.
sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
brake pressure to a value adapted to the traf- detects that there is a risk of a collision, you
Safety
fic situation. will be warned visually and acoustically. If you

BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz- do not react to the visual and audible collision
ardous situations with vehicles in front within warning, autonomous braking can be initiated
a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and in critical situations. If you apply the brake
155 mph (250 km/h). yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake
(70 km/h), BAS PLUS may react to: Assist assists you.
Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi- Activating or deactivating
cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is
activated after every ignition cycle. You can
Robjects crossing your path and that are
activate or deactivate COLLISION PREVEN-
recognized in the detection range of the
TION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board computer
sensors
(Y page 190). When deactivated, the dis-
i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high tance warning function and the autonomous
braking force, preventative passenger pro- braking function are also deactivated.
tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa- If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is
ted simultaneously. deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the assistance graphics display.
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Important safety notes
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func- In particular, the detection of obstacles can
tion as usual, if: be impaired if:
Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. covering the sensors
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your Rthere is snow or heavy rain
vehicle. Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
Ryou activate kickdown. example in parking garages
motorbike
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
PLUS Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COL-
General information LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system

Observe the notes in the section on break-
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS con- ing-in (Y page 136).
sists of a distance warning function with an
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
autonomous braking function and adaptive
cle, have the configuration and operation of
Brake Assist.
the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe- Function

cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
sions at low speeds where there is no visible the distance warning function warns you if
damage to the front of the vehicle. you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An
intermittent warning tone will then sound,
Distance warning function and the · distance warning lamp will light
Safety
up in the instrument cluster.
General information
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
The distance warning function can help you to distance from the vehicle in front.
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with
a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such or
a collision. If the distance warning function X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you so.

will be warned visually and acoustically. Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving condi-
tions may also cause the system to display a
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- warning.
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 75).
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
G WARNING distance warning function can detect obsta-
The distance warning function does not react: cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
Rto people or animals
Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h),
Rto oncoming vehicles the distance warning function can also react
Rto crossing traffic to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or
Rwhen cornering parked vehicles.
Thus, the distance warning function cannot
provide a warning in all critical situations. Autonomous braking function
There is a risk of an accident.
If the driver does not react to the distance
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- warning signal in a critical situation, COLLI-
uation and be ready to brake. SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist
with the autonomous braking function.
G WARNING The autonomous braking function:
The distance warning function cannot always
Rgives the driver more time to react to criti-
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
situations. cal driving situations
Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or
In such cases, the distance warning function
may: Rreduces the effects of an accident
Rgive an unnecessary warning The autonomous braking function is available

in the following speed ranges:
Rnot give a warning
Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph
(105 km/h) for moving objects
Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph
uation and do not rely solely on the distance
warning function. (50 km/h) for stationary objects
If the autonomous braking function requires a
particularly high braking force, preventative
Z
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the
are activated simultaneously. distance warning signal can detect obstacles
that are in the path of your vehicle for an
Adaptive Brake Assist extended period of time.
If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of col-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- lision with the vehicle in front, it calculates
Safety
tion (Y page 75).

the braking force necessary to avoid a colli-
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis- sion. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adap-
tance in hazardous situations at speeds tive Brake Assist will automatically increase
above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor the braking force to a level suitable for the
technology to assess the traffic situation. traffic conditions.
G WARNING X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly emergency braking situation is over.
identify objects and complex traffic situa- ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
tions. The brakes will work normally again if:
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Ryou release the brake pedal.
Rintervene unnecessarily Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.
Rnot intervene Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
There is a risk of an accident. vehicle.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly
intervention in a non-critical driving situation. high braking force, preventative passenger
protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa-
G WARNING ted simultaneously.
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph
Rto people or animals (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable
Rto
of reacting to moving objects that have
oncoming vehicles
already been detected as such at least once
Rto crossing traffic
over the period of observation.
Rwhen cornering
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not (70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a stationary obstacles.
risk of an accident.
uation and be ready to brake. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Due to the nature of the system, particularly General notes
complicated but non-critical driving condi-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-
tion (Y page 75).
vene.
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the i.e. power transmission between the tires and
brake system remains available with full the road surface.
brake boosting effect and BAS. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-
vehicle. The engine output is also modified to ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® not avail-
keep the vehicle on the desired course within able due to a malfunction.
physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when Observe the information on warning lamps
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® (Y page 206) and display messages which
can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
Safety
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 192).
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
i Only use wheels with the recommended
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function
tion (Y page 75). properly.
ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehi-
cles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®. Characteristics of ESP®
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi- General information
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
example if the road surface is slippery on one
side. In addition, more drive torque is trans- active.
ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning
Traction control remains active, even if you lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
deactivate ESP®. If ESP® intervenes:
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-
Important safety notes stances.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
tion (Y page 75). necessary when pulling away.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
G WARNING
ing road and weather conditions.
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv- ECO start/stop function
ing safety systems are deactivated. This The ECO start/stop function switches the
increases the risk of skidding and an accident. engine off automatically when the vehicle
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a stops moving. The engine starts automati-
qualified specialist workshop. cally when the driver wants to pull away again.
ESP® remains in its previously selected sta-
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per- tus. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before
formance tests may only be carried out on
the engine was switched off, ESP® remains
a 2-axle dynamometer. Before you operate
deactivated when the engine is switched on
the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please
again.
consult a qualified workshop. You could
otherwise damage the drive train or the
brake system. Deactivating/activating ESP® (except
AMG vehicles)
Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes
on ESP® (Y page 283) when towing the vehi- Important safety notes
cle with a raised rear axle. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
ESP® is only deactivated if the å warning tion (Y page 75).
lamp is lit continuously.
Z
You can select between the following states If you deactivate ESP®:
of ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
RESP® is activated. Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
RESP® is deactivated. drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-
Safety
G WARNING
ting action for better traction on loose sur-
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- faces.
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
Rtraction control is still activated.
of skidding and an accident.
RESP® still provides support when you
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
brake.
bed in the following.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG

extended period with ESP® deactivated. vehicles)
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
lowing situations: tion (Y page 75).
Rwhen using snow chains You can select between the following states
Rindeep snow of ESP®:
Ron sand or gravel
RESP® is activated.
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations RSPORT handling mode is activated.
described above no longer apply. ESP® will RESP® is deactivated.
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-
cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel G WARNING
starts to spin. When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-
Deactivating/activating ESP® dents.
You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-
on-board computer (Y page 190). uations described in the following.
ESP® deactivated:
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the G WARNING
instrument cluster lights up. If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
ESP® activated: bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
bed in the following.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
extended period with ESP® deactivated.
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-
tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
In the following situations, it may be better to X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :.
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
ESP®: instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ON
Rwhen using snow chains message appears in the multifunction dis-
Rin
play.
deep snow
Safety
Ron sand or gravel Characteristics of activated SPORT han-
Ron specially designated roads when the dling mode
vehicle's own oversteering and understeer- If SPORT handling mode is activated and one
ing characteristics are desired or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without warning lamp in the instrument cluster
ESP® requires an extremely qualified and flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a
experienced driver. limited degree.
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations When SPORT handling mode is activated:
described above no longer apply. ESP® will RESP® only improves driving stability to a
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi- limited degree.
cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel Rtraction control is still activated.
starts to spin. Rengine torque is restricted to a limited
Deactivating/activating ESP® degree and the drive wheels are able to

spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-
ting action for better traction on loose sur-
faces.
RESP® still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
the instrument cluster does not flash. In such
X To activate SPORT handling mode: situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
briefly press button :. If you deactivate ESP®:
The M SPORT handling mode warning
RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
The SPORT handling mode message Rengine torque is restricted to a limited
appears in the multifunction display. degree and the drive wheels are able to
X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: spin.
briefly press button :. The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-
The M SPORT handling mode warning ting action for better traction on loose sur-
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. faces.
Rtraction control is still activated.
X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until
RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it
the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up
in the instrument cluster. activated if you brake firmly and ESP®
The ÷ OFF message appears in the mul- intervenes.
tifunction display.
Z
RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it Important safety notes

is also not activated if you brake firmly and
ESP® intervenes. tion for driving safety systems (Y page 75).
RESP® still provides support when you brake
firmly. G WARNING
Safety
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can

ESP® trailer stabilization lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
risk of skidding and an accident.
General information You should therefore adapt your driving style
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to to the different handling characteristics. Have
swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and cialist workshop.
limiting the engine output until the vehicle/
Observe information regarding indicator and
trailer combination has stabilized.
warning lamps (Y page 205) as well as dis-
Important safety notes play messages (Y page 194).
G WARNING
If road and weather conditions are poor, ADAPTIVE BRAKE
trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent
the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can tion (Y page 75).
tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
a risk of an accident. and offers increased braking comfort. In addi-
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail- tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE
ing road and weather conditions. also has the HOLD function (Y page 165) and
hill start assist (Y page 141).
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer
combination) begins to lurch, you can only
stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by PRE-SAFE® Brake
depressing the brake firmly.
General information
ESP® trailer stabilization is active above
speeds of about 65 km/h. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if tion (Y page 75).
ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehi-
malfunction. cles with the Driving Assistance package.
For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv-
EBD (electronic brake force distribu- ing, the radar sensor system and the camera
tion) system must be switched on and be opera-
tional.
General information With the help of the radar sensor system and
EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- the camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can
sure on the rear wheels to improve driving detect obstacles that are in front of your vehi-
stability while braking. cle for an extended period of time.
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your
vehicle can be detected.
PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using In order to maintain the appropriate distance
typical characteristics such as the body con- to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-
tours and posture of a person standing lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
upright. PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle
Observe the restrictions described in the automatically under the following conditions:
Safety
"Important safety notes" sec- Rthe driver and front-passenger have their
tion“ (Y page 85). seat belts fastened
PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize and
the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a Rthe vehicle speed is between approx-
pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a
imately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph
collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a (200 km/h)
risk of collision, you will be warned visually
At a speed of up to approximately 44 mph
and acoustically as well as by automatic brak-
ing. (70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect:
Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi-
Important safety notes cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi- G WARNING
cle by a partial application of the brakes if a PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
danger of collision is detected. There may be Rto small people, e.g. children
a collision unless you brake yourself. Even
Rto animals
after subsequent full application of the brakes
Rto oncoming vehicles
a collision cannot always be avoided, partic-
ularly when approaching at too high a speed. Rto crossing traffic
There is a risk of an accident. Rwhen cornering
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither
take evasive action, provided it is safe to do give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-
so. uations. There is a risk of an accident.
G WARNING uation and be ready to brake.
PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-
tify objects and complex traffic conditions. In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: ognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
also impaired in the event of:
brake the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene
covering the sensors
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
situation and be ready to brake, especially if
example in parking garages
PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
motorbike
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
relative to the center of your vehicle
Z
Recognition by the camera system is also X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
impaired in the event of: or
Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is cov- X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
ered so.
Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g. If there is an increased risk of collision, pre-
Safety
from the sun being low in the sky ventive passenger protection measures (PRE-
Rdarkness SAFE®) are activated.
Rif: If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the remains and you do not brake, take evasive
path of the vehicle action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
- the camera system no longer recognizes may perform automatic emergency braking,
a pedestrian as a person due to special up to the point of full brake application. Auto-
clothing or other objects matic emergency braking is not performed
- a pedestrian is concealed by other
until immediately prior to an imminent acci-
dent.
objects
- the typical outline of a person is not dis-
You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-
tinguishable from the background SAFE® Brake at any time by:
Following damage to the front end of the vehi- Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.
cle, have the configuration and operation of Ractivating kickdown.
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- Rreleasing the brake pedal.
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is
sions at low speeds where there is no visible
ended automatically if:
damage to the front of the vehicle.
Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.
system checked at a qualified specialist work- Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
shop. front of your vehicle.
Function
STEER CONTROL
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board General information
computer (Y page 190). STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the noticeable steering force to the steering
æ symbol appears in the multifunction wheel in the direction required for vehicle
display. stabilization.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), This steering assistance is provided in partic-
this function warns you if you rapidly ular if:
approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on
warning tone will then sound and the ·
a slippery road surface when you brake
distance warning lamp will light up in the
heavily.
instrument cluster.
Rthe vehicle starts to skid.
Protection against theft 87
Important safety notes ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

tion (Y page 75).
No steering support is provided by STEER
CONTROL, if:
Safety
RESP® is malfunctioning.
Rthe lighting is faulty.
Power steering will, however, continue to
function.
Protection against theft X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO.
Immobilizer Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys-
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from tem is armed after approximately
being started without the correct SmartKey. 15 seconds.
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the or
ignition off and open the driver's door. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
When leaving the vehicle, always take the alarm system is armed and you open:
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Any- Ra door
one can start the engine if a valid SmartKey Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
has been left inside the vehicle. Rthe trunk lid/tailgate
i The immobilizer is always deactivated Rthe hood
when you start the engine. X To switch the alarm off with the Smart-
In the event that the engine cannot be star- Key: press the % or & button on the
ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), SmartKey.
the system is not operational. Contact an The alarm is switched off.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
or
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
X Remove the Start/Stop button from the
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
Z
88 Protection against theft
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:

grasp the outside door handle. The Smart-
Key must be outside the vehicle.
or
Safety
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-

board. The SmartKey must be inside the
vehicle.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that triggered it, for
example.
i If the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call
system automatically notifies the Cus-
tomer Assistance Center. This is done
either by text message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends the mes-
sage or data provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-
vice.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.
89
Useful information .............................. 90

SmartKey ............................................. 90
Doors .................................................... 95
Trunk/cargo compartment ................ 96
Side windows .................................... 104
Sliding sunroof .................................. 106
Opening and closing

90 SmartKey
Useful information Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the

SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
i This Operator's Manual describes all inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
publication of the Operator's Manual. magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
Country-specific differences are possible. control function could be affected.
Please note that your vehicle may not be Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
Opening and closing
equipped with all features described. This vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
also applies to safety-related systems and Do not keep the SmartKey:
functions.
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
i Read the information on qualified special- phone or another SmartKey.
ist workshops (Y page 31). Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
foil.
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
SmartKey
This can affect the functionality of the
Important safety notes SmartKey.
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, SmartKey functions
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine. : & To lock the vehicle
There is a risk of an accident and injury. ; F To open/close the trunk lid/tailgate
When leaving the vehicle, always take the = % To unlock the vehicle
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X To lock centrally: press the & button.
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
reach of children. Rthe doors
Rthe trunk lid/tailgate
G WARNING Rthe fuel filler flap
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
and three times when locking.
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a You can also set an audible signal to confirm
risk of an accident. that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
SmartKey 91
signal can be activated and deactivated using X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
the on-board computer (Y page 190). surface of the door handle.
When it is dark, the surround lighting also X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-
comes on if it is activated in the on-board face :.
computer (Y page 190). X Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an exten-
ded period.
KEYLESS-GO
For further information on the convenience
Opening and closing

General notes closing feature, see the Digital Operator's
Manual, keyword "Convenience closing".
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-
LESS-GO key in the vehicle.
Locking/unlocking centrally
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the SmartKey with you. You can combine the
functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a con-
ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by
using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it
using the & button on the SmartKey. (Example: Sedan)
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, X To unlock the trunk lid/tailgate: pull the
the distance between the SmartKey and the handle on the trunk lid/tailgate.
corresponding door handle must not be The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid/tail-
greater than 3 ft (1 m). gate.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the Deactivating and activating
SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: If you do not intend to use a key for an exten-
ded period of time, you can deactivate the
Rwhen the external door handles are KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The
touched SmartKey will then use very little power,
Rwhen starting the engine thereby conserving battery power. For the
Rwhile the vehicle is in motion purposes of activation/deactivation, the
vehicle must not be nearby.
X To deactivate: press the & button on
the SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
(Y page 93) flashes twice briefly and
Z
92 SmartKey
lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deac- If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
tivated. key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
X To activate: press any button on the automatically.
SmartKey or insert the SmartKey into the X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
ignition lock. SmartKey into the ignition lock.
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea-
tures are available again. Removing the mechanical key
Opening and closing
Changing the settings of the locking

system
You can find information about this in the
Digital Operator's Manual.
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or X Push release catch : in the direction of
unlocked with the SmartKey, use the the arrow and at the same time remove
mechanical key. mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and For further information about:
open the driver's door or the trunk lid/tail-
Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 96)
gate, the anti-theft alarm system will be trig-
gered (Y page 87). Runlocking the trunk (Y page 103)
There are several ways to turn off the alarm: Runlocking the tailgate (Y page 103)
Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 96)
X To deactivate the alarm with the Smart-
Key: press the % or & button on the
SmartKey. Inserting the mechanical key
or X Push mechanical key ; completely into
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. the SmartKey until it engages and release
or catch : is back in its basic position.
X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-
GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni-
tion lock. The SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
or
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO. The SmartKey must be outside the
vehicle.
SmartKey 93
SmartKey battery X Press mechanical key ; into the opening

in the SmartKey in the direction of the
Checking the battery arrow until battery compartment cover :
opens. Do not hold battery compartment
cover : closed while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
Opening and closing

X Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
lamp : does not light up briefly. palm until battery = falls out.
X Change the battery (Y page 93). X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
the signal reception range of the vehicle, to do so.
pressing the & or % button: X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
Rlocks or free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
Runlocks the vehicle X Insert the front tabs of battery compart-
ment cover : into the housing and then
i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
press to close it.
cialist workshop.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the Smart-
Replacing the battery Key.
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
on the vehicle.
X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 92).
Z
94 SmartKey
Problems with the SmartKey

You can no longer lock The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
or unlock the vehicle X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 93) and replace it if nec-
using the SmartKey. essary (Y page 93).
If this does not work:
Opening and closing
X Unlock (Y page 96) or lock (Y page 96) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.

mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
or unlock the vehicle X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 93) and replace it if nec-
using KEYLESS-GO. essary (Y page 93).
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

mechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote
control function:
mechanical key.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-
Key. shop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors 95

You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
The engine cannot be the on-board voltage is too low.

started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
Opening and closing

X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 278).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 279).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked.

started using KEYLESS- X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
GO. The SmartKey is in
the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Doors vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of

reach of children.
Ideally, place luggage or loads in the trunk/
G WARNING
cargo compartment. Observe the loading
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, guidelines (Y page 238).
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users. Information in the Digital Operator's
Rget out and disrupt traffic. Manual
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in information on the following topics:
motion if, for example, they: RUnlocking and opening doors from the
Rrelease the parking brake. inside
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of RCentrally locking and unlocking the vehicle
park position P from the inside
RStart the engine. RAutomatic locking feature
There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Z
96 Trunk/cargo compartment
Unlocking the driver's door (mechan- X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
ical key) Key (Y page 92).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the driver's door as far as it will go.
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
Key (Y page 92).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
Opening and closing
the driver's door as far as it will go.
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to posi-

tion 1.
The door is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid/
to position 1.
The door is unlocked. tailgate are locked.
X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
Key.
it.
Key. Trunk/cargo compartment
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm Important safety notes
system will be triggered (Y page 87). G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the trunk lid/tailgate is open when the engine is
SmartKey, use the mechanical key. running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
X Open the driver's door. There is a risk of poisoning.
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear Always switch off the engine before opening
doors and the trunk lid/tailgate. the trunk lid/tailgate. Never drive with the
X Press the locking button (Y page 95).
trunk lid/tailgate open.
X Check whether the locking knobs on the
! The trunk lid/tailgate swings upwards
front-passenger door and the rear doors and to the rear when opened. Therefore,
are still visible. Press down the locking make sure that there is sufficient clearance
knobs by hand, if necessary. above and behind the trunk lid/tailgate.
X Close the driver's door.
Trunk/cargo compartment 97
Ideally, place luggage or loads in the trunk/ trunk lid/tailgate opens again automatically.
cargo compartment. Observe the loading The automatic reversing feature is only an aid
guidelines (Y page 238). and is not a substitute for your attentiveness
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk/cargo to the trunk lid/tailgate while it is closing.
compartment. You could otherwise lock your- G WARNING
self out.
The reversing feature does not react:
Sedan without the trunk lid convenience
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
closing feature: the trunk lid can be:
Opening and closing

gers
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
Ropened automatically from outside
movement
Ropened automatically from inside
This means that the reversing feature cannot
Rlocked separately prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
Ropened with the emergency release button uations. There is a risk of injury.
Runlocked with the mechanical key Make sure that no body parts are in close
Sedan with the trunk lid convenience proximity during the closing procedure.
closing feature: the trunk lid can be: If somebody becomes trapped:
Ropened and closed manually from outside Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
Ropened and closed automatically from out- Rpull or press the remote operating switch
side on the driver's door or
Ropened and closed automatically from Rpress the closing or locking button on the
inside trunk lid/tailgate, or
Rlocked separately Rpull the handle on the trunk lid/tailgate
Ropened with the emergency release button

Runlocked with the mechanical key
Opening/closing from outside
Wagon: you can:
Ropen and close the tailgate manually from Opening
outside
Ropen the tailgate manually from inside
(Wagon with a folding bench seat)
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from outside
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from inside
Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate
Runlock the tailgate using the mechanical
key
Handle (example: Sedan)
X Press the % button on the SmartKey.
Trunk lid/tailgate reversing feature
X Sedan: pull handle :.
The trunk lid/tailgate is equipped with an X Raise the trunk lid.
automatic reversing feature. It reacts if a solid
object obstructs or restricts the trunk lid/ Wagon: if you pull handle : and keep it in
tailgate during the closing procedure. The this position, you can open the tailgate man-
Z
ually. If you release the handle, the tailgate Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
opens automatically. closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
Closing closing process:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Rpull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
Opening and closing
Rpress the closing or locking button on the

trunk lid/tailgate.
Rpull the handle on the trunk lid/tailgate
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
Recess (example: Sedan) gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
X Pull the trunk lid/tailgate down using trunk lid/tailgate is open when the engine is
recess :. running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
X Wagon: let the tailgate drop and engage in
There is a risk of poisoning.
the lock. Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid/tailgate. Never drive with the
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the &
button on the SmartKey (Y page 90) or with
KEYLESS-GO (Y page 91). ! The trunk lid/tailgate swings upwards
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & and to the rear when opened. Therefore,
button on the SmartKey (Y page 90) or with make sure that there is sufficient clearance
KEYLESS-GO (Y page 91). above and behind the trunk lid/tailgate.
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the &
button on the SmartKey (Y page 90). Opening
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the You can open the trunk lid/tailgate automat-
trunk/cargo compartment, the trunk lid/ ically with the SmartKey or the handle in the
tailgate will not lock. trunk lid/tailgate.
Sedan: the trunk lid then opens again. X Press and hold the F button on the
SmartKey until the trunk lid/tailgate
opens.
Opening/closing automatically from or
outside X If the trunk lid/tailgate is unlocked, pull the
Important safety notes trunk lid/tailgate handle and let it go again

immediately.(Y page 97)(Y page 97)
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the trunk lid/tailgate.
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the
closing area during the closing process. There
is a risk of injury.
Closing HANDS-FREE ACCESS

G WARNING
The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot.
You could burn yourself by touching the
exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE
ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always
Opening and closing

ensure that you only make the kicking move-
ment within the detection range of sensors.
! If the key is within the rear detection

Closing button and locking button (example: range of KEYLESS-GO, situations such as
Sedan)
the following could lead to the uninten-
Sedan: on vehicles with the trunk lid remote tional opening of the trunk lid/tailgate:
closing feature, you can close the trunk lid Rusing a car wash
automatically. For vehicles with trunk lid
Rusing a power washer
remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: you
can simultaneously close the trunk lid and Make sure that the SmartKey is at least
lock the vehicle. 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.
Wagon: for vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, you
can simultaneously close the tailgate and General notes
lock the vehicle. Sedan: with KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE
X To close: press closing button : in the ACCESS, you can open or close the trunk lid
trunk lid/tailgate. or stop the closing procedure without using
X To simultaneously close the trunk lid/ your hands.
tailgate and lock the vehicle: Wagon: with KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE
Press closing button ; in the trunk lid/ ACCESS, you can open or close the tailgate or
tailgate. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in stop the procedure without using your hands.
the rear detection range of the vehicle. This is useful if you have your hands full. To do
The trunk lid/tailgate closes. this, make a kicking movement under the
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks. bumper with your foot.
Observe the following points:
i If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the
RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your
trunk/cargo compartment, the trunk lid/
tailgate opens again after it is closed. person. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in
the rear detection range of the vehicle.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey
RWhen making the kicking movement, make
outside the vehicle, the trunk lid/tailgate
remains closed. sure that you are standing firmly on the
ground and that there is sufficient clear-
ance to the rear of the vehicle. You could
otherwise lose your balance e.g. on ice.
Z
Operation
Opening and closing
(Example: Sedan)
RAlways ensure that you only make the kick- (Example: Sedan)
ing movement within the detection range of
X To open/close: kick into sensor detection
sensors :.
range : under the bumper with your foot.
RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
Sedan: you will hear a warning tone while
rear area while doing so. the trunk lid is closing.
RDo not come into contact with the bumper
Wagon: you will hear a warning tone while
while making the kicking movement. Oth- the tailgate is opening or closing.
erwise, the sensors may not function cor-
rectly. X If the trunk lid/tailgate does not open
RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function after several attempts: wait at least ten
when the engine is started. seconds, then move your foot under the
RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear
bumper again.
detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HAND- i If you hold your foot under the bumper for
FREE ACCESS could be triggered. For this too long, the trunk lid/ tailgate does not
reason, the trunk lid/tailgate could open or open or close. Repeat the leg movement
close unintentionally, e.g. if you: more quickly if this occurs.
- sit down on the edge of the trunk/edge Sedan: to cancel the closing procedure:
of the cargo compartment. Rmove your foot in sensor detection
- set something down or lift something up range : under the bumper
behind the vehicle. Rpull the handle on the outside of the trunk
- polish the rear of the vehicle. lid
Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about Rpress the closing button in the trunk lid, or
your person in these situations or in situa- Rpress the F button on the SmartKey
tions similar to these. You can thus avoid
If the closing procedure of the trunk lid is
unintentionally opening or closing the trunk
canceled, the trunk lid opens again auto-
lid/tailgate.
matically.
RDirt caused by road salt around sensors :
Wagon: to stop the opening or closing pro-
may restrict functionality.
cedure:
RUsing the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a
Rmove your foot in sensor detection
prosthetic leg may restrict functionality.
range : under the bumper
Rpull the handle on the outside of the tailgate
Rpress the closing or locking button on the G WARNING

tailgate or Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
If the tailgate closing procedure has been gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
stopped: trunk lid/tailgate is open when the engine is
Rmove your foot under the bumper again and running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
the tailgate will open There is a risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
Opening and closing

If the tailgate opening procedure has been
stopped: the trunk lid/tailgate. Never drive with the
Rkick with your foot under the bumper again
and the tailgate will close ! The trunk lid/tailgate swings upwards
and to the rear when opened. Therefore,
make sure that there is sufficient clearance
Opening/closing automatically from above and behind the trunk lid/tailgate.
inside
Important safety notes Opening and closing
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the trunk lid/tailgate.
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the
closing area during the closing process. There
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process: X To open: pull remote operating switch for
Rpress
the trunk lid/tailgate : until the trunk lid/
the F button on the SmartKey.
tailgate opens.
Rpull or press the remote operating switch
X To close (Sedan): press remote operating
on the driver's door.
switch for trunk lid : until the trunk lid is
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
completely closed.
trunk lid/tailgate.
X To close (Wagon): turn the SmartKey to
Rpull the handle on the trunk lid/tailgate
position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Press remote operating switch for tail-
G WARNING
gate : until the tailgate is completely
The trunk lid/tailgate can be automatically
closed.
opened or closed even if the SmartKey is not
in the vehicle. If children are left unsupervised You can open and close the trunk lid/tailgate
in the vehicle, they could activate the func- from the driver's seat when the vehicle is sta-
tions. There is a risk of injury. tionary and unlocked.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Z
Limiting the opening angle of the tail- i Tailgate opening dimensions

gate (Wagon) (Y page 344).
Important safety notes Opening

! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
open the tailgate fully when setting the
opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise
be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle
Opening and closing
outside.
Activating
You can limit the opening angle of the tail-
gate. This is possible in the top half of its
opening range, up to approximately 8 in
(20 cm) before the stop.
Inside of tailgate
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on
X To unlock the tailgate: slide locking
the tailgate.
catch ; to the right.
X To stop the opening procedure at the
X To open: pull the top of handle :.
desired position: press the closing button
X Swing the tailgate upwards.
(Y page 98) in the tailgate or pull the handle
on the outside of the tailgate again. X To lock the tailgate: slide locking catch ;
X To store the position: press and hold the to the left.

closing button in the tailgate until you hear
a short tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The Locking the trunk separately (Sedan)
tailgate will now stop in the stored position You can lock the trunk separately. If you then
when opening. unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk
remains locked and cannot be opened.
Deactivating X Close the trunk lid.
X Press and hold the closing button X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
(Y page 98) in the tailgate until you hear Key (Y page 92).
two short tones.
Opening the tailgate from inside the

vehicle (Wagon with a folding bench
seat)
General notes
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid Trunk emergency release (Sedan)
lock as far as it will go.
You can open the trunk lid from inside the
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from
vehicle with the emergency release button.
position 1 to position 2.
X Remove the mechanical key.
Key.
Opening and closing

Unlocking the trunk (Sedan)
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the X Press emergency release button : briefly.
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechani- The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
cal key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened
open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system with the trunk lid emergency release when
will be triggered (Y page 87). the vehicle is stationary or while driving.
The trunk lid emergency release does not
open the trunk lid if the battery is disconnec-
Key (Y page 92).
ted or discharged.
X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
Trunk lid emergency release light:
lock as far as it will go.
Remergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.
Remergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.
Tailgate emergency release (Wagon)

General notes
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
X Turn the mechanical key from position 1 that there is sufficient clearance above and
counter-clockwise as far as it will go to behind the tailgate.
position 2. i Tailgate opening dimensions
The trunk is unlocked. (Y page 344).
X Turn the mechanical key back to position
If the tailgate can no longer be opened from
1 and remove it. outside the vehicle, use the emergency
X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart- release on the inside of the tailgate.
Key. On vehicles with a folding bench seat, you can
use the handle to open the tailgate from
inside the vehicle (Y page 97).
Z
104 Side windows
Opening When closing make sure that no parts of the

body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.
G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
Opening and closing
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.

Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
X Fold the rear seat backrest forwards cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
(Y page 241). vehicle.
X Remove cargo compartment cover
(Y page 243).
X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Side window reversing feature
Key (Y page 92). The side windows are equipped with an auto-
X Insert mechanical key ; into the opening matic reversing feature. If a solid object
in paneling :. blocks or restricts a side window during the
X Turn mechanical key ; 90° clockwise. closing process, the side window opens again
X Push mechanical key ; in the direction of automatically. However, the automatic
the arrow and open the tailgate. reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
Key. attention when closing a side window.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Side windows
Important safety notes gers
Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
G WARNING movement
While opening the side windows, body parts Rduring resetting
could become trapped between the side win-
Rwhen closing the side window again man-
dow and the door frame as the side window
ually immediately after automatic reversing
moves. There is a risk of injury.
This means that the reversing feature cannot
Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
dow during the opening procedure. If some-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
body becomes trapped, release the switch or
pull the switch to close the side window again. Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
G WARNING someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again.
While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
Side windows 105
Information in the Digital Operator's

Manual
In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find
information on the following topics:
ROpening and closing the side windows
RConvenience opening
RConvenience closing feature
Opening and closing

RResetting the side windows
Z
106 Sliding sunroof
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
Opening and closing
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot X Remove the objects.
be closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
be closed and you can- slightly:
not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped:

Important safety notes Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding
switch briefly in any direction
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sun- ped.
roof.
G WARNING
G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, could become trapped, particularly if they are
body parts in close proximity could become left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
trapped. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Make sure that no body parts are in close SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
proximity during the opening and closing pro- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
cedures.
Sliding sunroof 107
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of This means that the reversing feature cannot
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
occur. uations. There is a risk of injury.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the Make sure that no body parts are in close
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could proximity during the closing procedure.
be damaged. If somebody becomes trapped:
! The weather can change abruptly. It could Rrelease the switch immediately, or
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the
Opening and closing

Rpress the switch in any direction during the
sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the automatic closing process
vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be
The closing process is stopped.
damaged if water enters the vehicle inte-
rior.
i Resonance noises can occur in addition to Operating the sliding sunroof
the usual airflow noises when the sliding
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor Opening and closing
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof
or open a side window slightly to reduce or
eliminate these noises.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature

Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding
sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sun-
roof. Overhead control panel
: To raise
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object ; To open
blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during = To close/lower
the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
again automatically. However, the automatic ignition lock.
reversing feature is only an aid and does not X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
sponding direction.
attention when closing the sliding sunroof.
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
G WARNING point of resistance, an automatic opening/
The reversing feature does not react: closing process is started in the corre-
sponding direction. You can stop automatic
gers operation by pressing/pulling the switch
again.
Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
movement i The automatic opening and raising fea-
Rduring resetting ture is available only when the sliding sun-
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man-
roof is closed.
ually immediately after automatic reversing
Z
108 Sliding sunroof
The sun protection cover automatically opens Operating the panorama roof with
along with the sliding sunroof. You can open power tilt/sliding panel
or close the sun protection cover manually
when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
i You can continue to operate the sliding
sunroof after switching off the engine or
removing the SmartKey from the ignition
lock. This function remains active for five
Opening and closing
minutes or until you open a front door.
Resetting
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
opened or closed fully after resetting, con- Overhead control panel
tact a qualified specialist workshop. : To raise
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move ; To open
smoothly. = To close/lower
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
tion lock. panel can only be operated when the roller
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear sunblind is open.
(Y page 107). X To open and close: turn the SmartKey to
X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
second. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be
sponding direction.
fully opened and closed again
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
(Y page 107).
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
closing process is started in the corre-
above again. sponding direction. You can stop automatic
operation by pressing/pulling the switch
again.
Operating the roller sunblind for the

panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
between the roller sunblind and frame or slid-
ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-
ing. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-
blind.
Sliding sunroof 109
If somebody becomes trapped: Opening and closing

Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening/closing process is briefly stop-
ped. The roller sunblind then returns to its ini-
tial position.
Opening and closing

The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior
from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can
only be opened and closed together when the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is
Overhead control panel
closed.
: To raise
Roller sunblind reversing feature ; To open
= To close/lower
The roller sunblind is equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
blocks or restricts the roller sunblind during ignition lock.
the closing process, the roller sunblind opens X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
again automatically. The automatic reversing sponding direction.
feature is only an aid and is not a substitute i If you press or pull the 3 switch
for your attentiveness to the roller sunblind beyond the point of resistance, an auto-
while it is closing. matic opening/closing process is started
in the corresponding direction. You can
G WARNING
stop automatic operation by pressing or
The reversing function does not react in par-
pulling again.
ticular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers. This means that the reversing feature
cannot prevent someone being trapped in Resetting the panorama roof with
these situations. There is a risk of injury. power tilt/sliding panel and roller
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure sunblind
that no body parts are in the sweep area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
! If the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel and the roller sunblinds cannot be
Rrelease the switch immediately, or fully opened or closed after resetting, con-
Rpress the switch in any direction during the tact a qualified specialist workshop.
automatic closing process Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
The closing process is briefly stopped. The ing panel and the roller sunblinds if the pan-
roller sunblind then returns to its initial posi- orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or
tion. the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly.
ignition lock.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
Z
110 Sliding sunroof
until the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel is fully closed (Y page 109).
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
tional second.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
Opening and closing
tional second.
X Make sure that the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 108) and
the roller sunblinds (Y page 109) can be
fully opened again.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Sliding sunroof 111
Problems with the sliding sunroof

Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof.
G WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
Opening and closing

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact
a qualified specialist workshop.
The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens
not be closed and you again slightly:
cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-
ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
reopens slightly:
X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-
ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment fea-
ture.
Z
112
113
Useful information ............................ 114

Correct driver's seat position .......... 114
Seats .................................................. 115
Steering wheel .................................. 117
Mirrors ............................................... 117
Memory function ............................... 117
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

114 Correct driver's seat position
Useful information

models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i Read the information on qualified special-

ist workshops (Y page 31).
Correct driver's seat position
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do X Observe the safety guidelines on seat
the following while driving: adjustment (Y page 115).
X Make sure that seat = is adjusted prop-
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
erly.
steering wheel or mirrors
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 116)
Rfasten the seat belt
When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt as possible
before starting the engine. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly
Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost
vertical position
Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that
your thighs are gently supported
Ryou can depress the pedals properly
X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-
ted properly.
When doing so, make sure that you have
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
of your head is supported at eye level by the
center of the head restraint.
X Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 117).
X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-
ted properly.
Seats 115
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically G WARNING

(Y page 117) If the head restraints are not installed or not
When adjusting the steering wheel, make adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
sure that: tection as intended. There is an increased risk
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
arms slightly bent event of an accident or when braking.
Ryou can move your legs freely Always drive with the head restraints instal-
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru- led. Before driving off, make sure for every
ment cluster clearly vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts

about eye level.
(Y page 50).
X Check whether you have fastened seat Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
belt ; properly (Y page 52). (Y page 54) and "Children in the Vehicle"
The seat belt should: (Y page 68).
Rfit snugly across your body G WARNING
Rbe routed across the middle of your shoul- You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
der the following while driving:
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
joints steering wheel or mirrors
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir- Rfasten the seat belt
ror and the exterior mirrors in such a way
that you have a good view of road and traf-
fic conditions (Y page 117). Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
X Vehicles with a memory function: save
before starting the engine.
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings with the memory function
G WARNING
(Y page 117).
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
Seats accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-
Important safety notes ment buttons and become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
G WARNING While moving the seats, make sure that your
Children could become trapped if they adjust hands or other body parts do not get under the
the seats, particularly when unattended. lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-
There is a risk of injury. tem.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never G WARNING
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
The seats can still be adjusted when there is seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
no SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Z
116 Seats
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat RAdjustingthe 4-way lumbar support
heating, observe the following information: RFoldingbench seat in the cargo compart-
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If ment (Wagon)
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as RSwitching the seat ventilation on/off
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat Switching the seat heating on/off
heating should also not be used to dry Switching on/off
the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended; G WARNING
see the "Interior care" section. Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the become very hot. The health of persons with
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
The seats should only be occupied by ability to react to excessively high tempera-
passengers, if possible. tures may be affected or they may even suffer
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
not cover the seats with insulating mate- Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov- repeatedly.
ers, child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when
moving the seats back. There is a risk that
the seats and/or the objects could be dam-
aged.
i The head restraints in the front seats are
installed with the NECK-PRO system
(Y page 65). For this reason, it is not pos-
sible to remove the head restraints from
the front seats.
Driver's and front-passenger seat
Vehicles without the through-loading fea-
ture: the head restraints cannot be
removed from the rear compartment seats.
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.

Manual
Canada only: rear seat
RAdjusting the seats
RAdjusting the head restraints
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
RAdjusting the active multicontour seat
Memory function 117
Driver's and front-passenger seat: the sys- G WARNING

tem automatically switches down from level 3 Children could injure themselves if they
to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
Rear seat: the system automatically injury.
switches down from level 3 to level 2 after When leaving the vehicle, always take the
approximately five minutes. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
The system automatically switches down leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes. The electrically adjustable steering wheel can
still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in
The system automatically switches off
the ignition lock.

approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the Information in the Digital Operator's
ignition lock (Y page 137). Manual
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set. information on the following topics:
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
RAdjusting
the steering wheel
until all the indicator lamps go out.
RSteering
wheel heating
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
heating may switch off.
Problems with the seat heating Mirrors

Digital Operator's Manual. In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find
RRear-view mirror
Steering wheel RExterior mirrors
Important safety notes RAutomatic anti-glare mirrors
RParking position for the exterior mirror on
G WARNING the front-passenger side
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, Memory function
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
RStoring settings
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
RCalling up a stored setting
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
Z
118
119

Exterior lighting ................................ 120
Interior lighting ................................. 123
Replacing bulbs ................................. 123
Windshield wipers ............................ 125
Lights and windshield wipers

120 Exterior lighting
Useful information Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options
models and all standard and optional equip- Exterior lighting can be set using:
ment of your vehicle available at the time of Rthe light switch
Rthe combination switch (Y page 121)
Please note that your vehicle may not be Rthe on-board computer (Y page 190)
also applies to safety-related systems and Light switch
functions.
Operation
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with the lights switched
on even during the daytime. Therefore, your
vehicle is equipped with special daytime run-
ning lamps. In some countries, operation of 1 W Left-hand standing lamps
the headlamps varies due to legal require- 2 X Right-hand standing lamps
ments and self-imposed obligations.
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
If you wish to drive during the daytime without instrument cluster lighting
lights, switch off the daytime running lamps
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-
function in the on-board computer
led by the light sensor
(Y page 190).
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
B R Rear fog lamp
Information in the Digital Operator's If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
Manual vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find X Turn the light switch to Ã.
information on the following topics: The exterior lighting (except the parking/
RHazardwarning lamps standing lamps) switches off automatically if
RHeadlamps fogged up on the inside you:
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
position 0
Exterior lighting 121
Information in the Digital Operator's Cornering light function

Manual
RAutomatic headlamp mode
RDaytime running lamps
RLow-beam headlamps
RRear fog lamp
RParking lamps
RStanding lamps
The cornering light function improves the illu-

Combination switch mination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better vis-
ibility in tight bends, for example. It can only
be activated when the low-beam headlamps
are switched on.
Active:
Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
Rif you are driving at speeds between
25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)
and turn the steering wheel
: High-beam headlamps
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
; Turn signal, right time, but is automatically switched off after
= High-beam flasher no more than three minutes.
? Turn signal, left
RTurn signal
RHigh-beam headlamps
RHigh-beam flasher
122 Exterior lighting
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Important safety notes

General notes G WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
may fail to recognize other road users that
have lights, or may recognize them too late. In
this or similar situations, the automatic high-
beam headlamps will not be deactivated or
activated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into

account road, weather or traffic conditions.
You can use this function to set the head- Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You
lamps to change between low beam and high are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's
beam automatically. The system recognizes lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and
vehicles with their lights on, either approach- traffic conditions.
ing from the opposite direction or traveling in In particular, the detection of obstacles can
front of your vehicle, and consequently be restricted if there is:
switches the headlamps from high beam to Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
low beam. snow
The system automatically adapts the low- Rdirton the sensors or the sensors are
beam headlamp range depending on the dis- obscured
tance to the other vehicle. Once the system
no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-
tivates the high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control
panel.
Replacing bulbs 123
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist indicator lamp in the multifunction display

on/off remains lit.
X To switch off: move the combination
switch back to its normal position or move
the light switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Interior lighting
An overview of the interior lighting and the

overhead control panel can be found in the

: High-beam headlamps "At a glance" section.
; Turn signal, right In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find
= High-beam flasher information on the following topics:
? Turn signal, left RAutomatic interior lighting control
X To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. RManual interior lighting control
X Press the combination switch beyond the RCrash-responsive emergency lighting
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-
tion display lights up when it is dark and the Replacing bulbs
light sensor activates the low-beam head-
lamps. Important safety notes
If you are driving at speeds above approx- G WARNING
imately 16 mph (25 km/h): Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
The headlamp range is set automatically when operating. If you change a bulb, you
depending on the distance between the could burn yourself on these components.
vehicle and other road users. There is a risk of injury.
If you are driving at speeds above approx- Allow these components to cool down before
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other changing a bulb.
road users have been detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on Vehicles with static LED headlamps:
automatically. The K indicator lamp in Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if
the instrument cluster also lights up. its glass tube has been scratched.
If you are driving at speeds below approx- The bulb may explode if:
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road Ryou touch it
users have been detected or the roads are Rit is hot
adequately lit:
Ryou drop it
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
Ryou scratch it
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _ Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps
designed for that purpose. Only install spare
bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
age.
Z
124 Replacing bulbs
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service

life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube
with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the
glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and
rub it off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-
tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact
with liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 124).
Have the bulbs that you cannot replace your-
self changed at a qualified specialist work- Static LED headlamps
shop.
: High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-
; Turn signal lamp: PSY 24 W

sult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
a qualified specialist workshop. Changing the front bulbs
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure High-beam headlamps (static LED head-
that these function correctly at all times. lamps)
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Vehicles with static LED headlamps
The front and rear light clusters of your vehi-
cle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not
replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop which has the necessary
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
the work required.
Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle
safety. You must therefore make sure that
these function correctly at all times. Have the
headlamp setting checked regularly. X Switch off the lights.
X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types and pull it out.
You can change the following bulbs. The bulb X Using the handle extension, turn bulb
type can be found in the legend. holder ; counter-clockwise and pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.
Windshield wipers 125
Turn signal (static LED headlamps) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow

5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B í Single wipe
î To wipe with washer fluid
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
will no longer be wiped properly. This could
prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
tions.
Switching the rear window wiper on/

off
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
: è Switch
wise until it engages.
2 ô Wipes with washer fluid
3 I Switches on intermittent wiping
Windshield wipers 4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping
5 ô Wipes with washer fluid
Switching the windshield wipers
on/off
ignition lock.
X Turn switch : on the combination switch
to the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on,
a symbol appears in the assistance graphic
in the instrument cluster.
Replacing the wiper blades

1 $ Windshield wiper off G WARNING
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor If the windshield wipers begin to move while
set to low sensitivity) you are changing the wiper blades, you could
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
Z
126 Windshield wipers
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of Installing the wiper blades
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,

make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.
! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper
arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield/rear window.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a X Position new wiper blade : in the retainer
wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear
on the wiper arm and slide it into place in

window.
the direction of the arrow.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when The wiper blade audibly engages.
you change the wiper blade. If you release X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated
the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it
correctly.
falls onto the windshield/rear window, the
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
windshield/rear window may be damaged
by the force of the impact. shield.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Removing a wiper blade
Replacing the wiper blades
Removing the wiper blades
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).
X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
shield.

lock.
X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win-
dow.
X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
X Firmly press release knob : and pull wiper blade ; in the direction of the arrow until
blade ; upwards from the wiper arm in the it releases.
direction of the arrow. X Remove wiper blade ;.
Windshield wipers 127
Installing a wiper blade

X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to the
arrow until it engages.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated
correctly.
X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win-
dow.

Problems with the windshield wipers
Z
128
129

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 130
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 133
Climate control
130 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information process and the desired interior tempera-

ture will be reached more quickly.
i This Operator's Manual describes all i The integrated filter filters out most par-
models and all standard and optional equip- ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-
publication of the Operator's Manual. lutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces
Country-specific differences are possible. the amount of air supplied to the vehicle
Please note that your vehicle may not be interior. For this reason, you should always
equipped with all features described. This observe the interval for replacing the filter,
also applies to safety-related systems and which is specified in the Maintenance
functions. Booklet. As it depends on environmental
i Read the information on qualified special- conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the
ist workshops (Y page 31). interval may be shorter than stated in the
Maintenance Booklet.
i It is possible that the residual heat func-
Climate control
Overview of climate control systems tion may be activated automatically an hour

General notes after the SmartKey is removed. The vehicle
is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the
Observe the settings recommended on the automatic climate control.
following pages. The windows could other-
wise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature
and the humidity in the vehicle interior and
filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when
the engine is running. Optimum operation is
only achieved with the side windows and roof
closed.
The residual heat function can only be acti-
vated or deactivated if the ignition is switched
off (see the Digital Operator's Manual, key-
word "Residual heat").
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the con-
venience opening feature (see the Digital
Operator's Manual, keyword "Convenience
opening"). This will speed up the cooling
Overview of climate control systems 131
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Canada only
: Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
; Defrosts the windshield
Climate control
= Switches the ZONE function on/off
? Display
A Sets climate control to automatic
B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off
C Switches the rear window defroster on/off
D Activates/deactivates the air conditioning
E Sets the temperature, right
F Sets the air distribution
G Sets the airflow
H Sets the temperature, left
USA only
: Sets climate control to automatic
? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
A Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off
B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off
C Switches the rear window defroster on/off
132 Overview of climate control systems
D Activates/deactivates the air conditioning

E Sets the temperature, right
F Sets the air distribution
G Sets the airflow
H Sets the temperature, left
I Display
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
: Sets climate control to automatic
? Display
A Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
B Switches the residual heat on or off
C Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off
D Switches the rear window defroster on/off
E Activates/deactivates the air conditioning
F Sets the temperature, right
G Adjusts the climate mode settings
H Sets the airflow
I Sets the air distribution
J Sets the temperature, left
Operating the climate control systems 133
Rear control panel

K Increases the temperature
L Display
M Increases the airflow
N Reduces the airflow
O Reduces the temperature
Operating the climate control sys-

tems

RSwitching climate control on/off
RActivating/deactivating cooling with air
Climate control
dehumidification
RSetting climate control to automatic
RAdjusting the climate mode settings
RSetting the temperature
RSetting the air distribution
RSetting the airflow
RSwitching the ZONE function on/off
RDefrosting the windshield
RMAX COOL maximum cooling
RDefrosting the windows
RSwitching the rear window defroster on/off
RActivating/deactivating air-recirculation
mode
RActivating/deactivating the residual heat
function
RSetting the air vents
134
135

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
cle ....................................................... 136
Driving ............................................... 137
Driving and parking

Automatic transmission ................... 142
Refueling ............................................ 145
Parking ............................................... 151
Driving tips ........................................ 153
Driving systems ................................ 155
136 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Useful information RChange gear in good time, before the tach-

ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red
i This Operator's Manual describes all area of the tachometer.
models and all standard and optional equip- RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator
ment of your vehicle available at the time of pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-
Driving and parking
publication of the Operator's Manual. down).

Country-specific differences are possible. Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehi-
Please note that your vehicle may not be cles:
RDo not drive faster than 85 mph
(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles
functions.
(1,500 km).
i Read the information on qualified special- ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
ist workshops (Y page 31). engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
RChange gear in good time.
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase
the engine speed gradually and accelerate
Important safety notes the vehicle to full speed.
The sensor system of some driving and driv- i You should also observe these notes on
ing safety systems adjusts automatically breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive
while a certain distance is being driven after train on your vehicle have been replaced.
the vehicle has been delivered or after
i Always observe the respective maximum
repairs. Full system effectiveness is not
permissible speed.
reached until the end of this teach-in proce-
dure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only AMG vehicles with self-locking rear
reach their optimum braking effect after sev- axle differential
eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-
sate for this by applying greater force to the Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking
brake pedal. differential on the rear axle.
Change the oil to improve protection of the
rear axle differential:
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Rafter a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles
The more you look after the engine when it is (3,000 km)
new, the more satisfied you will be with its Revery 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or
performance in the future. 3 years
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi- These oil changes prolong the service life of
cle and engine speeds for the first the differential. Have the oil change carried
1000 miles (1500 km). out at a qualified specialist workshop.
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-
tle, during this period.
Driving 137
Driving ! Do not warm up the engine with the vehi-

cle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid
Important safety notes high engine speeds and driving at full throt-
tle until the engine has reached its operat-
G WARNING
ing temperature.
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
Driving and parking

pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. Only shift the automatic transmission to
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is the desired drive position when the vehicle
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. is stationary.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter wheels when pulling away on slippery
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats roads. You could otherwise damage the
securely and as specified in order to ensure drive train.
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temper-
loose floormats and do not place floormats on atures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum
top of one another. engine speed is restricted in order to pro-
tect the engine. To protect the engine and
G WARNING maintain smooth engine operation, avoid
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage driving at full throttle when the engine is
of the pedals, e.g.: cold.
Rshoes with thick soles HYBRID vehicles: make sure that you read
Rshoes with high heels the "HYBRID" supplement included in the
Rslippers vehicle literature. Otherwise, you may not
recognize dangers.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals. SmartKey positions
G WARNING SmartKey
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can: g To remove the SmartKey
(shift the transmission to position P)
Roverheat and cause a fire
1 Power supply for some consumers, such
Rlose its hold function.
as the windshield wipers
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
the parking brake fully before driving off. and drive position
3 To start the engine
Z
138 Driving
i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni- This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-
tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart- GO.
Key for the vehicle. The ignition is not If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's
switched on. The engine cannot be started. remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a
short time:
Driving and parking
KEYLESS-GO Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition
General notes with the Start/Stop button.

Ryou will not be able to start the engine with
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
SmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS- the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but- unlocked again.
ton. If you lock the vehicle centrally using the but-
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ton on the front door (Y page 95), you can
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the continue to start the engine with the Start/
vehicle. Stop button.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into The engine can be switched off while the vehi-
the ignition lock, the system needs approx- cle is in motion by pressing and holding the
imately two seconds recognition time. You Start/Stop button for three seconds. This
can then use the Start/Stop button. function operates independently of the ECO
start/stop automatic engine switch-off func-
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
tion.
in succession corresponds to the different
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
the case if you are not depressing the brake
pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the
SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,
when starting the engine.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey: : Start/Stop button
; Ignition lock
Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in
the ignition lock. As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. Further information on situations where
Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the
an indicator lamp either fails to go out after
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 91). starting the engine or lights up while driving
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: (Y page 204).
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
phone or another SmartKey. pressed, this corresponds to the key being
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal removed from the ignition.
foil.
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
Driving 139
X To switch on the power supply: press Starting the engine

Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can Important safety notes
now activate the windshield wipers, for
G WARNING
example.
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
Driving and parking

The power supply is switched off again if:
they could:
Rthe driver's door is opened and Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when
people or road users.
in this position Rget out and disrupt traffic.
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/ Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Stop button : twice.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
The ignition is switched on.
motion if, for example, they:
The ignition is switched off when:
Rthe driver's door is opened and
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when
park position P
in this position
RStart the engine.
Removing the Start/Stop button There is a risk of an accident and injury.
You can remove the Start/Stop button from When leaving the vehicle, always take the
the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
mal using the SmartKey. leave children or animals unattended in the
It is only possible to switch between Start/ vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
Stop button mode and SmartKey operation reach of children.
when the transmission is in position P.
X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition G WARNING
lock ;. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
button from the ignition lock when you leave
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the vehicle. You should, however, always take
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehi-
out sufficient ventilation.
cle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ G WARNING
Stop button Flammable materials introduced through
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be environmental influence or by animals can
operated ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
! Do not depress the accelerator when

starting the engine.
Z
140 Driving
General notes X Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.
i Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the
X Press the Start/Stop button once
catalytic converter is preheated for up to
30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of (Y page 138).
the engine may change during this time. Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the
Driving and parking
engine starts.
Automatic transmission Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow is
activated and the engine starts.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
The transmission position display in the
multifunction display shows P. Pulling away
i You can start the engine in transmission General notes
position P and N.
G WARNING
Starting procedure with the SmartKey If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
i To start the engine using the SmartKey
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/
a risk of an accident.
Stop button out of the ignition lock.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
X Vehicles with diesel engine: turn the key always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
to position 2 in the ignition lock not simultaneously accelerate.
(Y page 137).
The % preglow indicator lamp in the ! If a warning tone sounds and the
instrument cluster lights up. Release Park. Brake message appears
X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition in the multifunction display, the parking
lock and release it as soon as the engine is brake is still applied. Release the parking
running (Y page 137). brake.
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: you can Depress the accelerator carefully when pull-
ing away.
start the engine without preglow if the
engine is warm. The vehicle locks centrally once you have
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at any
i The Start/Stop button can be used to time.
start the vehicle manually without inserting
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The
feature (Y page 190).
Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in It is only possible to shift the transmission
the vehicle. This mode for starting the from position P to the desired position if you
engine operates independently of the ECO depress the brake pedal. If you do not
start/stop automatic engine start function. depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT
lever can still be moved but the parking lock
remains engaged.
i Upshifts take place at higher engine
speeds after a cold start. This helps the
Driving 141
catalytic converter to reach its operating Important safety notes

temperature more quickly.
G WARNING
Hill start assist If the engine is switched off automatically and
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
Driving and parking

forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It There is a risk of accident and injury.
holds the vehicle for a short time after you
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
This gives you enough time to move your foot
rolling away.
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
roll. General notes
G WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start : ECO start/stop display
assist.
Hybrid vehicles: observe the notes on the
Hill start assist is not active if: ECO start/stop function in the "HYBRID" sup-
plement.
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a
downhill gradient. The ECO start/stop function is activated
whenever you start the engine using the
Rthe transmission is in position N.
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button.
Rthe parking brake is applied.
If the engine has been switched off automat-
RESP® is malfunctioning. ically by the ECO start/stop function, the
¤ symbol is shown in the multifunction
display.
ECO start/stop function AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multi-
Introduction function display additionally shows the Stop/
Start active message.
The ECO start/stop function switches the AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-
is only available in drive program C.
ped under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the Information in the Digital Operator's
driver wants to pull away again. The ECO Manual
start/stop function thereby helps you to
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find
of your vehicle. information on the following topics:
RAutomatic engine switch-off
RAutomatic engine start
RDeactivating or activating the ECO start/
stop function
Z
142 Automatic transmission
Problems with the engine Selector lever (AMG vehicles)

You can find information about this in the Overview of transmission positions
Driving and parking
Automatic transmission
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R, j Park position with parking lock
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do k Reverse gear
not simultaneously accelerate. i Neutral
h Drive
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu- Information in the Digital Operator's
tral position N when you switch off the engine. Manual
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
RTransmission position and drive program
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking display
brake. REngaging park position P
HYBRID vehicles: make sure that you read

the "HYBRID" supplement included in the DIRECT SELECT lever
vehicle literature. Otherwise, you may not
recognize dangers. Overview of transmission positions
j Park position with parking lock

k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
Automatic transmission 143
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the X If the transmission is in position D or R:
steering column. push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to to the first point of resistance.
its original position. The current transmission X If the transmission is in position P: depress
position P, R, N or D appears in the transmis- the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
Driving and parking

sion position display in the multifunction dis- SELECT lever up or down to the first point of
play. You can find information about this in resistance.
the Digital Operator's Manual. If you switch the engine off with the trans-
mission in position R or D, the automatic
Information in the Digital Operator's transmission shifts to N automatically.
Manual
With the SmartKey: if you then open the
In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find driver's door or the front-passenger door or
information on the following topics: remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the
RTransmission position and drive program automatic transmission shifts to P automati-
display cally.
REngaging park position P With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driv-
REngaging park position P automatically er's or front-passenger door, the automatic
transmission shifts to P.
REngaging reverse gear R
REngaging drive position D
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the
vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with
Shifting to neutral N
a towing system:
G WARNING Using the SmartKey:
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, X Switch on the ignition.
they could: X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other depressed.
people or road users. X Shift to neutral N.
Rget out and disrupt traffic. X Release the brake pedal.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. X Release the parking brake.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
motion if, for example, they: Key in the ignition lock.
Rrelease the parking brake. Using KEYLESS-GO:
park position P
ignition lock.
RStart the engine.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Shift to neutral N.
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children. X Release the brake pedal.
Z
144 Automatic transmission
X Release the parking brake. drive program M, you can change gear using
X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart- the steering wheel paddle shifters if the trans-
Key in the ignition lock. mission is in position D. The gear currently
selected and engaged is shown in the multi-
function display.
Driving and parking

Manual Upshifting
In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
information on the following topics: shifter.
RTransmission
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
positions
next gear.
RDrivingtips
RProgram selector button AMG vehicles
RSteering wheel paddle shifters
RAutomatic drive program ! In manual drive program M, the automatic
transmission does not shift up automati-
RProblems with the transmission
cally even when the engine limiting speed
for the current gear is reached. When the
engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel
Manual drive program (AMG vehicles)
supply is cut to prevent the engine from
General information overrevving. Always make sure that the
engine speed does not reach the red area of
In this drive program, you can permanently the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of
change gear yourself by using the steering engine damage.
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must
be in position D.
i In addition to permanent drive program
M, you can also activate temporary drive
program M; see the Digital Operator's Man-
ual.
Switching on the manual drive program : Gear indicator

; Upshift indicator
X Turn the drive program selector
(Y page 144) until M appears in the multi- Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
function display. an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul-
The indicator M on the drive program selec- tifunction display.
tor lights up in red. X When the UP message appears in the mul-
The manual drive program is only available for tifunction display, pull on the right-hand
AMG vehicles. steering wheel paddle shifter.
Manual drive program M is different from
drive programs S and S+ with regard to spon-
taneity, responsiveness and smoothness of
gear changes.
Manual drive program M can be selected
using the drive program selector. In manual
Refueling 145
Shift recommendation ! To prevent ESP® from intervening, the

ignition must be switched off (SmartKey or
the Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) if:
Rthe parking brake is being tested on a
brake dynamometer.
Driving and parking

Rthe vehicle is being towed with only one
axle raised (not permitted for vehicles
with 4MATIC).
The gearshift recommendations assist you in The brake system could otherwise be dam-
adopting an economical driving style. The rec- aged.
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
X If relevant gearshift recommendation :
as doing so will damage the transmission.
appears in the multifunction display on the
instrument cluster, pull on the right-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter (see the Dig- Refueling
ital Operator's Manual).
The automatic transmission shifts to rec- Important safety notes
ommended gear ;.
G WARNING
Information in the Digital Operator's Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
Manual incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion.
In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
information on the following topics: sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
RDownshifting and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
RKickdown refueling.
RSwitching off the manual drive program
G WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
Transfer case There is a risk of injury.
This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- You must make sure that fuel does not come
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans- into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
mitted to both axles. and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
! Performance tests may only be carried If you or others come into contact with fuel,
out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake observe the following:
system or transfer case could otherwise be
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
damaged. Contact a qualified specialist
workshop for a performance test. using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay.
Z
146 Refueling
RIffuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
ing. paintwork.
RImmediately change out of clothing which ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
has come into contact with fuel. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection
Driving and parking
system could be blocked by particles from

G WARNING the fuel can.
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and Do not get into the vehicle again during the
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
explosion. charge could build up again.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged. i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized
by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the
G WARNING inside of the fuel filler flap.
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
Refueling
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
When the engine is running, exhaust system General information
components could overheat without being
noticed. There is a risk of fire. Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 145).
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
with diesel fuel. The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-
matically when you unlock or lock the vehicle
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a with the key or using KEYLESS-GO.
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni- The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
tion if you accidentally refuel with the 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter next to the filling pump indicates the side of
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the the vehicle.
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali- Opening the fuel filler flap
fied specialist workshop and have the fuel
tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with
a diesel engine. Do not switch on the igni-
tion if you accidentally refuel with the
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. The repair
costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist
workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel
lines drained completely. Opening the fuel filler flap (example: Sedan)
: To open the fuel filler flap
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
; To insert the fuel filler cap
fuel system.
Refueling 147
= Tire pressure table tral locking prevents the fuel filler flap from
? Instruction label for fuel type to be refu- closing.
eled If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open,
the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A
X Switch off the engine.
message appears in the multifunction display
Driving and parking

(Y page 191).
lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
X Open the driver's door. Fuel filler flap emergency release
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
The driver’s door can be closed again.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
X Open the fuel filler flap fully.
X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise
and remove it.
X Sedan: insert the fuel filler cap into the
X Sedan: open the trunk lid.
bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap ;.
X Slide down the parcel net.
or
X Open the right-hand side trim panel.
X Wagon: insert the fuel filler cap into the
X Detach the emergency release from
recesses in the fuel filler flap hinge arm
horizontally from above. retainer :.
X Pull the emergency release in the direction
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place of arrow ;.
and refuel. The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
X Open the fuel filler flap.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel
may leak out.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is
designed for refueling at diesel filling pumps.
Closing the fuel filler flap

X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Press the fuel filler flap closed until it X Wagon: open the tailgate.
engages audibly. X Open the right-hand side trim panel.
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the X Fold down the paneling.
vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the cen-
Z
148 Refueling
X Pull emergency release : in the direction

of the arrow.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
X Open the fuel filler flap.
Driving and parking
Refueling 149
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

This section provides descriptions of and solutions to safety-relevant problems. Descriptions
of and solutions to further problems can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Driving and parking

Fuel is leaking from the G WARNING
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as
the SmartKey having been removed.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only) X Add at least 1 gal (3.8 l) of DEF.

X Switch on the ignition for at least 60 sec-
Important notes on use onds.
To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas X Start the engine.
aftertreatment must be operated with the
reducing agent DEF. Adding DEF is one of the i Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified
tasks performed during maintenance. Under specialist workshop.
normal operating conditions, a tank of DEF Use the special DEF refill bottle when adding
lasts until the next service due date. DEF between maintenance intervals. Contact
When the supply of DEF is almost used up, the an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center with
Check Additive See Operator's Manual any questions or, if necessary, contact Road-
message is shown in the multifunction dis- side Assistance (Y page 29).
play. If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡
When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the (Ò11 †) it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is
Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown frozen and there is an active warning indica-
in the multifunction display. tor, it may not be possible to add DEF. Park
If the Remaining Starts: 16 message the vehicle in a warmer place, e.g. in a garage,
appears in the multifunction display, you can until DEF has become fluid again. It will then
start the engine another 16 times. If DEF is be possible to add DEF again. Alternatively,
not refilled, you will subsequently be unable have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified spe-
to start the engine. cialist workshop.
Further information about BlueTEC exhaust
gas aftertreatment and DEF is available at any
Z
150 Refueling
Important notes on topping up residues crystallize after time and contam-

inate the affected surfaces.
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust
gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: ! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be
Rnot poisonous added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to
the fuel tank, this can lead to engine dam-
Driving and parking
Rcolorless and odorless

age.
Rnot flammable
When you open the DEF container, small ! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand-
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. tight. It could otherwise be damaged.
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are The DEF filler neck is under the trunk floor.
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous X Switch the ignition off.
membranes and to the eyes. You may expe- X Open the trunk.
rience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose X Lift up the trunk floor (Y page 248).
and throat. Coughing and watering of the
eyes are possible.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF
tank only in well-ventilated areas.
DEF must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing and must not be swal-
lowed. Keep DEF away from children.
If you or other persons come into contact with
DEF, observe the following:
RRinse DEF from your skin immediately with
soap and water.
RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes, X Turn DEF cap : counter-clockwise and
immediately rinse them thoroughly with remove it.
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay.
RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your
mouth out immediately. Drink plenty of
water. Seek medical assistance without
delay.
RChange out of clothing contaminated with
DEF immediately.
! Only use DEF in accordance with
ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with
DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This
X Turn DEF filler cap ; counter-clockwise
may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-
and open it.
treatment system.
Filler cap ; is secured with a plastic strip.
! Rinse surfaces that have come into con-
tact with DEF immediately with water or
remove DEF using a damp cloth and cold
water. If the DEF has already crystallized,
use a sponge and cold water to clean it. DEF
Parking 151
X Replace DEF cover : as shown and turn it

clockwise as far as it will go.
X Fold the trunk floor down.
X Close the trunk lid.
X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).
Driving and parking

The Check Additive See Operator's
Manual message goes out after approx-
imately one minute.
i If the Check Additive See Opera‐
tor's Manual message continues to be
X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill shown in the multifunction display, add an
bottle =. additional bottle of DEF.
X Set DEF refill bottle = as shown on the For further information on DEF, see
filler neck and screw it clockwise until it is (Y page 341).
hand-tight.
X Press DEF refill bottle = downwards.
The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to
Parking
one minute. Important safety notes
i To top up between service intervals, fill
the DEF tank with approximately 1 gal G WARNING
(3.8 l) of DEF. 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF is equivalent Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
to approximately 2 DEF refill bottles. Then twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
have the DEF supply checked at a qualified hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
specialist workshop and completely refilled gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
if necessary. Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
X Release DEF refill bottle =. rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
When DEF refill bottle = is no longer cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
pressed down, filling stops. DEF refill bottle park on dry grassland or harvested grain
= can be removed when it has been only fields.
partially emptied.
X Turn DEF refill bottle = counter-clockwise
G WARNING
and remove it. If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
X Install DEF filler cap ; on the filler neck
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
and turn it clockwise.
boosting effect. You will require considerably
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Z
152 Parking
G WARNING Information in the Digital Operator's

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- Manual
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: A description of how to switch off the engine
Rrelease the parking brake. can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Driving and parking

parking position P.
Parking brake
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- G WARNING
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of If you must brake the vehicle with the parking
an accident and injury. brake, the braking distance is considerably
When leaving the vehicle, always take the longer and the wheels could lock. There is an
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never increased danger of skidding and accidents.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-
cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not
! Always secure the vehicle correctly apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle wheels lock, release the parking brake until
or its drivetrain could be damaged. the wheels begin turning again.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally: G WARNING
Rthe parking brake must be applied. If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rthe transmission must be in position P and
the SmartKey must be removed from the Rrelease the parking brake.
ignition lock. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
Rthe front wheels must be turned towards parking position P.
the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi- Rstart the engine.
ents. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
Switching off the engine When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Important safety notes SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
If you brake the vehicle with the parking

brake, the brake lamps will not light up.
Driving tips 153
X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. If you make a call while driving, always use
When the engine is running, the $ (USA hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp when the traffic situation permits. If you are
lights up in the instrument cluster. unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
X To release: depress the brake pedal and before operating the telephone.
Driving and parking

keep it depressed. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
X Pull release handle :. (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers
When the ignition is switched on or the a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per
engine is running, the $ (USA only) or second.
J (Canada only) indicator lamp goes out
in the instrument cluster. Drive sensibly – save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
X The tires should always be inflated to the
Parking the vehicle for a long period
recommended tire pressure.
You can find information about this in the X Remove unnecessary loads.
Digital Operator's Manual. X Remove roof racks when they are not nee-
ded.
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
Driving tips
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
General notes X Have all maintenance work carried out as
Important safety notes indicated by the service intervals in the

Maintenance Booklet or by the service
G WARNING interval display.
If you switch off the ignition while driving, Fuel consumption also increases when driv-
safety-relevant functions are only available ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, hilly terrain.
boosting effect. You will require considerably Drinking and driving
of an accident. G WARNING
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
G WARNING Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
If you operate mobile communication equip- affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from ment.
traffic conditions. You could also lose control The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. dent is greatly increased when you drink or
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle take drugs and drive.
is stationary. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
Observe the legal requirements for the coun- ing drugs.
try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-
tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile
phone while driving a vehicle.
Z
154 Driving tips
Emission control Downhill gradients

G WARNING You can find information about this in the
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust Digital Operator's Manual.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There Heavy and light loads
Driving and parking
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave

G WARNING
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation. If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
Certain engine systems are designed to keep increases the stopping distance and can even
the level of poisonous components in exhaust cause the braking system to fail. There is a
fumes within legal limits. risk of an accident.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
they are serviced exactly in accordance with depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
the manufacturer's specifications. For this pedal at the same time.
reason, only have work on the engine carried
out by qualified and authorized Mercedes- Further information can be found in the Digi-
Benz technicians. tal Operator's Manual.
The engine settings must not be changed
Wet roads
under any circumstances. Furthermore, all
specific service work must be carried out at You can find information about this in the
regular intervals and in accordance with the Digital Operator's Manual.
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads
ECO display You can find information about this in the

Digital Operator's Manual. Servicing the brakes
Braking Digital Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes AMG high-performance and ceramic

brakes
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in You can find information about this in the
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Digital Operator's Manual.
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
Driving systems 155
Driving on wet roads has set a milestone on the path towards

autonomous driving.
Information in the Digital Operator's Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all
Manual elements of active and passive safety in one
In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find well thought out system – for the safety of the
Driving and parking

information on the following topics: vehicle occupants and that of other road
users.
RHydroplaning
Further information on driving safety systems
RDriving on flooded roads
(Y page 75).
Winter driving
Cruise Control
G WARNING General notes
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Cruise control maintains a constant road
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
There is an increased danger of skidding and to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
accidents. steep downhill gradients, especially if the
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- vehicle is laden, you must shift to a lower gear
ing on a slippery road surface. in time. By doing so, you will make use of the
braking effect of the engine. This relieves the
G DANGER load on the brake system and prevents the
brakes from overheating and wearing too
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
quickly.
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
fatal injury. store any road speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
window on the side of the vehicle that is not control can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
facing into the wind. dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise
control cannot take into account the road,
Further information can be found in the Digi- traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control
tal Operator's Manual. is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
for braking in good time and for staying in
Driving systems your lane.
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for
innovative driver assistance and safety sys-
tems which enhance comfort and support the
driver in critical situations. With these intelli-
gent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz
Z
156 Driving systems
Do not use cruise control: Information in the Digital Operator's

Rin road and traffic conditions which do not Manual
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find
in heavy traffic or on winding roads information on the following topics:
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
RActivation conditions
Driving and parking
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose

RStoring, maintaining and calling up a speed
traction and the vehicle could then skid
RSetting a speed
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
RDeactivating cruise control
heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
DISTRONIC PLUS
G WARNING
General notes
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the automatically helps you maintain the dis-
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi-
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- cles are detected with the aid of the radar
dent. sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- automatically so that the set speed is not
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you exceeded.
do not know the stored speed, store the Change into a lower gear in good time on long
desired speed again. and steep downhill gradients. This is espe-
cially important if the vehicle is laden. By
Cruise control lever doing so, you will make use of the braking
effect of the engine. This relieves the load on
the brake system and prevents the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk
of a collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre-
vent a collision without your intervention. An
intermittent warning tone will then sound and
the distance warning lamp will light up in the
instrument cluster. Brake immediately in
order to increase the distance to the vehicle
: To activate or increase speed in front or take evasive action provided it is
safe to do so.
; To activate or reduce speed
For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you when driv-
= To deactivate cruise control
ing, the radar sensor system must be
? To activate at the current speed/last switched on and operational; see "Radar sen-
stored speed sor system" in the index.
When you activate cruise control, the stored DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between
speed is shown in the multifunction display 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
for five seconds. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on
roads with steep gradients.
Driving systems 157
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
can resemble the radar detectors of the warnings nor intervene in such situations.
responsible authorities. You can refer to the There is a risk of an accident.
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
questions are asked about this. uation and be ready to brake.
Driving and parking

i USA only: This device has been approved
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". G WARNING
The radar sensor is intended for use in an DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-
automotive radar system only. Removal, tify other road users and complex traffic sit-
tampering, or altering of the device will void uations.
any warranties, and is not permitted by the In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
any non-approved way.
brake the vehicle
Any unauthorized modification to this
Rneither give a warning nor intervene
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment. Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly
i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
subject to the following two conditions: brake, in particular when warned to do so by
DISTRONIC PLUS.
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
G WARNING
2. This device must accept any interference
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
received, including interference that may
to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration.
cause undesired operation of the device.
If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC
Removal, tampering, or altering of the PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is
device will void any warranties, and is not a risk of an accident.
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
in any non-approved way.
try to take evasive action.
device could void the user's authority to ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
operate the equipment. is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
cally in certain situations.
Important safety notes To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-
vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-
G WARNING
tion in the following or other similar situa-
Hybrid vehicles: be sure to read the "HYBRID" tions:
supplement. Otherwise, you could fail to rec-
Rwhen towing the vehicle
ognize dangers.
Rin the car wash
G WARNING If you fail to adapt your driving style,
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk
Rpeople or animals of accident nor override the laws of physics.
Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions.
ped or parked vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are
Roncoming and crossing traffic responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
Z
158 Driving systems
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good Cruise control lever
time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g.
Driving and parking
in heavy traffic or on winding roads

Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow : To store the current speed or a higher
vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or speed
vehicles driving on a different line. ; To store the current speed or a lower
In particular, the detection of obstacles can speed
be impaired if: = To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else ? To store the current speed or call up the
covering the sensors last stored speed
Rthere is snow or heavy rain A To set the specified minimum distance
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
example, in parking garages
Activation conditions
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-
cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-
lowing conditions must be fulfilled:
edly accelerate the vehicle to the stored
speed. Rthe engine must be started. It may take up
This speed may: to two minutes after pulling away before
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane
Rthe parking brake must be released.
or an exit lane
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass
vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive RActive Parking Assist must not be activa-
countries) ted.
Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass Rthe transmission must be in position D.
vehicles driving on the right (right-hand Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
drive countries) shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new fastened.
driver of the speed stored. Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors
must be closed.
Rthe vehicle must not skid.
Driving systems 159
Activating Activating at the current speed/last

stored speed
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
Driving and parking

ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards desired speed again.
you ; or press it up : or down =.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly you ?.
up : or down = until the desired speed is X Remove your foot from the accelerator
set. pedal.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
pedal. time it is activated, the current speed is
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired speed to the previously stored value.
stored speed.
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your
vehicle is stationary as well. Pulling away and driving
X If you want to pull away with
i If you do not fully release the accelerator DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override
the brake pedal.
message appears in the multifunction dis-
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
play. The set distance to a slower-moving
vehicle in front will then not be maintained. you =.
You will be driving at the speed you deter- or
mine by the position of the accelerator X Accelerate briefly.
pedal. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its
You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when speed to that of the vehicle in front.
stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehi-
18 mph (30 km/h). cle accelerates to the set speed.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards i The vehicle can also pull away when it is
you = up : or down ?. facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. on a different line from another vehicle. The
vehicle then brakes automatically. There is
a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at all
times.
Z
160 Driving systems
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted
control. if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. front becomes too small.
Driving and parking
In this way, the distance you have selected is i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
maintained. monitors the left lane on left-hand drive
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicles and the right lane on right-hand
vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. drive vehicles.
However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to
the speed you have stored. Stopping
Selecting the drive program G WARNING

When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving
only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
style when you have selected the S or M (AMG
vehicles: S, S+ or M) driving program Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
(Y page 144). Acceleration behind the vehicle the voltage supply.
in front or to the set speed is then noticeably RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
more dynamic. If you have selected the E or E with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-
+ (AMG vehicles: C) driving program, the vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
cle accelerates more gently. This setting is Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
recommended in stop-and-start traffic. partment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
Selecting the drive program
Rthe battery is disconnected.
DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
style when you have selected the S or M (AMG
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
vehicles: S, S+ or M) driving program
(Y page 144). Acceleration behind the vehicle There is a risk of an accident.
in front or to the set speed is then noticeably If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
more dynamic. If you have selected the E or E DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle
+ (AMG vehicles: C) driving program, the vehi- against rolling away.
cle accelerates more gently. This setting is
recommended in stop-and-start traffic. For further information on deactivating
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 161).
Changing lanes If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it
PLUS supports you when: is stationary.
Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
(70 km/h) stationary and you do not need to depress the
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis-
brake.
tance to a vehicle in front Depending on the specified minimum dis-
Ryou have switched on the corresponding
tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at
turn signal a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in
front. The specified minimum distance is set
RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
using the control on the cruise control lever.
of collision
Driving systems 161
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the i The last speed stored remains stored until
transmission is shifted automatically to posi- you switch off the engine.
tion P if:
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's depress the accelerator pedal.
seat belt is unfastened.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-
Driving and parking

Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
ted if:
matically switched off by the ECO start/
Ryou engage the parking brake
stop function.
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient. Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
Information in the Digital Operator's you in order to pull away and the front-
Manual passenger door or one of the rear doors is
open
Rthe vehicle is skidding
Ryou activate Active Parking Assist
RSettinga speed
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will
RSettingthe specified minimum distance hear a warning tone. You will see the
RDISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru- DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multi-
ment cluster function display for approximately five sec-
onds.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
RCornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
RVehicles traveling on a different line
ROther vehicles changing lanes
RNarrow vehicles
There are several ways to deactivate RObstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS: RCrossing vehicles
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- In such situations, brake if necessary.
wards :. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in
the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
Z
162 Driving systems
Cornering, going into and coming out of a DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-
bend cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle
will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
Driving and parking
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-

cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle
may brake unexpectedly or late.
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the
Vehicles traveling on a different line vehicle in front on the edge of the road,
because of its narrow width. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles

traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lanes DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-
cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals
an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC
PLUS will not brake for these.
Driving systems 163
Crossing vehicles markings (left and right), and only on the vehi-
cle in front if lane markings are missing.
If these conditions are not present, Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide
assistance.
Driving and parking

DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for
the function to be available.
If you fail to adapt your driving style,
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect an accident nor override the laws of physics.
vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat- It cannot take account of road, weather and
ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with
crossing traffic, for example, could cause Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. aid. You are responsible for the distance to
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist braking in good time and for staying in your
and Stop&Go Pilot lane.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
General notes Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traf-
fic conditions. If you are following a vehicle
which is driving towards the edge of the road,
your vehicle could come into contact with the
curb or other road boundaries. Be particularly
aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that
are directly next to your vehicle.
Obstacles such as building site huts on the
lane or projecting out into the lane are not
detected.
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g.
after intentionally driving over a lane marking,
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and can be corrected at any time if you steer
Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle slightly in the opposite direction.
in the center of the driving lane by means of DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
moderate steering interventions in the speed Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your
range from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h). vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering
It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehi-
means of multifunction camera :, at the top cle back to the lane. In such cases, you must
of the windshield. steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it
At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), does not leave the lane.
Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front,
taking into account lane markings, e.g. when
following vehicles in a traffic jam.
At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h)
Steering Assist focuses on detected lane
Z
164 Driving systems
The support provided by the system can be requires the driver to keep his hands on the
impaired if: steering wheel and to steer himself.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
cient illumination of the road, or due to hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
snow, rain, fog or spray period of time, the system will first alert you
Driving and parking
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, with a visual warning. A steering wheel sym-
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road bol appears in the multifunction display. If you
surface is wet) have still not started to steer and have not
taken hold of the steering wheel after five
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
seconds at the latest, a warning tone also
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
sounds to remind you to take control of the
vicinity of the camera
vehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are
Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are
switched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUS
present for one lane, e.g. in a construction remains active.
area
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Pilot
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too X Activate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steer-
small and the lane markings thus cannot be ing Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function using
detected the on-board computer (Y page 190).
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
The DTR+: Steering Assistant On mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are
merge
active.
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road Information in the multifunction display
The system is switched to passive and no lon-
ger assists you by performing steering inter-
ventions if:
Ryou actively change lanes
Ryou switch on the turn signal
Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do
not steer for a prolonged period of time
If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are acti-
i After you have finished changing lanes, vated but not ready for a steering interven-
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are auto- tion, steering wheel symbol : appears in
matically active again. gray. If the system provides you with support
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does not by means of steering interventions, sym-
provide assistance: bol : is shown in green.
Ron very sharp corners Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective Pilot
tire has been detected and displayed. X Deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS with
Pay attention also to the important safety Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function
notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 157). using the on-board computer
The steering interventions are carried out (Y page 190).
with a limited steering moment. The system The DTR+: Steering Assistant Off
Driving systems 165
play. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-
deactivated. vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-
When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not tion in the following or other similar situa-
available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot tions:
are deactivated automatically. Rwhen towing the vehicle
Driving and parking

Rin the car wash
HOLD function Activation conditions

General notes You can activate the HOLD function if:
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the Rthe vehicle is stationary
following situations: Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep matically switched off by the ECO start/
slopes stop function
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt
Rwhen waiting in traffic is fastened

Rthe parking brake is released
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal. Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away. Activating the HOLD function

G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply. X Make sure that the activation conditions
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by are met.
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake X Depress the brake pedal.
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
until ë : appears in the multifunction
partment, the battery or the fuses have display.
been tampered with. The HOLD function is activated. You can
Rthe battery is disconnected release the brake pedal.
i If depressing the brake pedal the first
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
time does not activate the HOLD function,
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
wait briefly and then try again.
against rolling away.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function

is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
Z
166 Driving systems
Deactivating the HOLD function AIRMATIC

The HOLD function is deactivated automati- Vehicle level
cally if:
Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in Important safety notes
position D or R.
Driving and parking
G WARNING
Ryou shift the transmission to position P. When the vehicle is being lowered, people
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a could become trapped if their limbs are
certain amount of pressure until ë dis- between the vehicle body and the wheels or
appears from the multifunction display. underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
injury.
When the HOLD function is activated, the Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
transmission is shifted automatically to posi- in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
tion P if: when the vehicle is being lowered.
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's G WARNING

seat belt is unfastened. Vehicles with level control:
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
The vehicle is slightly lowered if:
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function. Ryou have selected comfort suspension tun-
Ra system malfunction occurs.

ing and
Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
60 seconds of switching off the engine
You and people in the vicinity of the wheel
RACE START arch or the underbody may thus become trap-
ped. There is a risk of injury.
Important safety notes Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
i Observe the safety notes for the SPORT wheel arch or the underbody when you lock
handling mode (Y page 82). the vehicle.
RACE START is intended solely for activation ! The vehicle is lowered by about 15 mm if:
on dedicated race circuits.
Ryou have selected "Comfort tuning"
RACE START enables optimal acceleration
Ryou switch off the engine and then
from a standing start. The precondition for
this is a suitable high-grip road surface. Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately
60 seconds
i RACE START is only available in AMG vehi-
When parking, position your vehicle so that
cles.
it does not make contact with the curb as
the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could
Information in the Digital Operator's otherwise be damaged.
Manual
If you unlock the vehicle within 60 seconds of
In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find having switched the engine off, the vehicle is
information on the following topics: lowered slightly when Comfort suspension
RConditions for activation mode is selected.
RActivating RACE START Your vehicle regulates its height automati-
cally. All-round level control ensures the best
possible suspension and constant ground
Driving systems 167
clearance, even with a laden vehicle. Further Suspension tuning

general information on the vehicle level can
be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. General notes
Setting the vehicle level Digital Operator's Manual.
Select the "Normal" setting for normal road
Driving and parking

surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow
chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-
Your selection remains stored even if you tem
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Setting raised level Manual
RVehiclelevel
RRearaxle level control
RSuspension tuning

G WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
X Start the engine. could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
If indicator lamp : is not lit:
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
X Press the ; button. injury.
Indicator lamp : lights up. The vehicle Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
height is adjusted to raised level. in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
The Vehicle Rising message appears in when the vehicle is being lowered.
the display.
The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: G WARNING
Rdrive at a speed over approximately 75 mph Vehicles with level control:
(120 km/h) The vehicle is slightly lowered if:
Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a Ryou have selected comfort suspension tun-
speed over 50 mph (80 km/h). ing and
The "Raised level" remains active when you Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately
are not driving within these speed ranges. 60 seconds of switching off the engine
You and people in the vicinity of the wheel
Setting the normal level
arch or the underbody may thus become trap-
X Start the engine.
ped. There is a risk of injury.
If indicator lamp : is lit: Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
X Press button ;. wheel arch or the underbody when you lock
Indicator lamp : goes out. The vehicle is the vehicle.
adjusted to normal level.
Z
168 Driving systems
! The vehicle is lowered by about 0.8 in override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot
(20 mm) if: take account of road, weather and traffic con-
Ryou have selected "Comfortable tuning" ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
Ryou switch off the engine and then front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately
Driving and parking
time and for staying in your lane.

60 seconds If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
When parking, position your vehicle so that
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
it does not make contact with the curb as
the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could necessary when pulling away.
otherwise be damaged. RAccelerate less when driving.
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle
Vehicle level raised. This may damage the transfer case.
Damage of this sort is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All
G WARNING wheels must remain either on the ground or
When the vehicle is being lowered, people be fully raised. Observe the instructions for
could become trapped if their limbs are towing the vehicle with all wheels in full
between the vehicle body and the wheels or contact with the ground.
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
injury. effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches chains if necessary.
when the vehicle is being lowered.
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-
The vehicle may be lowered if you press the manently driven. Together with ESP®, it
suspension setting selector button or the improves the traction of your vehicle when-
AMG button. The vehicle also lowers if it is ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient
stationary. grip.
! If Sport or Sport + suspension tuning has
been selected, the vehicle's ground clear- PARKTRONIC
ance decreases. Make sure that no objects
become trapped or that the vehicle does Important safety notes
not become damaged, for example, on the
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
curb.
ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area
i The vehicle level may change visibly at the around your vehicle using six sensors in the
rear axle if you park the vehicle and the front bumper and six sensors in the rear
outside temperature changes. If the tem- bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and
perature drops, the vehicle level lowers; audibly the distance between your vehicle
with an increase in temperature, the vehi- and an object.
cle level rises. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-
ment for your attention to your immediate
surroundings. You are always responsible for
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC ing space. When maneuvering, parking or
can neither reduce the risk of accident nor pulling out of a parking space, make sure that
Driving systems 169
there are no persons, animals or objects in

the area in which you are maneuvering.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such
as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
Driving and parking

PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic side (example)
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause slush. They can otherwise not function cor-
PARKTRONIC to malfunction. rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on care not to scratch or damage them
uneven terrain. (Y page 268).
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when Range
you:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
Rrelease the parking brake
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
Range of the sensors

General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-
sideration that are:
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-
mals or objects.
Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-
ing loads, truck overhangs or loading
ramps.
Example: top view
Z
170 Driving systems
Front sensors can assist you during parking. You may also
use PARKTRONIC (Y page 168).
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm) i The active braking application is only
available on vehicles with automatic trans-
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. mission.
Driving and parking
60 cm)
Rear sensors
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
Center Approx. 48 in (approx. a replacement for your attention to your
120 cm) immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. and exiting a parking space. Make sure that
80 cm) no persons, animals or objects are in the
maneuvering range.
Minimum distance When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active
Parking Assist is also unavailable.
Center Approx. 8 in (approx.
20 cm) G WARNING
If there are objects above the detection range:
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.
15 cm) RActive Park Assist may steer too early
Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these
If there is an obstacle within this range, the objects.

relevant warning displays light up and a warn- You may cause a collision as a result. There is
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below a risk of an accident.
the minimum, the distance may no longer be If there are objects above the detection range,
shown. stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
Information in the Digital Operator's G WARNING

Manual While parking or pulling out of a parking
In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
information on the following topics: onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
result in a collision with another road user.
RWarning displays There is a risk of an accident.
RDeactivating/activatingPARKTRONIC Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
RProblems with PARKTRONIC vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-
ing Assist parking procedure.
Active Parking Assist ! If unavoidable, you should drive over

obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a
General notes sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking the wheels or tires.
aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on
both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol
indicates a suitable parking space. Active
steering intervention and brake application
Driving systems 171
Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate Information in the Digital Operator's
parking spaces which are not suitable for Manual
parking, for example:
Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited information on the following topics:
Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
RDetecting parking spaces
Driving and parking

Ron unsuitable surfaces
RParking
Parking tips: RExiting a parking space
ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- RCanceling Active Parking Assist
ing space as possible.
RParking spaces that are littered or over-
grown might be identified or measured Rear view camera
incorrectly.
General notes
RParking spaces that are partially occupied
by trailer drawbars might not be identified
as such or be measured incorrectly.
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately.
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC
(Y page 170) warning messages during the
parking procedure.
RYou can intervene in the steering procedure
to correct it at any time. Active Parking
Assist will then be canceled.
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes Example: Sedan
from your vehicle, you should not use Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
Active Parking Assist. maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow your vehicle with guidelines in the Audio 20 or
chains are installed. COMAND display.
RMake sure that the tire pressures are The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
always correct. This has a direct influence mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
on the parking characteristics of the vehi-
cle. i The text shown in the Audio 20 or
COMAND display depends on the language
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
setting. The following are examples of rear
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of view camera messages in the COMAND
travel display.
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. Important safety notes
not on the pavement The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your imme-
diate surroundings. You are always responsi-
ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When
maneuvering or parking, make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the area
in which you are maneuvering.
Z
172 Driving systems
Under the following circumstances, the rear ! Objects not at ground level may appear to
view camera will not function, or will function be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
in a limited manner: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rif the trunk lid or tailgate is open Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Driving and parking
Rat night or in very dark places Rthe rear section of an HGV

Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Ra slanted post
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED Use the guidelines only for orientation.
lighting (the display may flicker) Approach objects no further than the bot-
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, tom-most guideline.
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in The rear view camera may show a distorted
winter view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed. not at all. The rear view camera does not show
Observe the notes on cleaning objects in the following positions:
(Y page 268)
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
Runder the rear bumper
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
The field of vision and other functions of the handle

rear view camera may be restricted due to
additional accessories on the rear of the vehi- Activating/deactivating the rear view
cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack). camera
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey
leaving the standard height can result in inac- is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
curacies in the guide lines, depending on X Make sure that the Activation by R
technical conditions. gear function is selected in Audio 20 or
i The rear view camera is protected from COMAND, see the Digital Operator's Man-
raindrops and dust by means of a flap. ual.
When the rear view camera is activated, X Engage reverse gear.
this flap opens. The rear view camera flap opens. The area
The flap closes again when: behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines
in the Audio 20 or COMAND display.
Ryou have finished the maneuvering proc-
ess The image from the rear view camera is
available throughout the maneuvering
Ryou switch off the engine
process.
Ryou open the trunk
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
Observe the notes on cleaning
vates if you shift the transmission to P or after
(Y page 268).
driving forwards a short distance.
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
open briefly after the rear view camera has
been deactivated.
Driving systems 173
Information in the Digital Operator's When the function is active and you shift the
Manual transmission from D or R to N, the dynamic
guidelines are hidden.
information on the following topics: When you change between transmission
positions D and R, you see the previously
RMessages in the Audio 20 or COMAND dis-
Driving and parking

selected front or rear view.
play
Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will
R"Reverse parking" function also be optically displayed:
RWide-angle function
Rin split screen view as red or yellow brack-
ets around the vehicle icon in the top view,
360° camera or
Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brack-
General notes ets around the vehicle symbol in full-screen
The 360° camera is a system consisting of mode
four cameras. The line thickness and color of the brackets
The system analyzes images from the follow- show how far the vehicle is from an object.
ing cameras: Ryellow brackets with thin lines:
PARKTRONIC is active
RRear view camera
Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an
RFront camera
object is present in close range of the vehi-
RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mir- cle
rors Rred line: an object is present in the imme-
The cameras capture the immediate sur- diate close range of the vehicle
roundings of the vehicle. The system sup-
ports you, e.g. when parking or if vision is Important safety notes
restricted at an exit.
You can show pictures from the 360° camera The 360°camera is only an aid and may show
in full-screen mode or in six different split- a distorted view of obstacles, show them
screen views on the COMAND/Audio 20 dis- incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera is
play. A split-screen view also includes a top not a substitute for attentive driving.
view of the vehicle. This view is calculated You are always responsible for safe maneu-
from the data supplied by the installed cam- vering and parking. When maneuvering or
eras (virtual camera). parking, make sure that there are no persons,
The six split-screen views are: animals or objects in the area in which you are
maneuvering.
Rtop view and picture from the rear view
camera (130° viewing angle) You are always responsible for safety, and
must always pay attention to your surround-
Rtop view and image from the front camera
ings when parking and maneuvering. This
(130° viewing angle without displaying the
applies to the areas behind, in front of and
maximum steering wheel angle)
beside the vehicle. You could otherwise
Rtop view and enlarged rear view
endanger yourself and others.
Rtop view and enlarged front view
The 360° camera will not function or will
Rtop view and images from the side mirror function in a limited manner:
cameras (rear wheel view) Rif the doors are open
Rtop view and images from the side mirror
Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in
cameras (front wheel view)
Z
174 Driving systems
Rif the trunk lid/tailgate is open Ra split screen with top view and the
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog image from the front camera or
Rat night or in very dark places Ra split screen with top view and the
Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright image from the rear view camera
light or
Driving and parking
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED X Press the Ø button in the center con-
lighting (the display may flicker) sole.
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, The vehicle menu is displayed.
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in X Select 360° Camera and press 7 to con-
winter firm.
Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered Depending on whether position D or R is
Rif the vehicle components in which the
engaged, the following is shown:
Ra split screen with top view and the
cameras are installed are damaged. In this
event, have the camera position and setting image from the front camera or
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Ra split screen with top view and the
Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You image from the rear view camera
can otherwise injure others or cause damage
to objects or the vehicle. Activating the 360° camera using
Guide lines are always shown at road level. reverse gear
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, The 360° camera images can be automati-
depending on technical conditions, leaving cally displayed by engaging reverse gear.
the standard height can result in: X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
Rinaccuracies in the guide lines 2 in the ignition lock.
Rinaccuracies in the display of generated X Make sure that the Activation by R
images (top view) gear function is selected in COMAND/
Audio 20 (see the separate COMAND/
Activation conditions Audio 20 operating instructions).
X To show the 360° camera image: engage
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
reverse gear.
Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° cam- The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
era COMAND/Audio 20 display in split-screen
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition mode. You see the top view of the vehicle
lock and the image from the rear view camera.
RCOMAND/Audio 20 is switched on
Rthe 360° Camera function is switched on Selecting the split-screen and full
screen displays
Switching on the 360° camera
Switching between split screen views
X Press the Ø button in the center con- X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
sole for longer than two seconds. slide 5 the controller.
Depending on whether position D or R is
X To select one of the vehicle icons: turn
engaged, the following is shown:
3 the controller.
Driving systems 175
X To switch to 180° View: turn 3 the Important safety notes

controller to select 180° View and press
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
7 to confirm.
driver. It might not always recognize fatigue
i The 180° View option is only available in or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
the following views: recognize them at all. The system is not a
Driving and parking

RTop view with picture from the rear view
substitute for a well-rested and attentive
camera driver.
RTop view with picture from the front cam-
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
era restricted and warnings may be delayed or
not occur at all:
Information in the Digital Operator's Rif the length of the journey is less than
Manual approximately 30 minutes
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-
face is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind
RDisplays in the COMAND/Audio 20 display
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
RWide-angle function with high cornering speeds or high rates of
RObject detection acceleration
Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed
Exiting 360° camera display mode below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
The 360° camera display is stopped (200 km/h)
Rif you are driving with the DISTRONIC PLUS
Rwhen you select transmission position P, or
Steering Assist activated
Rwhen you are driving at moderate speeds Rif the time has been set incorrectly
The previous display appears on the Rin active driving situations, such as when
COMAND/Audio 20 display. You can also
you change lanes or change your speed
switch the display by selecting the & sym-
bol in the display and pressing 7 the con- ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con-
troller to confirm. tinue your journey and starts assessing your
tiredness again if:
Ryou switch off the engine
ATTENTION ASSIST Ryou take off your seat belt and open the
General notes driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
to take a break
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. Displaying the attention level
It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to
125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTEN-
TION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fati-
gue or increasing lapses in concentration on
the part of the driver, it suggests taking a
break.
Z
176 Driving systems
You can have current status information dis- Warning in the multifunction display
played in the assistance menu (Y page 190)
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra-
of the on-board computer.
tion are detected, a warning appears in the
X Select the Assistance display for ATTEN- multifunction display: Attention Assist:
TION ASSIST using the on-board computer Take a Break!
Driving and parking
(Y page 190).
In addition to the message shown in the mul-
The following information is displayed: tifunction display, you will then hear a warn-
Rlength of the journey since the last break. ing tone.
Rthe attention level determined by ATTEN- X If necessary, take a break.
TION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in X Confirm the message by pressing the a
five levels from high to low. button on the steering wheel.
Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
the attention level and cannot output a time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
warning, the System Suspended message do not take a break, you will be warned again
appears. The bar display then changes the after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only
display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects
below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lap-
(200 km/h). ses in concentration.
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST

Traffic Sign Assist
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (Y page 190). General notes
The system determines the attention level
of the driver depending on the setting Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum
selected: speed permitted to the driver in the instru-
ment cluster. The data and general traffic reg-
Standard selected: the sensitivity with ulations stored in the navigation system are
which the system determines the attention used to determine the current speed limit.
level is set to normal.
As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system,
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near
higher. The attention level detected by Atten- roadworks) are not detected.
tion Assist is adapted accordingly and the If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle
driver is warned earlier. is passed, the display of the speed limits is
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the updated.
À symbol and OFF appear in the multi- Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an
function display in the assistance display additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are
when the engine is running. also shown.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactiva- The traffic signs are only displayed with the
ted, it is automatically reactivated after the restrictions if:
engine has been stopped. The sensitivity
selected corresponds to the last selection Rthe regulation must be observed with the
activated (standard/sensitive). restriction, or
RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
whether the restriction applies
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
maximum permitted speed from any of the
Driving systems 177
available sources, no speed limit is displayed A maximum permitted speed of 100 mph
in the instrument cluster either. (100 km/h) and a speed limit of 80 km/h
(80 mph) apply with an unknown restriction.
Speed limits in wet conditions
Driving and parking

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-
tries. In this case, symbol : is shown in the
assistance graphic display (Y page 190). : Maximum permitted speed
; Additional signs for wet conditions
A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not (80 km/h) applies in wet conditions and if
always able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic Sign Assist has determined that the
Traffic signs always have priority over the restriction must be observed.
Traffic Sign Assist display.
The system may be either functionally Canceling the speed limit
impaired or temporarily unavailable if the
information in the digital street map of the
navigation system is incorrect or out of date.
Instrument cluster display

Displaying the assistance graphic
X Call up the assistance graphics display The speed limit no longer applies :.
function using the on-board computer
(Y page 190). i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)
depends on the country in which you are
X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.
driving. It is generally neither shown on the
Detected traffic signs are displayed in the
traffic sign nor on the instrument cluster
instrument cluster.
but must be taken into account when
Speed limit with unknown restriction observing the maximum permitted speed.
Lane Tracking package

General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 178) and Lane Keeping
: Maximum permitted speed
Assist (Y page 179).
; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles
for which the restriction in the additional
sign is relevant
= Additional sign for unknown restriction
Z
178 Driving systems
Blind Spot Assist Monitoring range of the sensors

In particular, the detection of obstacles can
General notes
be impaired if:
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
covering the sensors
Driving and parking
vehicle. It supports you from a speed of

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
display in the exterior mirrors draws your rain, snow or spray

attention to vehicles detected in the moni- Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles
tored area. If you then switch on the corre- or bicycles
sponding turn signal to change lanes, you will Rthe road has very wide lanes
also receive an optical and audible collision Rthe road has narrow lanes
warning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
rear bumper for monitoring purposes.
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders
Important safety notes Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
G WARNING indicated.
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to

detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles. Example: Sedan
i USA only: Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft
This device has been approved by the FCC (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.
sensor is intended for use in an automotive If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
radar system only. Removing, tampering lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
with, or altering the device will void any be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
warranties, and is not permitted by the driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in the case if there are vehicles driving at the
any non-approved way. inner edge of their lanes.
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Driving systems 179
Due to the nature of the system: always emitted when a vehicle enters the
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- blind spot monitoring range from behind or
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
lane borders. the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
Driving and parking

extended period next to long vehicles, such The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
as trucks. gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot
Assist is no longer active.
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
are integrated into the sides of the rear The brightness of the indicator or warning
bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of lamps is adjusted automatically according to
dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. the ambient light.
The sensors must not be covered, for exam- Information in the Digital Operator's Man-
ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol- ual
lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-
In the Digital Operator's Manual you can find
age to the bumpers, have the function of the
information about:
sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise RCollision warning
not work properly. RSwitching on Blind Spot Assist
Indicator and warning display
Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
: Indicator lamp (yellow)

Warning lamp (red)
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in front of your vehicle with camera :, which is
the monitoring range are then not indicated. mounted at the top of the windshield. Active
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yel- the road and can warn you before you leave
low at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At your lane unintentionally.
speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica- This function is available in the range between
tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
operational. 200 km/h).
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot A warning may be given if a front wheel
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corre- means of intermittent vibration in the steer-
sponding side lights up red. This warning is ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Z
180 Driving systems
Important safety notes Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
G WARNING covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
recognize lane markings. small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
Driving and parking
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.

Rgive an unnecessary warning lanes branch off, cross one another or
Rnot give a warning merge
There is a risk of an accident. Rthe road is narrow and winding
Always pay particular attention to the traffic Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
situation and stay in lane, in particular if
warned by Lane Keeping Assist. Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
G WARNING Digital Operator's Manual.
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
a risk of an accident. Active Driving Assistance package
You should always steer, brake or accelerate General notes
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-
ing Assist. The Active Driving Assistance package con-
sists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 156), Active
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Blind Spot Assist (Y page 180) and Active
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 183).
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account Active Blind Spot Assist
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane
Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are General notes
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good system, pointed toward the rear of the vehi-
time and for staying in your lane. cle, to monitor the area to the sides of the
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A
vehicle in the lane. warning display in the exterior mirrors draws
The system may be impaired or may not func- your attention to vehicles detected in the
tion if: monitored area. If you then switch on the cor-
responding turn signal to change lanes, you
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- will also receive a visual and audible collision
cient illumination of the road, or due to warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detec-
snow, rain, fog or spray ted, corrective braking may help you avoid a
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, collision. Before a course-correcting brake
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road application, Active Blind Spot Assist evalu-
surface is wet) ates the space in the direction of travel and at
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar
vicinity of the camera sensors.
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark- Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con- speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
struction work
Driving systems 181
Important safety notes Radar sensors

Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
not a substitute for attentive driving. integrated into the front and rear bumpers
and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make
G WARNING sure that the bumpers and the cover in the
Driving and parking

Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, rear sensors must not be covered, for exam-
placing them in the blind spot area ple by cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Fol-
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-
differential and overtake your vehicle age to the bumpers, have the function of the
radar sensors checked at a qualified special-
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-
ist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-
otherwise no longer work properly.
uations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care- Monitoring area
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
G WARNING
i USA only: Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
traffic situations and road users. There is a
This device has been approved by the FCC
risk of an accident.
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-
radar system only. Removing, tampering tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
with, or altering the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
device could void the user’s authority to
i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the Example: Sedan
device will void any warranties, and is not
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and
in any non-approved way.
directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the
Any unauthorized modification to this diagram.
device could void the user's authority to
Z
182 Driving systems
The detection of obstacles can be impaired in (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and
the case of: Active Blind Spot Assist is operational.
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
covering the sensors monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corre-
Driving and parking
spray sponding side lights up red. This warning is

always given when a vehicle enters the blind
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
spot monitoring range from behind or from
indicated or indicated with a delay.
the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar- warning only occurs if the difference in speed
row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicy- is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
cles, or may only detect them too late.
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may not operational.
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
matically adapted to the brightness of the
the case if there are vehicles at the edge of
surroundings.
their lane.
Due to the nature of the system: Visual and acoustic collision warning
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- If you switch on the turn signals to change
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side
lane borders. monitoring range, you receive a visual and
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
acoustic collision warning. You then hear a
double warning tone and red warning lamp :
extended period next to long vehicles, such
flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detec-
as trucks.
ted vehicles are indicated by the flashing of
Warning display red warning lamp :. There are no further
warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
lateral collision in the monitoring range, a
course-correcting brake application is carried
out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a
collision.
G WARNING
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an
: Warning display accident.
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
speeds below approximately 20 mph especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range you or makes a course-correcting brake appli-
are then not indicated. cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, sides.
indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights
up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph
(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph
Driving systems 183
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds.
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
Driving and parking

RESP® is switched off.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Information in the Digital Operator's Man-
ual
RSwitching on Active Blind Spot Assist
Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes
Example: Sedan
If a course-correcting brake application
occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the
exterior mirror and a dual warning tone
sounds. In addition, display ; appears in the
multifunction display underlining the danger
of a side collision.
In very rare cases, the system may make an
inappropriate brake application. An inappro- Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area
priate course-correcting brake application in front of your vehicle by means of multi-
may be interrupted at any time if you steer function camera : at the top of the wind-
slightly in the opposite direction or acceler- shield. Various different areas to the front,
ate, for example. rear and side of your vehicle are also moni-
tored with the aid of the radar sensor system.
The course-correcting brake application is
Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
available in the speed range between 20 mph
markings on the road and can warn you
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
before you leave your lane unintentionally. If
Either no braking application, or a course- you do not react to the warning, a lane-cor-
correcting brake application adapted to the recting application of the brakes can bring the
driving situation occurs if: vehicle back into the original lane.
Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash This function is available in the range between
barriers, located on both sides of your vehi- 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
cle. 200 km/h).
Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
side.
Z
184 Driving systems
For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bump-
when driving, the radar sensor system must ers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g.
be operational obscured by snow
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-
ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active
Driving and parking
struction work
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
risk of accident nor override the laws of phys-
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
ics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
account of road and weather conditions. It
may not recognize traffic situations. Active small and the lane markings thus cannot be
Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are detected
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good lanes branch off, cross one another or
time and for staying in your lane. merge
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continu- Rthe road is narrow and winding
ously keep your vehicle in its lane. Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
G WARNING If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane

and broken lane markings are detected, no
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
lane-correcting brake application is made.
clearly detect lane markings.
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist Warning vibration in the steering wheel
can: A warning may be given if a front wheel
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by
make a course-correcting brake application means of intermittent vibration in the steer-
to the vehicle ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Rnot give a warning or intervene Lane-correcting brake application
G WARNING
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
situation and keep within the lane, especially
always bring the vehicle back into the original
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-
ing situation. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
The system may be impaired or may not func- you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-
tion if: cation.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
G WARNING
cient illumination of the road, or due to
snow, rain, fog or spray Active Lane Keeping Assist only detects traf-
fic conditions or road users to a limited
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
extent. In very rare cases, the system may
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
make an inappropriate brake application, e.g.
surface is wet)
after intentionally driving over a solid lane
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
marking. There is a risk of an accident.
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
An inappropriate brake application may be
vicinity of the camera
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
the opposite direction. Always make sure that
Driving systems 185
there is sufficient distance on the side for Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
other traffic or obstacles. high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration.
Ryou have switched on the turn signals.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
Driving and parking

ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
RESP® is switched off.
Rthe transmission is not in position D.
Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane in
which you are driving.
Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective
tire has been detected and displayed.
Example: Sedan
There is a possibility that the Active Lane
If you leave your lane, under certain circum- Keeping Assist could misjudge the given traf-
stances the vehicle will brake briefly on one fic situation. An inappropriate brake applica-
side. This is meant to assist you in bringing tion may be interrupted at any time if you:
the vehicle back to the original lane.
Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
Rswitch on the turn signal
display : appears in the multifunction dis-
play. Rclearly brake or accelerate
A lane-correcting brake application can be A lane-correcting brake application is inter-

made after driving over a lane marking rec- rupted automatically if:
ognize as being solid or broken. Before this, a Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
warning must be given by means of intermit- ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
tent vibration in the steering wheel. In addi- Spot Assist.
tion, a lane with lane markings on both sides Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.
must be recognized.
In the case of a broken lane marking being Information in the Digital Operator's Man-
detected, a lane-correcting brake application ual
can only be made if a vehicle has been detec- In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find
ted in the adjacent lane. The following vehi- information on the following topics:
cles can have an influence on brake applica- RSwitching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
tion: oncoming traffic, vehicles that are over-
taking and vehicles that are driving parallel to
your vehicle.
i A further lane-correcting brake applica-
tion can only occur after your vehicle has
returned to the original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs
if:
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or
accelerate.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Z
186
187
On-board computer and displays

Important safety notes ..................... 188
Displays and operation .................... 188
Menus and submenus ...................... 190
Display messages ............................. 191
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 202
188 Displays and operation
Useful information sure your vehicle is operating safely at all

times.
i This Operator's Manual describes all If the operating safety of your vehicle is
models and all standard and optional equip- impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do
ment of your vehicle available at the time of so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
publication of the Operator's Manual. Hybrid vehicles: always read the HYBRID
Country-specific differences are possible. operating instructions. You could otherwise
Please note that your vehicle may not be fail to recognize dangers e.g. due to high volt-
equipped with all features described. This age.
also applies to safety-related systems and For an overview, see the instrument panel
functions. illustration (Y page 37).
Displays and operation
Important safety notes Manual
G WARNING In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- RCoolant temperature display
cle while driving, you will be distracted from RTachometer
traffic conditions. You could also lose control RSpeedometer with segments
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. RMultifunction
display
Only operate the equipment when the traffic ROutside temperature display
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for

the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer.
G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
functioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The
operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
The on-board computer only shows messages

or warnings from certain systems in the mul-
tifunction display. You should therefore make
Displays and operation 189
Operating the on-board computer Left control panel

Overview = RCalls up the menu and menu bar
;
9 Press briefly:
: RScrolls in lists
RSelects a submenu or function
RVehicles with Audio 20: in the
Audio menu, selects the previ-
ous or next stored station, when
the preset list or station list is
active, or an audio track
RVehicles with COMAND: in the
Audio menu, selects the previ-
ous or next station, when the
preset list or station list is active,
or an audio track or video scene
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
: Multifunction display
switches to the phone book and
= Right control panel selects a name or telephone
? Left control panel number
A Back button
9 Press and hold:
X To activate the on-board computer: turn
: RVehicles with Audio 20: in the
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock. Audio menu, selects the previ-
ous or next station, when the
You can control the multifunction display and preset list or station list is active,
the settings in the on-board computer using selects an audio track using
the buttons on the multifunction steering rapid scrolling, or selects a video
wheel. scene
RVehicles with COMAND: in the
Audio menu, selects a preset list
or station list in the desired fre-
quency range or an audio track
or video scene using rapid scroll-
ing
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open
a RConfirms the selection or display
message
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
Z
190 Menus and submenus
Right control panel You can find more information on the individ-
ual menus in the Digital Operator's Manual.

~ RRejectsor ends a call Depending on the equipment installed in the
RExits
the telephone book/redial vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
memory RTrip menu
6 RMakes or accepts a call RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
RSwitches to the redial memory RAudio menu
RTel menu (telephone)
W RAdjusts the volume
X RDriveAssist menu (assistance)
RServ. menu
8 RMute
RSett. menu (settings)
RAMG menu in AMG vehicles
Back button
% Press briefly:
RBack
RVehicles with Audio 20:
Switches off voice-operated con-
trol for navigation (see manufac-
turer's operating instructions)
RVehicles with COMAND:
Switches off the Voice Control
System (see the separate oper-
ating instructions)
RHides display messages or calls
up the last Trip menu function
used
RExits the telephone book/redial
memory
% Press and hold:
RCalls up the standard display in
the Trip menu
Menus and submenus

Menu overview
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to call up the menu bar and select a
menu.
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 189).
Display messages 191
Display messages

Introduction
General notes
This section describes display messages relevant to safety together with their solutions. A
description of other messages and their solutions can be found in the Digital Operator's Man-
ual.
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function
(Y page 165) and parking (Y page 151).
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-
play messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-
sages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call
up the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Z
192 Display messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-

gram), BAS (Brake Assist System), the HOLD function, PRE‑SAFE®
Currently Unavail‐ and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.
able See Opera‐
tor's Manual BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION
ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also
have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, PRE‑SAFE® and hill start
assist are not available due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION
Operator's Manual
have failed.
The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
G WARNING

increase.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, PRE‑SAFE® and hill start assist are
not available due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION
Operator's Manual
have failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
Z

T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, the

HOLD function, PRE-SAFE® and hill start assist are not available
÷ due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION
Operator's Manual ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also
have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
increase.
$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning
only)J(Canada lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
only) sounds.
Check Brake Fluid G WARNING
Level
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 151).
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

6 The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights
up in the instrument cluster.
SRS. Malfunction
Service Required G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Observe the additional information on restraint systems

(Y page 48).
6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or

right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
Front Left Malfunc‐ ter.
tion Service
Required or Front G WARNING
Right Malfunction The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
Service Required gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or

right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
Rear Left Malfunc‐ ter.
tion Service
Required or Rear G WARNING
Right Malfunction The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
Service Required gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear center. The

6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Center Mal‐
function Service G WARNING
Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
Z

6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-

tain air bag.
Left Side Curtain The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required G WARNING
or Right Side Cur‐ The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered
tain Airbag Mal‐ unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-
function Service gered.
Required

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, even
Airbag Disabled though:
See Operator's Man‐ Ran adult
ual or
Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger
seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-
pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the fol-
lowing:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light
up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled
the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 58)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐
ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the
multifunction display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
Z

Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 58).
Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even
Airbag Enabled though:
See Operator's Man‐ Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-
ual tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional
weight on the seat.
G WARNING
The air bag may deploy unintentionally.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the fol-
lowing:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Clas-
sification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag
(Y page 58)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐
ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the
multifunction display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 58).
Engine
? The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other-
wise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Z
Tires

Check The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
Tires The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 271).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 294).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Warning The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
Tire Malfunction wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
Vehicle

Risk of Rolling The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the selector lever
Away is in position R, N or D.
Vehicle Not in 'P' A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
X Shift the selector lever to position P.
X Close the driver's door completely.
A Wagon: the tailgate is open.

G WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
X Close the tailgate.
M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.

Power Steering Mal‐
function See Oper‐ G WARNING
ator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Z
202 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notes
This section describes indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster relevant to safety
and solutions. A description of other indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and
their solutions can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some
indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.
These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after
starting the engine or whilst driving.
Safety
Seat belts

ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
After starting the to fasten their seat belts.
engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).
belt warning lamp lights
up for 6 seconds.
ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).
engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases.
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a warn-
ing tone sounds for up
to 6 seconds.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).
ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out.
the engine starts, as
soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
door is closed. them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 203

ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The
The red seat belt warn- vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly
ing lamp flashes and an been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).
warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being

driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
Z
Safety systems

$ (USA only) G WARNING
J (Canada only) The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking char-
The red brake system acteristics may be affected.
warning lamp comes on There is a risk of an accident.
while the engine is run-
ning. A warning tone
also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
$ (USA only) G WARNING

J (Canada only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
The red brake system The braking effect may be impaired.
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is run-
ning. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal-
function.
display.

! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc-
The yellow ABS warning tion. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist System), BAS PLUS with Cross-
lamp is lit while the Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Elec-
engine is running. tronic Stability Program), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS,
PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for
example, are also deactivated.
G WARNING
increase.
display.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-
mission, will not be available.
Z

! EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,

The yellow ABS warning BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION
lamp is lit while the ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®
engine is running. A Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also
warning tone also unavailable.
sounds. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
increase.
display.
$ (USA only) ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,
J (Canada only) BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVEN-
÷å! TION ASSIST PLUS, EBD, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS,
The red brake warning PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for
lamp, the yellow ESP® example, are also unavailable.
and ESP® OFF warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
lamps and the yellow G WARNING
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
running. functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
increase.
display.

÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of
The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
the vehicle is in motion. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 81) it may be best to deactivate ESP®.

Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 81).
å ESP® is deactivated.
®
The yellow ESP OFF G WARNING
warning lamp is lit while
® ®
the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restric-
ted, e.g. Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform
braking actions.
X Reactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 81) it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 81).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
M SPORT handling mode is activated.

AMG vehicles only: G WARNING
The yellow SPORT han-
dling mode warning When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to
lamp is lit while the stabilize the vehicle.
engine is running. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the
conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating SPORT
handling mode" section (Y page 82).
Z

÷å ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PRE-

The yellow ESP® and VENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS,
ESP® OFF warning PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
lamps are lit while the unavailable due to a malfunction.
engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
display.
6 The restraint system is faulty.

The red restraint sys- G WARNING
tem warning lamp is lit
while the engine is run- The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
ning. gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
display.
X Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualified
Observe the additional information on restraint systems
(Y page 48).
Engine

? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The air-
The red coolant warn- flow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may
ing lamp comes on be too low.
while the engine is run- G WARNING
ning. A warning tone
also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 265).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
Z
Driving systems

· You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obsta-
The red distance warn- cle in your line of travel at too high a speed.
ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately.
the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
A warning tone also brake or take evasive action.
sounds.
Observe the additional information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake
(Y page 84).
Observe the additional information on the distance warning func-
tion of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 78).
Tires

h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires.
monitor warning lamp G WARNING
(pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit. With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
display.
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 294).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
h The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

The yellow tire pressure G WARNING
monitor warning lamp
(pressure loss/ The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire
malfunction) flashes for pressure.
approximately one There is a risk of an accident.
minute and then X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
remains lit. display.
Z
212
213
General notes .................................... 214

Function restrictions ........................ 215
Audio 20/COMAND operating sys-
tem ..................................................... 216
Audio 20/COMAND
214 Important safety notes
General notes Audio 20/COMAND calculates the route to

the destination without taking account of the
The Audio 20/COMAND section in these following, for example:
operating instructions describes the basic Rtraffic lights
operating principles. More information can be Rstop and yield signs
found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Rmerging lanes
Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no
Important safety notes stopping zone

Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
Audio 20/COMAND
G WARNING Rnarrow bridges
Modifications to electronic components, their Audio 20/COMAND can give incorrect navi-
software as well as wiring can impair their gation commands if the actual street/traffic
function and/or the function of other net- situation does not correspond with the digital
worked components. In particular, systems map's data. Digital maps do not cover all
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a areas nor all routes in an area. For example, a
result, these may no longer function as inten- route may have been diverted or the direction
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of of a one-way street may have changed.
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an For this reason, you must always observe
accident and injury. road and traffic rules and regulations during
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg-
tronic components or their software. You ulations always have priority over the sys-
should have all work to electrical and elec- tem's driving recommendations.
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified Navigation announcements are intended to
specialist workshop. direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-
Please always use this feature instead of con-
tronics, the general operating permit is ren-
sulting the map display for directions. Look-
dered invalid.
ing at the icons or map display can distract
G WARNING you from traffic conditions and driving, and
If you operate information systems and com- increase the risk of an accident.
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
cle while driving, you will be distracted from (approximately 50 km/h) your vehicle covers
traffic conditions. You could also lose control a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. per second.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic This equipment complies with FCC radiation
situation permits. If you are not sure that this exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention equipment and meets the FCC radio fre-
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supple-
ment when the vehicle is stationary. ment C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF
You must observe the legal requirements for energy that is deemed to comply without
the country in which you are currently driving maximum permissive exposure evaluation
when operating Audio 20/COMAND. (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be
installed and operated with at least 8 inches
(20 cm) and more between the radiator and a
Function restrictions 215
person's body (excluding extremities: hands,

wrists, feet and legs.)
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are

restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in
motion. You will notice this, for example,
because either you will not be able to select
certain menu items or a message will appear
Audio 20/COMAND
to this effect.
Z
216 Audio 20/COMAND operating system
Audio 20/COMAND operating system

Overview
Components
Audio 20/COMAND
: Display for Audio 20/COMAND

; Audio 20/COMAND control panel
= Controller and buttons
Audio 20/COMAND consists of:
Rthe display
Rthe control panel with a single drive or DVD changer
Rthe controller and buttons
Ra slot for an SD card
Rtwo connection options for USB or Media Interface in the center console
An iPod® is connected via USB cable.
Functions Interface (e.g. iPod®), SD card, Bluetooth

RHD FM radio/HD AM radio/satellite audio
radio If the Media Interface is available, an
RMedia iPod® can be connected directly to the
USB.
- COMAND media support: audio CD, MP3
- Music search using all media
CD, DVD video, two connection options
for USB or Media Interface (e.g. iPod®), RSound system
SD card, Bluetooth audio

Audio 20 media support: if a single drive
is available, audio CD and MP3 CD, two
connection options for USB or Media
Audio 20/COMAND operating system 217
You can select from the following sound and the track of tropical cyclones (hurri-
systems: canes, tornadoes)
- harman/kardon® Logic7® surround RVehicle functions
sound system - Vehicle settings, e.g. fuel consumption
- Bang & Olufsen BeoSound AMG sound - 360° camera
system (COMAND) - Rear view camera
RNavigation system - Seat functions
- Navigation via the hard drive (COMAND) RFavorites button (if available)
- Navigation via an SD card (if available for
Fast access to favorites functions using the
Audio 20)
Audio 20/COMAND
favorites button on the controller
- Destination entry, e.g. using keyword
search (COMAND) Display
- Realistic 3D map with textured city mod-
els General notes
- Personal POIs and routes using SD mem- ! Do not use the space in front of the dis-
ory card (COMAND) play for storage. Objects placed here could
- Navigation functions, e.g. compass dis- damage the display or impair its function.
play (COMAND) Avoid any direct contact with the display
surface. Pressure on the display surface
- Dynamic route guidance with traffic
may result in impairments to the display,
reports via SIRIUS satellite radio
which could be irreversible.
(COMAND)
RCommunication Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair
your ability to read the display.
- Messaging functions: text messages, e-
mail (COMAND) The display has an automatic temperature-
controlled switch-off feature. The brightness
- Address book (COMAND)
is automatically reduced if the temperature is
- Internet browser (COMAND)
too high. The display may then temporarily
- Mercedes-Benz Apps with Google™, switch off completely.
Local Search, Destination/Route down-
load, Facebook, Google Street View™, Overview
stock prices, news and much more
- Mercedes-Benz mobile website
- WiFi interface for the connection of a
smartphone to COMAND
- WiFi hotspot functionality to connect a
tablet PC or notebook in order to enable
access to the Internet using the custom-
er's mobile phone (COMAND)
RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
- Weather data as an information chart
The example shows the display in SD memory
(current forecast, 5-day preview,
card mode in COMAND.
detailed information)
- Weather data on the weather map, e.g.
In the status bar at the top you will see the
time and other displays, depending on the
rain radar data, storm characteristics
settings.
Z
Below it you will see the main display field.

The climate control status display is briefly
displayed when you operate the climate con-
trol system.
Cleaning instructions
! Do not touch the display. The display has
a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is
a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
Audio 20/COMAND
The display must be switched off and have

cooled down before you start cleaning. Clean
the display screen, when necessary, with a
commercially available microfiber cloth and
cleaning agent for TFT/LCD displays. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible
damage to the display. Then, dry the surface
with a dry microfiber cloth.
Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or
abrasive cleaning agents. These could dam-
age the display surface.
COMAND control panel
Audio 20/COMAND
: Switches to radio mode 234 B Clear button 222
Calls up the Radio menu 235 • Deletes characters
; Switches to the last selec- • Deletes an entry
ted media mode ~ C Selects the next station
Calls up the Media menu ~ from the station list ~
= Inserts and removes a CD/ Skips forwards to a track ~
DVD from the single drive Fast forward ~
(COMAND, Audio 20) ~ D Number pad ~
Inserts a CD/DVD into the • Saves a station ~
DVD changer (COMAND) ~
• Mobile phone authoriza-
Removes a CD/DVD from tion ~
the DVD changer
• Telephone number entry ~
(COMAND) ~
• Searches for a contact ~
? Selects the previous station • Character entry ~
from the station list ~
z Display of the current
Skips backwards to a track ~ track being played (if track
Rewinds ~ information is supported
for the data carrier) ~
A Loads/ejects the CD/DVD
g Selects stations by
8 Single disc drive
entering the frequency
(Audio 20, COMAND) ~
manually ~
V DVD changer
g Selects a track ~
(COMAND) ~
Z

E Switches Audio 20/ I Switches the sound on or
COMAND on/off ~ off ~
Adjusts the volume ~ Switches navigation
announcements off
F Inserts/removes an SD (COMAND) ~
memory card ~
J Switches to navigation
G Accepts a call 190 mode 225
Makes a call 232 Calls up the navigation sys-
Audio 20/COMAND
Redial ~ tem menu ~

Accepts a new call when a
call is being made (call wait- K Calls up the telephone
ing) ~ menu ~
H Rejects a call 232 L Calls up vehicle settings ~

Ends an active call 232
Audio 20 control panel
Audio 20/COMAND
: Switches to radio mode 234 D Number pad
Calls up the Radio menu 235 • Saves a station ~
; Switches to the last selec- • Authorizes (connects) a
ted media mode ~ mobile phone ~
Calls up the Media menu ~ • Telephone number entry ~
• Searches for a contact ~
= Inserts and removes a CD g Selects stations by
from the single drive (if sin- entering the frequency
gle drive available) ~ manually ~
? Selects the previous station g Selects a track ~
from the station list ~
E Switches Audio 20 on/off ~
Skips backwards to a track ~
Adjusts the volume ~
A Loads/ejects CDs (if but-
F Inserts/removes an SD
ton available)
memory card ~
8 Single drive ~
G Accepts a call 190
B Clear button 222
Makes a call 232
• Deletes characters
Redial ~
• Deletes an entry
Accepts a new call when a
C Selects the next station call is being made (call wait-
from the station list ~ ing) ~
Skips forwards to a track ~ H Rejects a call ~
Ends an active call ~
Z

I Switches the sound on or K Calls up the telephone
off ~ menu ~
Switches off navigation L Calls up vehicle settings ~
announcements ~
J Calls up the sound menu ~
Switches to navigation
mode ~
Audio 20/COMAND
Buttons and controller Rslidforwards or back 4

Rsliddiagonally 2
Overview
Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7
Back button
You can use the % button to exit a menu or
to call up the basic display of the current
operating mode.
X To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
Audio 20/COMAND changes to the next
higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
: Clear button X To call up the basic display: press the
; Switches the display on/off % button for longer than two seconds.
= Favorites button (if available) Audio 20/COMAND changes to the basic
display of the current operating mode.
? Back button
A Controller Clear button
Instead of the display on/off button, the vehi- X To delete individual characters: briefly
cle may be equipped with the seat function press the $ button on the control panel.
button. or
AMG vehicles: the controller is equipped with X Briefly press the j clear button on the
buttons : and ?. controller.
Controller X To delete an entire entry: press and hold
The controller in the center console lets you: the $ button on the control panel.
or
Rselect menu items on the display
X Press and hold the j clear button on the
Renter characters controller.
Rselect a destination on the map
Rsave entries Favorites button
The controller can be: You can assign predefined functions using
Rturned
the g favorites button and call them up by
3
pressing the button.
Rslid left or right 1
Display off button Adding favorites

You can switch the display on and off with the
Adding predefined favorites
_ button.
X Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
Favorites X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
Overview of favorites
X To select Reassign: turn and press the
controller.
The categories for the available favorites
Audio 20/COMAND
are displayed.
RNavigation
REntertainment
RTel
RVehicle
X To select a category: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
: To add a new favorite (Y page 223) The corresponding favorites are displayed.
; To rename a selected favorite X To select the desired favorite: turn and
(Y page 224) press the controller.
= To move a selected favorite X To store the favorite in the desired order:
(Y page 224) turn and press the controller.
? To delete a selected favorite The favorite has been added.
(Y page 224) If a favorite is stored over another favorite,
Displaying the favorites overview the favorite underneath is deleted.
X Press the favorites button on the controller. Adding your own favorites
The favorites are displayed. You can store phone numbers from the phone
X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con- book, radio stations, preferred media or nav-
troller. igation locations as favorites.
You can manage a total of 20 favorites. You can store phone numbers from the phone
Further information on how to select and dis- book, preferred media or radio stations as
play a favorite (Y page 223). favorites.
A phone number from the phone book is used
Displaying and selecting favorites as an example.
X To store the phone number as a favorite:
press and hold the favorites button on the
controller until the favorites are displayed.
X To select a favorite: turn the controller.
X To store the favorite in the desired order:
X To call up a favorite: press the controller.
turn and press the controller.
The favorite has been added.
If a favorite is stored over another favorite,
the favorite underneath is deleted.
Z
Renaming favorites X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-

troller.
X To select Delete: turn and press the con-
troller.
X To select the favorite to be renamed: turn
X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
the controller.
The favorite is deleted.
X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller. or
X To select No: turn and press the controller.
X To select Rename: turn and press the con-
troller. The process is canceled.
Audio 20/COMAND
X To finish the entry: select OK.

The favorite has been renamed.
Vehicle settings
Moving favorites Calling up vehicle settings
X Press the Ø button.
or
X Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X To select Vehicle Settings: turn and
press the controller.
The Vehicle Settings menu is active.
X To select the desired vehicle setting: turn
and press the controller.
The main area with the setting element is
X Press the favorites button on the controller. active.
X To select the favorite to be moved: turn the Selecting a different vehicle setting:
controller. X To activate the menu for selecting the vehi-
X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con- cle setting: slide 5 the controller.
troller. Exiting the vehicle settings:
X To select Move: turn and press the control-
X To select & in the display: slide 6 and
ler.
X To store the favorite in the desired order:
turn and press the controller.
The favorite has been moved.
Navigation
If a favorite is stored over another favorite,
the favorite underneath is deleted. Introduction
Deleting favorites
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
X To select the favorite to be deleted: turn the
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
controller. traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic Destination entry options
situation permits. If you are not sure that this Destination entry may be blocked while driv-
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention ing, depending on the country specifications.
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
Address input
Keyword search using fragments of words
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving From the list of last destinations (up to 50
when operating the navigation system. destinations)
General notes Selecting a contact from the address book
Audio 20/COMAND
Audio 20 is equipped with MARGIN® MAP (contact with navigation data L)
PILOT (see the manufacturer's operating Selecting a POI (e.g. gas station, restau-
instructions). rant) for different positions
Further information on navigation using
COMAND can be found in the Digital Opera- On the map
tor's Manual. Entering intermediate destinations
Among other things, correct functioning of
the navigation system depends on GPS recep- From Mercedes-Benz Apps
tion. In certain situations, GPS reception may Requirement (USA): mbrace is activated for
be impaired, there may be interference or the Mercedes-Benz Apps.
there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tun- Requirement (Canada): a mobile phone is
nels or parking garages. connected via Bluetooth® or USB with
At vehicle speeds of above 5 km/h, data COMAND.
entries are restricted.
Entering geo-coordinates
i The functionality of a roof antenna (tele-
phone, GPS) may be impaired if roof carri- Example: address entry
ers are used.
Switching to navigation mode
XPress the ß button.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
Showing/hiding the menu

X To show: slide 6 the controller when the
map appears.
X To hide: press the % button.
X Show the menu (Y page 225).
X To select Destination: turn and press the
Destination entry controller.
General notes X Select Address Entry.
The information given relating to destination X Enter the address, e.g. as a city, street and
entry applies to COMAND. For information on house number.

Audio 20, see the manufacturer's operating
instructions.
Z
Calculating the route on the right. Lane recommendations (white

X To confirm Start: press the controller. directional arrows) may be shown at the bot-
The route is calculated with the current tom of the display for multilane roads.
route type. Navigation announcements
Selecting a route type X To adjust the volume: during a navigation
announcement, turn the o control knob.
X To switch off: during a navigation
X To select Settings: turn and press the
announcement, press the 8 button on
controller.
the COMAND control panel.
X Select Route Settings.
Audio 20/COMAND
Route information
X Select a route type.
The route type is used for the next route X Show the menu (Y page 225).
calculation. If Dynamic Traffic Route, X To select Route: turn and press the con-
Dynamic TRF. Route After Request or troller.
Eco Route has been selected, traffic X To display destination information:
reports on the route are taken into account. select Destination Information.
i You can map the route to the destination X To display the route list: select Route
yourself with up to four intermediate stops. List.
X To display the current position: select
Route guidance Where am I?.
Navigation announcements and route guid- Canceling/continuing route guidance
ance displays guide you to your destination.
The information given relating to destination X Press the controller.
entry applies to COMAND. For information on X To select Destination: turn and press the
Audio 20, see the manufacturer's operating controller.
instructions. X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance
i Audio 20/COMAND can give incorrect or Continue Route Guidance.

navigation commands if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with Real-time traffic reports
the digital map's data. Road and traffic The information given relating to destination
rules and regulations always have priority entry applies to COMAND. For information on
over system driving recommendations. Audio 20, see the manufacturer's operating
instructions.
In order to receive real-time traffic reports via
satellite radio, you need to subscribe to SIR-
IUS XM Satellite Radio Traffic Message Ser-
vice.
COMAND can receive traffic reports via sat-
ellite radio and take account of these for
route guidance in the navigation system.
Received traffic reports are displayed on the
map either as text or as symbols.
Before and during a change of direction, the
map is shown on the left side of the display
and a view of the intersection or a 3D image
X To switch to navigation mode: press the Building images and elevation modeling
Ø button. In small map scales (20 m, 50 m), important
X To show the menu: slide 6 the controller. buildings are depicted realistically on the
X To select Traffic: turn and press the con- map; other buildings are shown as models.
troller. Selected cities are realistically depicted using
If satellite signals cannot be received or elevation modeling.
there are no traffic reports, you will see a
Calling up the online map display
message to this effect.
Requirement: a mobile phone with a data
X To close the report: press the controller. package must be connected to COMAND.
Audio 20/COMAND
Map functions
X Slide 5 the controller twice.
General notes X Press the controller.
The information given relating to destination The navigation menu appears.

entry applies to COMAND. For information on X Turn the controller until Online Map Dis‐
Audio 20, see the manufacturer's operating play is brought to the front.
instructions. X Press the controller.
The online connection is established. Once
Setting the map scale
the connection is established, the Google™
Requirement: the map is in full screen mode, Maps map shows the vicinity of the current
the menu is faded out (Y page 225). vehicle position.
X Turn the controller until the desired scale is
set.
Connecting and disconnecting a
Moving the map mobile phone
Requirement: the map is in full screen mode,
the menu is faded out (Y page 225). Prerequisites
X Slide 1, 4 or 2 the controller. For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface,
The crosshair is shown. The map moves in you require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile
the corresponding direction under the phone. The mobile phone must support
crosshair. Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above.
i Pressing the controller selects a destina- Activating Bluetooth® in Audio 20/
tion in the map. COMAND
Selecting map orientation X Press the Ø button in the center con-
X Show the menu (Y page 225). sole.
X To select Options: turn and press the con- The Vehicle menu appears.
troller. X To select System Settings: slide 6,
X Select Map Orientation. turn and press the controller to confirm.
The # dot indicates the current setting. X To select Activate Bluetooth: turn and
X Turn and press the controller. press the controller.
The map orientation is set. This switches Bluetooth® on O or off ª.
Z
On the mobile phone In Canada, you can get in touch with the
X Switch on the mobile phone and enter the Customer Relations Center on
PIN when prompted to do so (see the man- 1-800-387-0100.
ufacturer's operating instructions). i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength)
X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, depend on the supported version of the
Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see Hands-Free Profile.
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
This visibility is for restricted periods of Procedure and general information
time on some mobile phones (see the man- Searching for and authorizing (connect-
ufacturer's operating instructions). ing) a mobile phone
Audio 20/COMAND
X Set the Bluetooth® device name for the Before using your mobile phone with Audio
mobile phone if necessary. 20/COMAND for the first time, you will need
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one to search (Y page 229) for the phone and
manufacturer's products might be identical. then authorize it (Y page 229). Depending on
To make it possible to clearly identify your the mobile phone, authorization either takes
mobile phone, change the device name (see place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by
the manufacturer's operating instructions). entering a passkey. Audio 20/COMAND
The name can be freely selected. automatically makes the system suitable for
your mobile phone available. You can recog-
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP
nize Secure Simple Pairing by a code which is
(Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP
displayed in Audio 20/COMAND and on the
(Message Access Profile) Bluetooth® pro- mobile phone. You can recognize the passkey
files, the following information will be trans- system by the fact that you have to enter a
mitted after you connect: code on the mobile phone and in Audio 20/
RPhone book COMAND. The mobile phone is always con-
RCall lists nected automatically after authorization.
RMessages If Audio 20/COMAND does not detect your
The battery of the mobile phone should mobile phone, this may be due to particular
always be kept sufficiently charged in order to security settings on your mobile phone. You
prevent malfunctions. can also start the search procedure and
authorization on the mobile phone
i Not all mobile phones available on the (Y page 230).
market are equally suitable. You can obtain Device-specific information on authorizing
more detailed information about suitable and connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
mobile phones and about the connection phones can be found on the Internet at
between the mobile phone and Audio 20/ http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
COMAND on the Internet at connect.
http://www.mbusa-mobile.com.
You can authorize up to 15 mobile phones.
You can also obtain more information by Only one mobile phone can be connected to
calling. Audio 20/COMAND at any one time.
In the USA, you can get in touch with the De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- phone
ter on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
The connection is terminated automatically if
(1-800-367-6372).
you leave the receiver range of Audio 20/
COMAND or deactivate Bluetooth® on your When you call up the device list again, de-
mobile phone. authorized devices will be removed from the
If you no longer want the Bluetooth® connec- list. To update the device list, start the search
tion to be established automatically, the again.
mobile phone must be de-authorized (discon- Symbols in the device list
nected) (Y page 231).
Sym- Explanation
bol
Searching for a mobile phone
Ï New mobile phone found, not yet
authorized.
Audio 20/COMAND
Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is
not connected.
# Mobile phone is authorized and
connected.
Authorizing a mobile phone (connect-

ing)
X To call up the telephone menu: press the Authorization via Secure Simple Pairing
% button.
Once Audio 20/COMAND has found your
X To switch to the menu bar in the telephone
mobile phone, you can authorize (connect) it.
menu: slide 6 the controller.
X To select a mobile phone from the device
X To select Connect Device: turn the con-
list: turn the controller and press to con-
troller and press to confirm.
firm.
The device list is displayed.
A code is displayed in Audio 20/COMAND
X To select Search for Phones: turn and
and on the mobile phone.
A message is displayed that Bluetooth® The code is the same
must be activated on the mobile phone and X Audio 20/COMAND: select Yes.
must be made visible to other devices. X Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depend-
X To select Start Search: press the con- ing on the mobile phone used, you may
troller. have to confirm the connection to Audio
The available mobile phones are displayed 20/COMAND as well as confirm for the
in the device list. PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
The duration of the search depends on the prompt to confirm may take up to two
number of Bluetooth® telephones within minutes to be displayed. You may also save
range and their characteristics. the confirmation on the mobile phone (see
If a new phone is found, it appears in the the manufacturer's operating instructions).
device list with the Ï symbol. You can now The mobile phone is now authorized and
authorize (connect) the mobile phone found connected to Audio 20/COMAND. You can
(Y page 229). now speak using the hands-free system.
If the device list is already full, you will be Further information on setting the transmis-
requested to de-authorize a mobile phone sion and reception volume of the mobile
(Y page 231). phone can be found in the Digital Operator's
Manual.
Z
The code is different i If you wish to re-authorize the mobile

X Audio 20/COMAND: select No. phone after de-authorizing it, you can
The process is canceled. Repeat the choose another passkey for it.
authorization.
Establishing the connection from the
Authorization via passkey entry (access mobile phone
code)
The Bluetooth® device name of Audio 20/
Once Audio 20/COMAND has found your COMAND is "MB Bluetooth".
mobile phone, you can authorize (connect) it.
X Audio 20/COMAND: call up the telephone
X To select the Bluetooth® name of the menu.
Audio 20/COMAND
desired mobile phone in the device list: turn X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
controller.
The input menu for the passkey is dis-
played.
The passkey is a one- to sixteen-digit num-
The device list is displayed.
ber combination which you can choose
X To select Connect via Phone: turn and
yourself.
X Audio 20/COMAND: enter the passkey
A message is displayed, stating that you
using the character bar.
can start the search on your mobile phone.
X Select ¬ once all the numbers have
X Mobile phone: start the search for a Blue-
been entered.
tooth® device (see manufacturer's operat-
X Mobile phone: enter the same passkey
ing instructions).
and confirm your entry. Depending on the Audio 20/COMAND is displayed with the
mobile phone used, you may have to con- name "MB Bluetooth" in the mobile phone's
firm the connection to Audio 20/COMAND device list.
as well as confirm for the PBAP and MAP
X Select "MB Bluetooth".
Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm
A prompt appears in the Audio 20/
may take up to two minutes to be dis-
COMAND display asking whether the
played. You may also save the confirmation
mobile phone should be authorized.
on the mobile phone (see the manufactur-
X Audio 20/COMAND: select Yes.
er's operating instructions).
The mobile phone is now authorized and If No is selected, the procedure is canceled.
connected to Audio 20/COMAND. You can If your mobile phone supports Secure Sim-
now speak using the hands-free system. ple Pairing, a code is now displayed on both
devices.
Further information on setting the transmis-
sion and reception volume of the mobile The code is the same
phone can be found in the Digital Operator's X Audio 20/COMAND: select Yes.
Manual.
X Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depend-
If the Authorization Failed message ing on the mobile phone used, you may
appears, you may have entered a different have to confirm the connection to Audio
passkey or exceeded the prescribed time 20/COMAND as well as confirm for the
limit. Repeat the procedure.
PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
i Some mobile phones require a passkey prompt to confirm may take up to two
with four or more digits. minutes to be displayed. You may also save
the confirmation on the mobile phone (see i You can only switch to another authorized
the manufacturer's operating instructions). mobile phone if you are not currently mak-
The mobile phone is now authorized and ing a call.
connected to Audio 20/COMAND. You can
now speak using the hands-free system. De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile
The code is different phone
X Audio 20/COMAND: select No. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends De-
The process is canceled. Repeat the pro- authorization in Audio 20/COMAND and on
cedure. the mobile phone. Subsequent authorization
may otherwise fail.
Audio 20/COMAND
If your mobile phone does not support Secure
X To call up the telephone menu: press the
Simple Pairing, you can find more information
about connecting the mobile phone in the % button.
Digital Operator's Manual. X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
Reconnecting automatically X To select Connect Device: turn the con-
Audio 20/COMAND always searches for the
X To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
last connected mobile phone.
device list: turn the controller.
If no connection can be made to the most
recently connected mobile phone, the system X To select G: slide 9 the controller.
searches for the mobile phone that was con- X To select Deauthorize: turn and press the
nected before that one. controller.
A prompt appears, asking whether you
Switching between mobile phones really wish to de-authorize this device.
X To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
If you have authorized more than one mobile
phone, you can switch between the individual The mobile phone is de-authorized.
phones. i Before re-authorizing the mobile phone,
X To call up the telephone menu: press the you should also delete the device name MB
% button. Bluetooth from your mobile phone's Blue-
X To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con- tooth® list.
troller.
troller and press to confirm. Using the telephone
The device list is displayed. Accepting a call
X To select the desired mobile phone: turn
and press the controller. X To select Accept: press the controller.
The selected mobile phone is searched for or
and connected if it is within Bluetooth® X Press 6 on the multifunction steering
range and if Bluetooth® is activated. wheel.
Only one mobile phone can be connected at The call is accepted.
any one time. The currently connected mobile Further information on the functions you can
phone is indicated by the # dot in the device use during a call can be found in the Digital
list. Operator's Manual.
Z
i You can also accept the call by voice com- X To select Calls Received or Calls
mand using the Voice Control System (see Dialed: turn and press the controller.
the separate operating instructions). The relevant list is displayed.
X To select an entry and make a call: turn and
i If the phone number of the caller is trans-
ferred, it appears in the display. If the press the controller.
phone number is saved in the phone book, Using the phone book
the contact's name is also displayed. If the
phone number is not transferred, X To call up the telephone menu: press the
Unknownis shown in the display. % button.
X To select Name in the telephone menu: turn
Audio 20/COMAND
Rejecting a call and press the controller.

The phone book is displayed with an active
X To select Reject: turn the controller and character bar.
press to confirm. X To select characters: turn the controller
or and press to confirm.
X Press ~ on the multifunction steering The first contact with the selected first
wheel. character is highlighted in the phone book.
X Select the characters of the contact you are
Ending an active call searching for one by one, pressing and con-
firming with the controller each time.
X To select = in the telephone menu: turn
X To end the search: select ¬.
The contacts in the phone book are dis-
or played.
X Press ~ on the multifunction steering X To select a contact: turn and press the con-
wheel. troller.
The active call is ended.
If a contact contains more than one phone
Making a call number:
X To select a telephone number: turn and
Using the telephone menu press the controller.
X To call up the telephone menu: press the
Further information on the phone book can be
% button. found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
X To select all numbers one after the other in
the telephone menu: turn and press the
controller each time. Setting up an Internet connection
X To select w in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller. Procedure and general information
The call is made. USA: to use Mercedes-Benz Apps and Inter-
net access, mbrace must be activated and
Using call lists operational. Furthermore, mbrace must be
X To call up the telephone menu: press the activated for Mercedes-Benz Apps and Inter-
% button. net access. No further settings are required.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the Canada: in order to set up a mobile phone for
controller. Internet access, your mobile phone must be
X To select Call Lists: turn and press the connected via Bluetooth® to Audio 20/
controller. COMAND. If you are using Internet access for
the first time, you must enable the connected

mobile phone for Internet access
(Y page 233). If the connected mobile phone
supports the Bluetooth® PAN profile, you do
not need to make additional settings. The
Internet connection is established. If the con-
nected mobile phone does not support the
named Bluetooth® profile, predefined
(Y page 233) or manual access data
(Y page 233) must be set.
Audio 20/COMAND
X To select a mobile phone from the device
Enabling the mobile phone for Internet list: turn the controller and press to con-
access firm.
X To call up the telephone menu: press the If the mobile phone supports the Blue-
% button. tooth® PAN profile, Internet access is set
up. You can use the Internet functions.
X To switch to the main function bar: slide
5 the controller. If the connected mobile phone does not
X To select TEL/®: press the controller.
support the named Bluetooth® profile, pre-
defined (Y page 233) or personalized
X To select Internet: turn and press the
access data (Y page 233) must be set.
controller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played. Setting access data of the mobile phone
network provider
X To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the
controller. Selecting the predefined access data of
X To select Settings: turn and press the the mobile phone network provider
controller. X To select Predefined Settings: turn and
X To select Configure Internet Set‐ press the controller.
tings: turn and press the controller. A list of countries appears.
The device list is displayed. X To select Confirm Settings: turn and
X To select Search for Bluetooth Phone: press the controller.
turn and press the controller. If the mobile phone network provider pro-
Mobile phones are displayed that: vides multiple access data options, the rele-
Rare connected with Audio 20/COMAND vant access data still has to be selected. This
Rfulfill the conditions for the Internet func- depends on the data package used, for exam-
tions ple.
Rhave not yet been set up for the Internet
Manually setting the access data of the
function mobile phone network provider
X To select Manual Settings: turn and
An overview of the provider settings
appears.
X Set access data (Y page 234).
X To confirm settings: select Confirm Set‐
tings and turn and press the controller.
Z
The access data for the mobile phone net- Input field Meaning
work provider is selected once for the mobile
phone connected and is loaded again each User ID: The user identification
time the mobile phone is connected. can be obtained from your
You must set the access data of the mobile mobile phone network
phone network provider who provides the provider.
SIM card and the associated data package Entry is not necessary for
(access settings) for the connected mobile all mobile phone network
phone. The access data remains the same providers.
when you are in a different country (roaming).
Password: The password can be
Audio 20/COMAND
The access data of another network is not

obtained from your
selected.
mobile phone network
Setting access data provider.
Set the access data in accordance with your Entry is not necessary for
data package. You can contact your mobile all mobile phone network
phone network provider to obtain the precise providers.
access data.
Auto DNS: Automatic allocation of
Explanation of the access data DNS servers is activated.
Input field Meaning If the function is deactiva-
ted, the DNS server
Phone Num‐ Access number for estab- addresses must be
ber: lishing the connection entered manually.
The access number DNS (Domain Name
depends on the mobile Service)
phone used. For GSM/
UMTS mobile phones, DNS1: Fields for entering the
*99***1# is used as a DNS2: DNS server addresses
standard. manually. The address
can be obtained from your
Access APN network access point mobile phone network
Point: (Access Point Name) provider.
You can obtain this infor-
mation from your mobile
phone network provider. Radio mode
Entry is not necessary for Switching to
all mobile phone network
providers and mobile X Press the $ button.
phones. The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last waveband
PDP Type: Internet protocol used. selected.
You can obtain this infor-
mation from your mobile
phone network provider.
Overview RShow Station Information: switches

artist and track display and station name
on/off
RHD Radio: switches HD Radio on/off
Setting the waveband
Audio 20/COMAND
Example COMAND
: Main function bar
; Status bar with compass display
= Main display field with available stations
and relevant information
? Display of radio station selected X Using the button: in radio mode press the
A Radio menu bar $ button.
Selecting the main function bar X Turn the controller until the required wave-
band is in the center. Press the controller.
X Slide 5 the controller.
or
Selecting the menu bar X Using the radio menu bar: in radio mode,
X Slide 6 the controller. slide 6 the controller.
X To select Band/Preset: turn and press the
Menu options controller.
X Turn the controller until the required wave-
X In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
band is selected. Press the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X To select Options: turn and press the con-
Selecting a station
troller.
The following setting options are availa- RTo select via the main display field: in
ble to you: radio mode, turn the controller until the
RTag This Track: saves track information desired station is in the center.
RVia the "Options" menu: using Current
on an Apple® device for a later purchase
option via iTunes® Station/Channel Listing or Enter
Frequency select or enter the desired sta-
REnter Frequency: manual frequency
tion.
entry
RUsing the search function (COMAND): in
RCurrent Station/Channel Listing: list
radio mode, select è in the menu bar
of available stations
and enter the first letters of the desired
REdit Station Preset: selects and edits
station using the controller.
station presets
Z
Radio text/radio text plus

This function is not available in all countries.
X To switch on radio text: in radio mode,
select Info in the menu bar.
Additional information from the current
station is displayed.
Audio 20/COMAND
237

Stowage areas ................................... 238
Features ............................................. 251
Stowage and features

238 Stowage areas
Useful information Always be particularly careful around the

exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
i This Operator's Manual describes all these components to cool down before touch-
models and all standard and optional equip- ing them.
publication of the Operator's Manual. The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-
Country-specific differences are possible. cle are dependent on the distribution of the
Please note that your vehicle may not be load within the vehicle. For this reason, you
equipped with all features described. This should observe the following notes when
also applies to safety-related systems and transporting a load:
functions. RNever exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight

ist workshops (Y page 31). rating for the vehicle (including occupants).
The values are specified on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar of the
Stowage areas driver's door.
RThe trunk/cargo compartment is the pre-
Loading guidelines ferred place to store objects.
RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
G WARNING
sible and as low down in the trunk/cargo
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
compartment as possible.
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
RThe load must not protrude above the
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- upper edge of the seat backrests.
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- RAlways place the load against the rear or
den change in direction. front seat backrests. Make sure that the
Always store objects so that they cannot be seat backrests are securely locked into
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or place.
loads against slipping or tipping before the RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
journey. seats if possible.
RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel
G WARNING nets to transport loads and luggage.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust materials appropriate for the weight and
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the size of the load.
trunk lid/tailgate is open when the engine is RWhen transporting objects in the cargo
running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. compartment, the combined cargo cover
There is a risk of poisoning. and net must always be installed (cargo
Always switch off the engine before opening compartment cover and cargo net).
the trunk lid/tailgate. Never drive with the RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
trunk lid/tailgate open. wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges
for protection.
G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Stowage areas 239
Stowage spaces Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 238)

and the safety notes regarding stowage
Important safety notes spaces (Y page 239).
G WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are Through-loading facility in the rear
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be

thrown around in such situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving. The through-loading facility is opened from
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin- the trunk.
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in X Fold down the rear seat armrest.
the trunk/cargo compartment.
X Press release catch :.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 238). The flap opens downwards.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 238).
Manual
Through-loading facility in the rear
In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find bench seat (Sedan)
RGlove box Important safety notes
REyeglasses compartment G WARNING
RStowage compartment in the center con- If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
sole backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
RStowage compartment under the armrest wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
RStowage compartment under the front event of an accident.
seats RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
RStowage compartment in the rear pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
RStowage net in the rear seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
Stowage nets injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be
Stowage nets are located in the front- restrained by the seat backrest.
passenger footwell and on the left-hand side
of the trunk/cargo compartment.
Z
240 Stowage areas
Before every trip, make sure that the seat X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards.
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
are engaged. back if necessary.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 238). Folding the seat backrest back
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-
ests can be folded down separately to ! Make sure that the seat belt does not
increase the trunk capacity. become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
Folding the seat backrest forward aged.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat

i Vehicles with memory function: when you
forward if necessary.
fold one or both parts of the rear seat back-
X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it
rest forwards, the respective front seat
moves forward slightly, when necessary, in engages.
order to avoid contact. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, this will be shown in the multifunc-
X Vehicles without memory function: if nec- tion display in the instrument cluster. A
essary, move the driver's or front- warning tone also sounds.
passenger seat forward.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary.
X Open the trunk.
X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat back-
back if necessary.
rest release handle :.
The corresponding rear seat backrest is i You should always engage the rear seat
released. backrests if you do not need the through-
The rear seat head restraints are lowered. loading feature. This will prevent unauthor-
ized access to the trunk from the vehicle
interior.
Stowage areas 241
EASY-PACK through-loading facility in

the rear bench seat (Wagon)
G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench

seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-
partment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-
are engaged.
ests can be folded forwards separately to
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 238). increase the cargo compartment capacity.
The combined cargo cover and net can
Folding the rear seat backrests forward remain installed.
! When folding the rear seat backrest for- i When you fold one or both parts of the
wards, ensure that there are no items lying rear seat backrests forwards, the headr-
on the seat cushions. These items could ests are also lowered if necessary. In the
otherwise be damaged or could themselves case of vehicles with memory function, the
damage the rear seats. respective front seat is moved forwards
slightly to avoid contact with the seat
behind it.
X Vehicles without memory function: if nec-
essary, move the driver's or front-
passenger seat forward.
X Pull the left-hand or right-hand release han-
dle at the rear in cargo compartment : or
at the side beside backrests ;.
The corresponding backrest folds for-
wards.
back if necessary.
Z
242 Stowage areas
Folding the rear seat backrest back Cargo tie-down rings

! Make sure that the seat belt does not General notes
become trapped when folding the rear seat Observe the following notes on securing
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam- loads:
aged.
RObserve the loading guidelines
(Y page 238).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure

a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
or corners.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat RPad sharp edges for protection.
forward if necessary.
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. Trunk/cargo compartment
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, this will be shown in the multifunc-
tion display in the instrument cluster. A
warning tone also sounds.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 116).
back if necessary.
Securing cargo Cargo tie-down rings : (Sedan)

Plastic hooks (Sedan)
Cargo tie-down rings : (Wagon)
On vehicles without a through-loading feature

in the rear bench seat, six plastic hooks are
installed to the trunk floor.
Stowage areas 243
EASY-PACK cargo compartment cover Extending/retracting the cargo com-

(Wagon) partment cover
G WARNING
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
changes in direction, braking or in the event of
an accident. There is an increased risk of

Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or X To extend: pull cargo compartment
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by cover : back by grab handle ; and clip it
using tie downs, even if you are using the into the retainers on the left and right.
cargo compartment cover.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that

you do not stack the load in the cargo com-
partment higher than the lower edge of the
side windows. Do not place heavy objects
on top of the cargo compartment cover.
The cargo compartment cover and the cargo
net are attached to anchorages on the right
and left in the cargo compartment as a com-
bined cargo cover and net.
When the tailgate is opened, the cargo com- X To retract: unhook cargo compartment
partment cover is automatically raised to cover : from the retainers on the left and
make loading easier. It is automatically low- right and guide it forwards by grab han-
ered again when the tailgate is closed. dle ; until it is fully retracted.
When the cargo compartment cover is clip-
ped in, there should be no objects obstructing Installing/removing the combined
the downwards movement of the cover in the cargo cover and net
cargo compartment when the tailgate is
closed. The cargo compartment cover will
otherwise be raised again.
Z
244 Stowage areas
You can reach the combined cargo cover and

net to install and remove it from the cargo
compartment and, with the seat backrest fol-
ded forwards, from the left-hand rear door.
X Make sure that the cargo net and the cargo
compartment cover are rolled up.
X To remove: press button ;.
X Fold the combined cargo cover and net for-
wards on the left-hand side with the seat
backrest folded forwards, and fold it back-
wards with the seat backrest folded up. X Fold the left and right seat backrest for-
X First, detach the combined cargo cover and wards (Y page 241).
net from left-hand catch : and then X Insert combined cargo cover and net ;
remove it from right-hand fixture =. into two guides : and push it up to the
X To install: push the combined cargo cover stop in the direction of the arrow.
and net up to the stop into right-hand fix-
ture =.
X Place the combined cargo cover and net Cargo net (Wagon)
into the left-hand fixture and push it into
catch : until the combined cargo cover Important safety notes
and net engages audibly.
G WARNING
On its own, the cargo net cannot secure or
restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and
heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured
load during sudden changes in direction,
braking or in the event of an accident. There is
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo net.
X Make sure that red lock status indicator ?
is no longer visible. The combined cargo It is important to use a cargo net if you load
cover and net will otherwise not be locked the vehicle with small objects above the seat
in place. backrests. For safety reasons, always use a
cargo net when transporting loads.
Attaching the combined cargo cover Damaged cargo nets can no longer fulfill their
and net to the rear seat backrest protective function and must be replaced.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
! If you have attached the combined cargo
cover and net to a rear seat backrest that is
folded forwards, do not fold the backrest
back.
Stowage areas 245
Cargo net without cargo compartment Coat hooks on the tailgate (Wagon)
enlargement

: Coat hook
X Pull the cargo net up by tab : and hook it
into eyelets ;.
EASY-PACK trunk box (Sedan)
Cargo net with cargo compartment Important safety notes
enlargement
G WARNING
When the load surface moves up, your hands
may become trapped on the frame of the
EASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury.
When the load surface moves up, make sure
that your hands are not within the sweep of
the load surface. If someone becomes trap-
ped, carefully push the center of the load sur-
face downward.
! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is pulled

X Make sure that the cargo net is attached to out, no objects may be placed on the frame
the rear seat backrest (Y page 243). of the box, nor should the frame be pushed
from above. Otherwise, the box could be
X Guide the cargo net up by tab : and hook
damaged.
it into eyelets ;.
! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects
can damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and
then be thrown out. There is a risk of injury.
Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed or
fragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box.
Always store and secure these or similar
objects in the trunk outside of the EASY-
PACK trunk box.
! If you exceed the maximum permitted
load of the EASY-PACK trunk box, objects
can be thrown out of the EASY-PACK trunk
box and strike vehicle occupants. There is a
risk of injury, particularly in the event of
Z
246 Stowage areas
sudden braking or a sudden change in Removing and installing

direction.
Always observe the maximum permitted
load of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always
store and secure heavy objects in the trunk
outside of the EASY-PACK trunk box.
The maximum permitted load of the EASY-
PACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a load
of above approximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bot-
tom of the box moves downward until it rests
on the mat of the trunk floor. Thus, overload-
ing of the box is avoided.

X To install: insert retainer ; of box : into
Adjusting the height to any position slots =
X Pull the box out by handle : in the direc- X Raise box : and press hooks A into
tion of the arrow all the way to the stop. anchorage ? as far as they will go.
X Lowering the load surface: push the cen- X Turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise
ter of load surface ; down by hand in the and right-hand rotating catch B counter-
direction of the arrow until load surface ; clockwise by 90°.
has reached the desired position and the X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch
box is the desired size. B counter-clockwise and right-hand rotat-
X To raise the load surface: press switch ing catch B clockwise by 90°.
=. X Move box : downwards and pull it out
Load surface ; of the box moves up auto- from anchorages ?.
matically.
X To stow the box: push the box in by han-
i Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flat
surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable
dle : all the way to the stop.
shelf.
EASY-PACK load-securing kit (Wagon)

Components and storage
The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you
to use your cargo compartment for a variety
Stowage areas 247
of purposes. The accessory parts are located Luggage holder

under the cargo compartment floor.
! Only use the luggage holder to secure
X Open the EASY-PACK folding luggage-com-
cargo with a maximum weight of 15.4 lbs
partment floor (Y page 249). (7 kg) and with dimensions that the luggage
holder can safely and securely contain.

EASY-PACK load-securing kit accessory parts
: Telescopic rod The luggage holder can be used to secure
; Bag containing the brackets and luggage light loads against the side wall of the cargo
holder compartment to prevent them from moving
around.
Inserting the brackets into the loading X To install: insert two brackets A into the
rail left or right loading rail (Y page 247).
X Press release button : of the luggage
holder and pull the strap out slightly.
X Insert luggage holder ; into brackets A
and, while doing so, press release button
= and push the luggage holder downwards
until it engages.
X Press release button : of the luggage
holder and pull the strap out in the direction
of the arrow.
X Place the load between the strap and the
cargo compartment side wall.
X Insert bracket : into the center of loading
rail ?. X Using one hand, press locking button : of
X Press release button ; and push

the luggage holder.
bracket : into the desired position in load- X With your other hand, let the strap go slowly
ing rail ?. until the load is secured.

X Let go of release button ;. X Make sure that locking button ? on brack-
X Press locking button =.

ets A is pressed.
This keeps brackets A in place on the
Bracket : is locked in loading rail ?.
loading rail.
X If necessary, fold cargo tie-down ring A
X To remove: press release button = on
upwards.
respective bracket A and remove luggage
holder ; by pulling upwards and out.
Z
248 Stowage areas
Telescopic rod
The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are

located in the stowage compartment.

The telescopic rod can be used to secure the
load against the rear seats to prevent it from X To open: pull handle : up.
moving around.
X To install: insert one bracket ; into both
the left and the right loading rails and slide
it to the desired position (Y page 247).
X Insert telescopic rod : into brackets ;
and, while doing so, press release but-
ton ? and push the rod downwards until it
engages.
X Make sure that locking button = on brack-
ets ; is pressed.
This keeps brackets ; in place on the
loading rail. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;.
X To remove: press release button ? on
respective bracket ; and remove tele-
EASY-PACK folding floor with stowage
scopic rod : by pulling it upwards and out.
compartment under the cargo com-
partment floor (Wagon)
Stowage well under the trunk floor Important safety notes
(Sedan)
G WARNING
! Unhook the handle before again before If you drive when the EASY-PACK folding floor
closing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to is open, objects could be flung around, thus
prevent the handle flap from protruding. striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
Otherwise, you could damage the handle. injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always close the EASY-PACK folding floor
before a journey.
! Do not apply pressure to the EASY-PACK

folding luggage-compartment floor when it
is fully open. You may otherwise damage
Stowage areas 249
the hinges of the EASY-PACK folding lug- by handle : until it reaches the desired
gage-compartment floor. position and engages in side ?.
X To close: disengage the EASY-PACK fold-
! Vehicles with a B&O sound system: do not
remove the EASY-PACK folding floor. ing luggage-compartment floor and pull it
Removing the EASY-PACK folding floor will back.
cause the cable set or the amplifier to be X Press the EASY-PACK folding luggage-com-
damaged because the amplifier module is partment floor down ; until it engages.
screwed to the underside of the EASY-
PACK folding floor. Installing and removing the folding
cargo compartment floor
Opening and closing the folding cargo
compartment floor

120° position
X Remove the combined cargo cover and net
The parts of the EASY-PACK load-securing kit (Y page 243).
are contained beneath the EASY-PACK fold- X To remove: move EASY-PACK folding lug-
ing floor. Beneath the insert, you will find, for gage-compartment floor : into the 120°
example, the TIREFIT kit or the emergency position and lift it upwards.
spare wheel and the vehicle tool kit.
X To install: push EASY-PACK folding lug-
X To open: open the tailgate.
gage-compartment floor : to the stop,
X Holding the ribbing, press handle : down- move it into the 120° position and make
wards ;. sure it engages audibly.
Handle : folds upwards. X Pull EASY-PACK folding luggage-compart-
ment floor : forwards.
EASY-PACK rear sill protector

(Wagon)
! Before closing the tailgate, refasten the
EASY-PACK rear sill protector on the under-
side of the EASY-PACK folding luggage-
compartment floor.
The EASY-PACK rear sill protector could
X Pull EASY-PACK folding luggage-compart- otherwise be damaged.
ment floor = in the direction of the arrow
Z
250 Stowage areas
Position the load on the roof carrier in such

a way that the vehicle will not sustain dam-
age even when it is in motion.
Ensure that when the roof carrier is instal-
led:
Ryou can raise the sliding sunroof or the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel fully (depending on the vehicle's
equipment)
Ryou can open the tailgate or trunk lid fully
Rthe roof carrier does not come into con-
The EASY-PACK rear sill protector is attached
to the underside of the EASY-PACK folding tact with the antenna

cargo compartment floor by means of mag- ! To avoid damaging or scratching the cov-
nets. It is designed to prevent clothing ers, do not use metallic or hard objects to
becoming stained and the paintwork being open them.
scratched when loading.
You will find information on the maximum roof
X Open the EASY-PACK folding luggage-com-
load in the "Technical data" section
partment floor (Y page 249). (Y page 344).
X Use tab ; to detach EASY-PACK rear sill
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof
protector : from the magnets and place it load may become detached from the vehicle.
over the loading sill. You must therefore ensure that you observe
X Close the EASY-PACK folding cargo com- the roof carrier manufacturer's installation
partment floor. instructions.
Roof carrier
G WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
load, the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and
adjust your driving style.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you

only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
This helps to prevent damage to the vehi-
cle.
Features 251
Attaching the roof carrier (Sedan) Features

Manual
RCup holder
RBottle holder
RRoller sunblinds on the rear side windows
RRear window roller sunblind (Sedan)
RAshtray

Vehicles with a steel roof or sliding sunroof (illus- RCigarette lighter
tration)
R12 V sockets
R115 V socket
Sun visors
Overview
G WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/slid- accident.
ing panel
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
X Open covers : carefully in the direction of while driving.
the arrow.
X Fold covers : upwards.
X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor-
age points under covers :.
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Attaching the roof carrier (Wagon)

X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails.
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions. : Mirror light
; Additional sun visor
= Bracket
? Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
A Vanity mirror
B Mirror cover
Z
252 Features
Information in the Digital Operator's Shortly after successfully registering with the
Manual mbrace service, a user ID and password will
be sent to you by mail. You can use this pass-
word to log onto the mbrace area under "Own-
ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
RVanity mirror in the sun visor The system is available if:
RGlare from the side
Rit has been activated and is operational
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is
mbrace available for transmitting data to the Cus-

tomer Center
Information in the Digital Operator's Ra service subscription is available
Manual Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find Determining the location of the vehicle on a
information on the following topics: map is only possible if:
RDownloading destinations in COMAND RGPS reception is available.
RSearch & Send Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to
RVehicle remote opening the Customer Assistance Center.
RVehicle remote closing
RStolen vehicle recovery service
The mbrace system
RVehicle remote malfunction diagnosis To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
RDownloading routes follows:
RSpeed alert X Press the W or X button on the mul-
RGeo fencing tifunction steering wheel.
RTriggering the vehicle alarm or
X Use the COMAND/Audio 20 volume con-
i The mbrace system is only available in the
trol.
USA.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
General notes RAutomatic and manual emergency call
The mbrace system is only available in the RRoadside Assistance call
USA. RMB Info call
You must have a license agreement to acti- You can find information and a description of
vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your all available features under "Owners Online"
system is activated and operational. To log in, at http://www.mbusa.com.
press the ï MB Info call button. If any of
the steps mentioned are not carried out, the System self-test
system may not be activated.
After you have switched on the ignition, the
If you have questions about the activation, system carries out a self-diagnosis.
contact one of the following telephone hot-
lines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
Features 253
A malfunction in the system has been detec- Emergency call

ted if one of the following occurs:
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
not come on during the system self-test. G WARNING
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
Assistance button does not light up during even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
self-diagnosis of the system. emergency if:
RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
button does not light up during self-diag- cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
nosis of the system. Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the road

following buttons continues to light up red Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
after the system self-diagnosis: seen by other road users, particularly when
- SOS button dark or in poor visibility conditions
- F Roadside Assistance call button There is a risk of an accident and injury.
- ï MB Info call button Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-
RThe Inoperative or the Service Not lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
Activated message appears in the multi- Move to a safe location along with other vehi-
function display after the system self-diag- cle occupants. In such situations, secure the
nosis. vehicle in accordance with national regula-
tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expec- General notes
ted. In the event of an emergency, help will
have to be summoned by other means. Observe the notes on system activation
(Y page 252).
Have the system checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact An emergency call is dialed automatically if an
the following service hotlines: air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is
triggered. You cannot end an automatically
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center triggered emergency call yourself.
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007 An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually.
As soon as the emergency call has been ini-
tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The Connecting Call message
appears in the multifunction display.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the
Call Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
Z
254 Features
All important information on the emergency is X To initiate an emergency call manually:

transmitted, for example: press cover : briefly to open.
Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter- X Press SOS button ; briefly.
mined by the GPS system) The indicator lamp in SOS button ;
Rvehicle identification number flashes until the emergency call is conclu-
ded.
Rinformation on the severity of the accident
X Wait for a voice connection to the
Shortly after the emergency call has been ini-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
tiated, a voice connection is automatically
ter.
established between the Customer Assis-
X After the emergency call, close cover :.
tance Center and the vehicle occupants.
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the If the mobile phone network is unavailable,
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- mbrace will not be able to make the emer-
ter attempts to get more information on the gency call. If you leave the vehicle immedi-
emergency. ately after pressing the SOS button, you will
RIf there is no response from the vehicle not know whether mbrace placed the emer-
occupants, an ambulance is immediately gency call. In this case, always summon assis-
sent to the vehicle. tance by other means.
If no voice connection can be established to
Roadside Assistance button
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center, the system has been unable to initiate
an emergency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The
indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-
tinuously.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display and must be confirmed.
In this case, summon assistance by other
means.
Making an emergency call X To call Roadside Assistance: press Road-
side Assistance button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : flashes while the call is active.
The Connecting Call message appears in
the multifunction display. The audio output
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
Features 255
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
are available, the system transfers data to the multifunction steering wheel.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, or
for example: X Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio
Rcurrent location of the vehicle 20 button for ending a phone call.
Rvehicle identification number
The COMAND/Audio 20 display indicates MB Info call button
that a call is active. During the call, you can
change to the navigation menu by pressing
the NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, for
example.

Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between
Center and the vehicle occupants.
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
can ascertain the nature of the problem. In
the Digital Operator's Manual, you will find X To call MB Info: press MB Info call but-
information on remote malfunction diagno- ton :.
sis. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Customer Assistance Center.
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes- The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
Benz technician or makes arrangements for flashes while the connection is being made.
your vehicle to be transported to the nearest The Connecting Call message appears in
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. the multifunction display. The audio output
You may be charged for services such as is muted.
repair work and/or towing. If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
You can find more information in the separate nected message appears in the multifunction
mbrace manual. display.
The system has not been able to initiate a If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
Roadside Assistance call, if: are available, the system transfers data to the
Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
call button F is flashing continuously. for example:
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Rcurrent location of the vehicle
Customer Assistance Center was estab- Rvehicle identification number
lished. The COMAND/Audio 20 display indicates
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone that a call is active. During the call, you can
network is not available, for example. change to the navigation menu by pressing
The Call Failed message appears in the the NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, for
multifunction display. example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between
Center and the vehicle occupants.
Z
256 Features
You receive information about operating your The mobile phone is no longer connected to
vehicle, about the nearest authorized COMAND/Audio 20.
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod- However, if you want to use your mobile
ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz. phone, do so only when the vehicle is station-
You can find further information on the ary and in a safe location.
mbrace system under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
The system has not been able to initiate an Garage door opener
MB Info call, if: General notes
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button
ï is flashing continuously. The HomeLink® garage door opener integra-
ted in the rear-view mirror allows you to oper-
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz

ate up to three different door and gate sys-
Customer Assistance Center was estab-
tems.
lished.
Use the integrated garage door opener only
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
on garage doors that:
network is not available, for example.
Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display. Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the Once programed, the integrated garage door
multifunction steering wheel. opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
or
control. Please also read the operating
X Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio
instructions for the garage door system.
20 button for ending a phone call.
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not
Call priority run the engine while programming.
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Certain garage door drives are incompatible
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency with the integrated garage door opener. If you
call can still be initiated. In this case, an emer- have difficulty programing the integrated
gency call will take priority and override all garage door opener, contact an authorized
other active calls. Mercedes-Benz Center.
The indicator lamp of the respective button Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
flashes until the call is ended. phone assistance services:
An emergency call can only be terminated by RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Center. RCanada: Customer Service at
All other calls can be ended by pressing: 1-800-387-0100
Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steer- RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free
ing wheel of charge)
Rthe corresponding button in COMAND/ More information on HomeLink® and/or
Audio 20 to end the voice call compatible products is also available online
When a call is initiated, the audio system is at http://www.homelink.com.
muted. Notes on the declaration of conformity
(Y page 31).
Features 257
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 X To start programming mode: press and

Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 hold one of buttons ; to ? on the inte-
grated garage door opener.
Important safety notes The garage door opener is now in program-
ming mode. After a short time, indicator
G WARNING lamp : lights up yellow.
When you operate or program the garage door Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
with the integrated garage door opener, per- as button ;, = or ? is programmed for
sons in the range of movement of the garage the first time. If the selected button has
door can become trapped or struck by the already been programmed, indicator
garage door. There is a risk of injury. lamp : will only light up yellow after ten
When using the integrated garage door seconds have elapsed.

opener, always make sure that nobody is X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
within the range of movement of the garage lamp : flashes yellow.
door. X To program the remote control: point
garage door remote control A towards
G WARNING buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling X Press and hold button B on remote control
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave When indicator lamp : lights up green:
the engine running in enclosed spaces with- programming is finished.
out sufficient ventilation.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is
Programming to synchronize the rolling code
(Y page 257).
Programming buttons
X Release button B on remote control A for
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
the garage door drive system.
(Y page 257).
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the correspond-
ing button on the rear-view mirror. When
doing so, vary the distance between remote
control A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote
control A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be neces-
sary. You should test every position for at
least 25 seconds before trying another
position.
Garage door remote control A is not inclu-
ded with the integrated garage door opener. Synchronizing the rolling code
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
tion lock (Y page 137). (Y page 257).
X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
control the garage door drive. you will also have to synchronize the garage
Z
258 Features
door system with the integrated garage door Proceed as follows:

opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you Rif you live in Canada
will need to use the programming button on
Rif you have difficulties programming the
the door drive control panel. The program-
garage door opener (regardless of where
ming button may be positioned in different
you live) when using the programming
places depending on the manufacturer. It is
steps.
usually located on the door drive unit on the
garage ceiling. X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
Familiarize yourself with the garage door the integrated garage door opener.
drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro- After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
gramming of additional remote controls", up yellow.
before carrying out the following steps. X Release the button.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure X Press button B of garage door remote
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ control A for two seconds, then release it
objects are present within the sweep of the for two seconds.
door or gate. X Press button B again for two seconds.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X Repeat this sequence on button B of
tion lock (Y page 137). remote control A until indicator lamp :
X Get out of the vehicle. lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green:
X Press the programming button on the door
programming is finished.
drive unit.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-
gramming was successful. The next step is
tiate the next step.
to synchronize the rolling code.
X Get into the vehicle.
X Release button B of remote control A of
X Press previously programmed button ;,
the garage door drive.
= or ? on the integrated garage door If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
opener until the door closes. programming process for the correspond-
The rolling code synchronization is then ing button on the rear-view mirror. When
complete. doing so, vary the distance between remote
control A and the rear-view mirror.
Notes on programming the remote con-
trol The required distance between remote
control A and the integrated garage door
Canadian radio frequency laws require a
opener depends on the garage door drive
"break" (or interruption) of the transmission
system. Several attempts might be neces-
signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
sary. You should test every position for at
Therefore, these signals may not last long
least 25 seconds before trying another
enough for the integrated garage door
position.
opener. The signal is not recognized during
programming. Comparable with Canadian
law, some U.S. garage door openers also fea-
ture a "break".
Features 259
Problems when programming Please also read the operating instructions

If you are experiencing problems programing for the garage door system.
the integrated garage door opener on the X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
rear-view mirror, take note of the following tion lock (Y page 137).
instructions: X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
RCheck the transmitter frequency used by programmed to operate the garage door.
garage door drive remote control A and Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
whether it is supported. The transmitter cator lamp : lights up green.
frequency can usually be found on the back Garage door system with a rolling code:
of the garage door drive remote control. indicator lamp : flashes green.
The integrated garage door opener is com- The transmitter will transmit a signal as

patible with devices that have units which long as the button is pressed. The trans-
operate in the frequency range of 280 to mission is halted after a maximum of ten
433 MHz. seconds and indicator lamp : lights up
RReplace the batteries in garage door yellow.
remote control A. This increases the like- X Press button ;, = or ? again if neces-
lihood that garage door remote control A sary.
will transmit a strong and precise signal to
the integrated garage door opener. Clearing the memory
RWhen programming, hold remote control
A at varying distances and angles from the Make sure that you clear the memory of the
button which you are programming. Try var- integrated garage door opener before selling
ious angles at a distance between 2and the vehicle.
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
but at varying distances. tion lock (Y page 137).
RIf another remote control is available for the X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
same garage door drive, repeat the same The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
programming steps with this remote con- and then green.
trol. Before performing these steps, make X Release buttons ; and ?.
sure that new batteries have been installed The memory of the integrated garage door
in garage door drive remote control A. opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
RNote that some remote controls only trans-
mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-
cator lamp on the remote control goes out). Floormats
Press button B on remote control A again
before transmission ends. G WARNING
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
opener unit. This can improve signal recep- pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
tion/transmission. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Opening/closing the garage door Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
After it has been programmed, the integrated
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
garage door opener performs the function of
securely and as specified in order to ensure
the garage door system remote control.
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
Z
260 Features
loose floormats and do not place floormats on

top of one another.
X Slide the seat backwards.

X To install: place the floormat in the foot-
well.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-
ers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
261

Engine compartment ........................ 262
Maintenance ...................................... 266
Care .................................................... 266
Maintenance and care

262 Engine compartment
Useful information G WARNING

The engine compartment contains moving
i This Operator's Manual describes all components. Certain components, such as
models and all standard and optional equip- the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
ment of your vehicle available at the time of again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
publication of the Operator's Manual. is a risk of injury.
Country-specific differences are possible. If you need to do any work inside the engine
Please note that your vehicle may not be compartment:
Rswitch off the ignition
functions. Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
i Read the information on qualified special- such as the fan rotation area
Rremove jewelry and watches
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Engine compartment ple, away from moving parts
Hood G WARNING
Important safety notes The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
tem work under high voltage. If you touch
G WARNING components which are under voltage, you
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. injury.
There is a risk of an accident. Never touch components of the ignition sys-
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before tem or fuel injection system when the ignition
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. is switched on.
G WARNING G WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may Hybrid vehicles: be sure to read the "HYBRID"
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is supplement. Otherwise, you could fail to rec-
a risk of injury to persons within range of ognize dangers.
movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one is Opening the hood
within its range of movement.
G WARNING
G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
Working in the engine compartment poses a
compartment could expose you to hot gases
risk of injury.
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
Let an overheated engine cool down before
following.
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
Engine compartment 263
G WARNING Closing the hood

When the hood is open and the windshield X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
the ignition before opening the hood. properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force.
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield Radiator
wipers or the hood.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover
the radiator, for example with a winter front or
bug cover. The readings of the on-board-diag-

nostic system may otherwise be inaccurate.
Some of these readings are required by law
and must be accurate at all times.
Engine oil
General notes
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are G WARNING
turned off. Hybrid vehicles: be sure to read the "HYBRID"
X Pull release lever : on the hood. supplement. Otherwise, you could fail to rec-
The hood is released. ognize dangers.
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle

consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption
may be higher than this when the vehicle is
new or if you frequently drive at high engine
speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han- Rthe engine should be switched off for
dle ; up and lift the hood. approximately five minutes if the engine is
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in at normal operating temperature.
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open Rif the engine is not at normal operating
automatically by the gas-filled strut. temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly, wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
Z
264 Engine compartment
Checking the oil level using the oil dip- Adding engine oil
stick
G WARNING
G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart-
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a
Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and
Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the
touch only the components described in the following.
following.
G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may

ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
ponents before starting the engine.
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that

have been approved for vehicles with a ser-
vice system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
center.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
Example: vehicles with a diesel engine caused by the following:
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
tube. not been specifically approved for the
X Wipe off oil dipstick :. service system
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
tube to the stop, and take it out again. the interval for replacement specified by
If the level is between MIN mark = and the service system has been exceeded
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. Rusing engine oil additives.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark =
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil. engine oil can result in damage to the
Engine compartment 265
engine or to the catalytic converter. Have G WARNING

excess engine oil siphoned off. The engine cooling system is pressurized, par-
ticularly when the engine is warm. When
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before opening the
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape.
Example

X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
it.
X Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of
engine oil.
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
clockwise.
Only check the coolant level when the vehi-
Ensure that the cap locks into place
cle is on a level surface and the engine has
securely.
cooled down.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-
stick (Y page 264).
tion lock (Y page 137).
Further information on engine oil On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
(Y page 341). Start/Stop button twice (Y page 138).
X Check the coolant temperature display in
the instrument cluster.
Additional service products
The coolant temperature must be below
Checking coolant level 158 ‡ (70 †).
G WARNING tion lock (Y page 137).
Certain components in the engine compart- X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts clockwise to allow excess pressure to
of the exhaust system, can become very hot. escape.
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
risk of injury.
remove it.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
touch only the components described in the
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
following.
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler
Z
266 Care
neck when warm, there is enough coolant If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-
in expansion tank ;. ommended minimum of 1 liter, a message
X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes- appears in the multifunction display prompt-
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ing you to add washer fluid.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far Further information on windshield washer
as it will go. fluid/antifreeze (Y page 343).
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 342). Maintenance
Adding washer fluid to the windshield ASSYST PLUS
washer system
The Digital Operator's Manual contains more
G WARNING information on the ASSYST PLUS service
Certain components in the engine compart-
interval display.
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts

of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Care
risk of injury. General notes
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the H Environmental note
following. Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
G WARNING ner.
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
of the following:
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury. Rdry, rough or hard cloths
Make sure that no windshield washer con- Rabrasive cleaning agents
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. Rsolvents
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
damage the surfaces and protective film.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
X Add the premixed washer fluid. should drive for a few minutes after clean-
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
until it engages. brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
vehicle can then be parked.
Care 267
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for door or front-passenger door when the
retaining the quality in the long term. engine is switched off. Otherwise, the
Use care products and cleaning agents rec- automatic transmission selects park
ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. position P automatically and locks the
wheels. You can prevent this by shifting
the automatic transmission to N before-
Exterior care hand.
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
Automatic car wash
Do not open the driver's door or front-
G WARNING passenger door when the engine is
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. transmission selects park position P
After the vehicle has been washed, brake automatically and locks the wheels.
carefully while paying attention to the traffic

! If the key is within the rear detection
conditions until full braking power is restored. range of KEYLESS-GO, situations such as
the following could lead to the uninten-
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function tional opening of the trunk lid/tailgate:
Rusing a car wash
Rusing a power washer
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-
vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func- Make sure that the SmartKey is at least
tion in the following or other similar situa- 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.
tions: Observe the following to make sure that the
Rwhen towing the vehicle automatic transmission stays in position N:
Rin the car wash X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the
ignition is switched off.
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can tion lock (Y page 137).
damage the paintwork or plastic parts. Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/
Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
! Make sure that: X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
are fully closed. tion N.
Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off X Release the brake pedal.
(the OFF button has been pressed).
X Release the parking brake.
Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position
X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
0.
Key in the ignition lock.
Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
! In car washes with a towing mechanism, wash from the very start.
make sure that the automatic transmission If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
is in transmission position N, otherwise the cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
vehicle could be damaged.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
RVehicles with a SmartKey:
wax from the windshield and the wiper
Do not remove the SmartKey from the blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
ignition lock. Do not open the driver's
Z
268 Care
wiping noises caused by residue on the wind-

shield.

Manual
RWashing by hand
RPower washers
RCleaning the paintwork
RMatte finish care
RCleaning the wheels
RCleaning the windows
RCleaning wiper blades

RCleaning the exterior lighting
RCleaning the mirror turn signals
RCleaning the sensors
RCleaning the rear view camera
RCleaning the 360° camera
RCleaning the exhaust pipes
Interior care
RCleaning the display
RCleaning the plastic trim
RCleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
RCleaning genuine wood and trim strips
RCleaning the seat covers
RCleaning the seat belts
RCleaning the headliner and carpets
269

Where will I find...? ........................... 270
Flat tire .............................................. 271
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 275
Jump-starting .................................... 279
Towing and tow-starting .................. 281
Fuses .................................................. 284
Roadside Assistance
270 Where will I find...?
Useful information A Towing eye

B Jack
i This Operator's Manual describes all C Alignment bolt
models and all standard and optional equip- D Fuse allocation chart
E Lug wrench
Country-specific differences are possible. X Open the trunk lid/tailgate.
Please note that your vehicle may not be X Sedan: lift up the floor of the trunk
equipped with all features described. This (Y page 248).
also applies to safety-related systems and X Wagon: remove the seat cushions of the
functions. folding bench seat; see the Digital Opera-
i Read the information on qualified special- tor's Manual, keyword "Folding bench seat
ist workshops (Y page 31). (cargo compartment)".
Vehicles with a spare

Where will I find...? wheel/"Minispare" emergency spare
wheel
Vehicle tool kit
Roadside Assistance
General notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stow-
age well under the trunk floor (Y page 248) or
cargo compartment floor (Y page 249).
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
vehicle tool kit is on the left-hand side or the
right-hand side in the stowage well under the
trunk floor/cargo compartment floor.
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

(Example: equipment and country-specific varia-
tions possible)
: Vehicle tool kit tray
; Stowage well
= Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency
spare wheel
X Open the trunk lid/tailgate.
X Sedan: lift up the floor of the trunk
(Y page 248).
X Wagon: remove the seat cushions of the
folding bench seat; see the Digital Opera-
Vehicle tool kit in the left-hand stowage well (exam- tor's Manual, keyword "Folding bench seat
ple: equipment and country-specific variations (cargo compartment)".
possible)
: Tire sealant filler bottle The vehicle tool kit contains:
; Folding wheel chock RFolding wheel chock
= One pair of gloves (under jack) RFuse allocation chart
? Tire inflation compressor RJack
Flat tire 271
RAlignment bolt Vehicle preparation is not necessary on

ROne pair of gloves vehicles with MOExtended tires
RLug wrench Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 270)
RTowing eye Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 329)

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addi-
tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if
you mount tires that do not feature run-flat
properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may
be obtained from a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Information on changing/mounting a wheel
(Y page 309).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
Roadside Assistance
(Example: equipment and country-specific varia- X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
tions possible)
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
: Towing eye
(Y page 151).
; One pair of gloves
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
= Jack
straight-ahead position.
? Folding wheel chock
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that
A Alignment bolt "normal" level is selected (Y page 166).
B Sheet for faulty wheel X Switch off the engine.
C Tire inflation compressor
D Lug wrench lock.
E Fuse allocation chart or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
X Open the trunk lid/tailgate. X Open the driver's door.
X Sedan: lift up the floor of the trunk The on-board electronics now have status
(Y page 248). 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
X Wagon: remove the seat cushions of the been removed.
folding bench seat; see the Digital Opera- X Remove the Start/Stop button from the
tor's Manual, keyword "Folding bench seat ignition lock (Y page 138).
(cargo compartment)". X Make sure that the passengers are not
endangered as they do so. Make sure that
no one is near the danger area while a
Flat tire wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not
directly assisting in the wheel change
Preparing the vehicle should, for example, stand behind the bar-
Your vehicle may be equipped with: rier.
RMOExtended X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-
tires (tires with run-flat prop-
erties) (Y page 272) fic conditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.
272 Flat tire
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat When replacing one or all tires, please
properties) observe the following specifications for your
vehicle's tires:
General notes
Rsize
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat Rthe type and
characteristics), you can continue to drive Rthe "MOExtended" mark
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires. The affected If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
tire must not show any clearly visible damage. with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may
be used as a temporary measure. Make sure
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the that you use the proper size and type (sum-
MOExtended marking which appears on the mer or winter tire).
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load- Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
bearing capacity and the speed index not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
(Y page 303). It is therefore recommended that you addi-
MOExtended tires may only be used in con- you mount tires that do not feature run-flat
junction with an active tire pressure monitor. properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may
Roadside Assistance
If a pressure loss warning message be obtained from a qualified specialist work-

appears in the multifunction display: shop.
Robserve the instructions in the display mes-
sages (Y page 200). Important safety notes
Rcheck the tire for damage.
G WARNING
Rif driving on, observe the following notes.
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
vehicle is partially laden and approximately There is a risk of an accident.
18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
laden.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
tance possible depends upon: off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
Rvehicle speed vehicle.
Rroad condition Stop driving in emergency mode if:
Routside temperature Ryou hear banging noises.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode Rthevehicle starts to shake.
may be reduced by extreme driving condi- Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
tions/maneuvers, or it can be increased RESP® is intervening constantly.
through a moderate style of driving.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
is counted from the moment the tire pressure After driving in emergency mode, have the
loss warning appears in the multifunction dis- wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
play. workshop with regard to their further use. The
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Flat tire 273
TIREFIT kit ! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-

sor for longer than eight minutes at a time
Important safety notes without a break. It may otherwise overheat.
TIREFIT is a tire sealant. The tire inflation compressor can be oper-
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to ated again once it has cooled down.
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire Comply with the manufacturer’s safety
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem- instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation
peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). compressor.
G WARNING
Using the TIREFIT kit
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
than those mentioned above.
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
Roadside Assistance
on a flat tire.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
X Do not remove any foreign objects which
G WARNING have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita- nails.
tion. It must not come into contact with your X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla-
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away tion compressor from the stowage well
from children. There is a risk of injury. underneath the trunk floor/cargo compart-
If you come into contact with the tire sealant, ment floor (Y page 270).
observe the following: X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster within the driver's field
RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin
of vision.
immediately with water.
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
Z
274 Flat tire
X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can
of the housing. then be removed like a layer of film.
X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire seal- If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,
ant bottle :. have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at
X Place tire sealant bottle : head down- a dry cleaner as soon as possible.
wards into recess ; of the tire inflation
compressor. Tire pressure not reached
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tire.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of five minutes the tire
Roadside Assistance
pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/

X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty 26 psi).
tire.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
G WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket after the specified time, the tire is too badly
(Y page 251) in your vehicle. damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
tion lock (Y page 137). pressure that is too low can significantly
X Press on/off switch = on the tire inflation impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
compressor to I. acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
The tire inflation compressor is switched Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
on. The tire is inflated. specialist workshop.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.
The pressure can briefly rise to approx- Tire pressure reached
imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation com- G WARNING
pressor during this phase. A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
X Allow the tire inflation compressor to run
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
for five minutes. The tire should then have
accident.
attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi). You should therefore adapt your driving style
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has the specified maximum speed with a tire that
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire has been repaired using tire sealant.
pressure reached" (Y page 274).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire
has not been attained after five minutes, see sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part
"Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 274). of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the
Battery (vehicle) 275
instrument cluster in the driver's field of side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the
vision. fuel filler flap for values.
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on
! Residue from the tire sealant may come
out of the filler hose after use. This could the tire inflation compressor.
cause stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)

has been attained after five minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X To reduce the tire pressure: depress
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of pressure release button E next to pres-
Roadside Assistance
the faulty tire. sure gauge F.
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew
inflation compressor. the filler hose from the valve of the sealed
X Pull away immediately. tire.
X Stop after driving for approximately ten X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of
minutes and check the tire pressure with the sealed tire.
the tire inflation compressor. X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire
The tire pressure must now be at least inflation compressor.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
G WARNING sealant bottle.
If the required tire pressure is not reached X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist
after driving for a short period, the tire is too workshop and have the tire changed there.
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a soon as possible at a qualified specialist
tire pressure that is too low can significantly workshop.
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
acteristics. There is a risk of accident. four years at a qualified specialist work-
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified shop.
i In cases such as the one mentioned Battery (vehicle)

above, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Important safety notes
(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can- Special tools and expert knowledge are
ada). required when working on the battery, e.g.
X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least removal and installation. You should there-
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and fore have all work involving the battery car-
Loading Information placard on the driver's ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
276 Battery (vehicle)
G WARNING Rif you push or pull the battery across the

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery carpet or other synthetic materials
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
G WARNING
lead to function restrictions applying to
During the charging process, a battery produ-
safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
You could lose control of the vehicle, for
connected battery does not come into con-
example:
tact with vehicle parts.
Rwhen braking RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers tery.
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not RIt is important that you observe the descri-
adapted to the road conditions bed order of the battery terminals when
There is a risk of an accident. connecting and disconnecting a battery.
Roadside Assistance
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop battery poles with identical polarity are
immediately. Do not drive any further. You connected.
should have all work involving the battery car- RIt is particularly important to observe the
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. described order when connecting and dis-
connecting the jumper cables.
For further information about ABS and ESP®,
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
see (Y page 75) and (Y page 80).
terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation G WARNING
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
explosion. not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle the battery. Keep children away from batter-
body to remove any existing electrostatic ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
build-up. plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
tion.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
charging the battery as well as when jump- H Environmental note
starting. Batteries contain dangerous
Always make sure that neither you nor the substances. It is against the
battery is electrostatically charged. A build- law to dispose of them with
up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for the household rubbish. They
example: must be collected separately
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic and recycled to protect the
fibers environment.
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
Battery (vehicle) 277
batteries to a qualified spe- Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-

cialist workshop or a special tact with skin, eyes or clothing.
collection point for used bat- Wear suitable protective clothing,
teries. especially gloves, apron and face-
guard.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a Rinse any acid spills immediately
qualified specialist workshop. with clear water. Contact a physi-
Observe the service intervals in the Main- cian if necessary.
tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe- Wear eye protection.
cialist workshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving the
battery carried out at a qualified specialist Keep children away.
workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
necessary for you to disconnect the battery
yourself, make sure that:
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the Observe this Operator's Manual.
SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-
Roadside Assistance
GO, ensure that the ignition is switched
off. Check that all the indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,
the "HYBRID" supplement included in the
electronic components, such as the
vehicle literature. You could otherwise fail to
alternator, may be damaged.
recognize dangers e.g. due to high voltage.
Ryou first remove the negative terminal
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
clamp and then the positive terminal
mends that you only use batteries which have
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
tem may be damaged.
increased impact protection to prevent vehi-
Rthe transmission is locked in position P
cle occupants from suffering acid burns
after disconnecting the battery. The vehi- should the battery be damaged in the event of
cle is secured against rolling away. You an accident.
can then no longer move the vehicle.
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-
The battery and the cover of the positive mum possible service life, it must always be
terminal clamp must be installed securely sufficiently charged.
during operation.
The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can
Comply with safety precautions and take pro- discharge over time if you do not use the
tective measures when handling batteries. vehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-
Risk of explosion. nected at a qualified specialist workshop. You
can also charge the battery with a charger
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop for further infor-
Fire, open flames and smoking are mation.
prohibited when handling the bat-
Have the battery condition of charge checked
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-
Z
278 Battery (vehicle)
cialist workshop if you wish to leave your can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
vehicle parked for a long period of time. an explosion.
i Remove the SmartKey if you park the Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
vehicle and do not require any electrical charging it or jump-starting.
consumers. The vehicle will then use very
little energy, thus conserving battery ! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
power. mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
i If the power supply has been interrupted, ! Only charge the battery using the jump-
e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will starting connection point.
have to: The jump-starting connection point is in the
Rset the clock. Information on setting the engine compartment (Y page 279).
clock can be found in the Digital Opera- X Open the hood.
tor's Manual. X Connect the battery charger to the positive
On vehicles with COMAND and a naviga- terminal and ground point in the same
tion system, the clock is set automati- order as when connecting the donor bat-
cally. tery in the jump-starting procedure
Roadside Assistance
Rreset the function for folding the exterior (Y page 279).

mirrors in/out automatically, by folding If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up
the mirrors out once (Y page 117). at low temperatures, it is very likely that the
discharged battery has frozen. In this case,
you may neither charge the battery nor jump-
Charging the battery start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-
out battery may be shorter. The starting char-
G WARNING
acteristics may be impaired, especially at low
During charging and jump-starting, explosive temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery
gases can escape from the battery. There is a checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
risk of an explosion.
Never charge a battery still installed in the
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating vehicle unless a battery charger unit
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used . A
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. battery charger unit specially adapted for
Do not lean over a battery. Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an
G WARNING accessory. It permits the charging of the bat-
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. tery in its installed position. Contact an
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over information and availability. Read the battery
the battery. Keep children away from batter- charger's operating instructions before
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with charging the battery.
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
tion.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
Jump-starting 279
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
Roadside Assistance
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Other-
wise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.
HYBRID vehicles: make sure that you read the "HYBRID" supplement included in the vehicle
literature. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers e.g. due to high voltage.
Z
280 Jump-starting
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust
system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.
Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal
Roadside Assistance
clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.

Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
Towing and tow-starting 281
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.

X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
Roadside Assistance
qualified specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting There is a risk of an accident.

When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
its weight should not be greater than the per-
G WARNING missible gross weight of your vehicle.
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if: i Details on the permissible gross vehicle
weight of your vehicle can be found on the
Rthe engine is not running. vehicle identification plate (Y page 336).
Rthe brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply
or the vehicle's electrical system.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-
If your vehicle is being towed, much more vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-
force may be necessary to steer or brake. tion in the following or other similar situa-
There is a risk of an accident. tions:
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
Rwhen towing the vehicle
make sure that the steering moves freely.
Rin the car wash
G WARNING ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could
and its weight is greater than the permissible be damaged.
gross weight of your vehicle, the:
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,
Rthe towing eye could detach itself this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- recover the vehicle with a crane.
over.
Z
282 Towing and tow-starting
! When towing, pull away slowly and N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, electrical system in the same way as when
the vehicles could be damaged. jump-starting (Y page 279).
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
This could damage the vehicle. or trailer.
! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, i Disarm the automatic locking feature
use the key instead of the Start/Stop but- (Y page 95). You could otherwise be locked
ton. Otherwise, the automatic transmission out when pushing or towing the vehicle.
may shift to position P when the driver's or
front-passenger door are opened, which
could lead to damage to the transmission. Installing/removing the towing eye
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of Installing the towing eye

30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
G WARNING
30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
a risk of burns when removing the rear cover.
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
Roadside Assistance
raised and transported. Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular
care when removing the rear cover.
! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its
weight must not exceed the maximum per-
missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi-
cle.
the "HYBRID" supplement included in the
vehicle literature. You could otherwise fail to
recognize dangers e.g. due to high voltage.
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed away.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission dam-
age, have it transported on a transporter or
trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in posi-
tion N when the vehicle is being towed.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock Towing eye covers (example: Sedan)
Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to The mountings for the removable towing eyes
position N are located in the bumpers. They are at the
In the event of damage to the electrical front and at the rear, behind the covers.
system X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
If the battery is defective, the automatic tool kit (Y page 270).
transmission will be locked in position P. To X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
shift the automatic transmission to position direction of the arrow.
Towing and tow-starting 283
X Take cover : off the opening. tion. In this case, only the indicator lamps
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as for the direction of travel flash. After reset-
it will go and tighten it. ting the combination switch, the hazard
warning lamp starts flashing again.
Removing the towing eye
X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
X Attach cover : to the bumper and press raised
until it engages. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. with either the front or the rear axle raised,
! Vehicles with automatic transmission
Towing a vehicle with both axles on
must not be towed with the rear axle raised.
the ground
The vehicle/trailer combination may oth-
It is important that you observe the safety erwise swerve or even roll over.
instructions when towing away your vehicle
! The ignition must be switched off if you
(Y page 281).
Roadside Assistance
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
The automatic transmission automatically raised. Intervention by ESP® could other-
shifts to position P when you open the driver's wise damage the brake system.
or front-passenger door or when you remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order
to ensure that the automatic transmission Transporting the vehicle
stays in position N when towing the vehicle,
you must observe the following points: ! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and axle or steering components. Otherwise,
the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in posi- the vehicle could be damaged.
tion 0.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
tion lock.
purposes.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
(Y page 139). tion lock.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
tion N.
tion N. As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X Release the brake pedal. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
X Release the parking brake. applying the parking brake.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps, see X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
the Digital Operator's Manual. tion P.
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
ignition lock. tion lock and remove the SmartKey from
i When towing with the hazard warning the ignition lock.
lamps switched on, use the combination X Secure the vehicle.
switch as usual to signal a change of direc-
Z
284 Fuses
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed nents on the circuit and their functions stop
with either the front or the rear axle raised, operating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
If the vehicle has transmission damage or the same rating, which you can recognize by
damage to the front or rear axle, have it trans- the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
ported on a transporter or trailer. in the fuse allocation chart.
In the event of damage to the electrical If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
system cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
If the battery is defective, the automatic cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
transmission will be locked in position P. To Mercedes-Benz Center.
shift the automatic transmission to position
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
electrical system in the same way as when Before changing a fuse
jump-starting (Y page 279). Pay attention to the important safety notes
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter (Y page 284).
Roadside Assistance
or trailer. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 151).
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting) X Switch off all electrical consumers.
! Vehicles with automatic transmission lock.
must not be started by tow-starting. This
could otherwise damage the transmission. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
i You can find information on "Jump-start- The on-board electronics now have status
ing" under (Y page 279). 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
Fuses The driver’s door can be closed again.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Important safety notes must be off.
G WARNING The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
age, the electric cables could be overloaded. in the direction of travel
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an RFuse box in the trunk/cargo compartment
accident and injury. on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified viewed in the direction of travel
new fuses having the correct amperage. The fuse allocation chart is located in the
vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment
! Only use fuses that have been approved under the trunk/cargo compartment floor
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which (Y page 270).
have the correct fuse rating for the system
concerned. Otherwise, components or sys-
tems could be damaged.
Fuses 285
Fuse box in the engine compartment X Secure lines ; in the guides.

X Close the hood.
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 284).
G WARNING Fuse box in the trunk
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
(Y page 284).
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
the ignition before opening the hood. fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
fuse box when the cover is open. seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
! When closing the cover, make sure that it the operation of the fuses.
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
Roadside Assistance
X Open the trunk lid.
X To open: release cover : at the top right
and left-hand sides with a flat object.
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are X Open cover : downwards in the direction
turned off. of the arrow.
X Open the hood.
X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box. Fuse box in the cargo compartment
X To open: remove lines ; from the guides.
X Move lines ; aside. Route the lines behind (Y page 284).
connection = to do this.
X Open clamp :.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.
X To close: check whether the seal is lying ! When closing the cover, make sure that it
correctly in the cover. is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box
the operation of the fuses.
into the retainer.
X Fold down cover and close clamps :.
Z
286 Fuses
X Open the tailgate.

X To open: pull handle : on the cover.
X Open the cover downwards.
X Swing paneling ; forwards.
Roadside Assistance
287

Operation ........................................... 288
Winter operation ............................... 290
Tire pressure ..................................... 291
Loading the vehicle .......................... 298
All about wheels and tires ............... 301
Changing a wheel .............................. 309
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 314
Emergency spare wheel ................... 329
Wheels and tires

288 Operation
Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics:

Rpay attention to the information and warn-
i This Operator's Manual describes all ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
models and all standard and optional equip- run-flat characteristics).
publication of the Operator's Manual. Accessories that are not approved for your
Country-specific differences are possible. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being
Please note that your vehicle may not be used correctly can impair the operating
equipped with all features described. This safety.
also applies to safety-related systems and Before purchasing and using non-approved
functions. accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
i Read the information on qualified special- shop and ask about:
ist workshops (Y page 31). Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Information on the sizes and types of wheels
and tires for your vehicle can be found under
G WARNING
"Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 314).
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
Information on tire pressure can be found:
the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
Wheels and tires
dent. tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 298)

Always replace wheels and tires with those Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
that fulfill the specifications of the original flap (Y page 146)
part. Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 291)
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct:
Rdesignation
Operation
Rmodel Information on driving
When replacing tires, make sure to use the Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
correct: heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
Rdesignation While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
Rmanufacturer noises and unusual handling characteristics,
Rmodel e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
the wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-
G WARNING pect that a tire is defective, reduce your
speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-
as possible to check the wheels and tires for
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
damage. Hidden tire damage could also be
There is a risk of accident.
causing the unusual handling characteristics.
Tires without run-flat characteristics: If you find no signs of damage, have the tires
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. and wheels checked at a qualified specialist
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your workshop.
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or When parking your vehicle, make sure that
consult a qualified specialist workshop. the tires do not get deformed by the curb or
Operation 289
other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over The service life of tires depends, among other
curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try things, on the following factors:
to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth- RDrivingstyle
erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,
RTirepressure
may be damaged.
RDistance covered
Regular checking of wheels and tires

Notes on tire tread
G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- G WARNING
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your ditions. There is a risk of accident.
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
well as after driving off-road or on rough may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
tire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam- should regularly check the tread depth and
age such as: the condition of the tread across the entire
width of all tires.
Wheels and tires

Rcuts in the tires
Rpunctures
Minimum tire tread depth for:
Rtears RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
in the tires
Rbulges on tires RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels For safety reasons, replace the tires before
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
tire tread depth is reached.
condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tire (Y page 289). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire Marking : shows where the bar indicator
pressure as necessary (Y page 291). (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the
Observe the notes on the emergency spare tire tread.
wheel (Y page 329). Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
tread. They are visible once a tread depth of
Z
290 Winter operation
approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can
reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn be obtained from a qualified specialist work-
that it must be replaced. shop.
Selecting, mounting and replacing Winter operation

tires
General notes
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same
type and make. You can find information about this in the
Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires Driving with summer tires
with run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 272). At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
the wheels. braking power. Change the tires on your vehi-
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for
cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very
cold temperatures could cause cracks to
the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach
form, thereby damaging the tires perma-
their full performance after this distance.
nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept
RDo not drive with tires which have too little
responsibility for this type of damage.
tread depth, as this significantly reduces
Wheels and tires
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). G WARNING

RReplace the tires after six years at the lat- Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
est, regardless of wear. sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
Observe the notes on the emergency spare your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
wheel (Y page 329). Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat

properties) M+S tires
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat G WARNING
characteristics), you can continue to drive
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
pressure in one or more tires.
and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
MOExtended tires may only be used in con- a risk of an accident.
junction with an active tire pressure monitor
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
and only on wheels specifically tested by
(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
Mercedes-Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with Further information can be found in the Digi-
a flat tire (Y page 272). tal Operator's Manual.
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
Tire pressure 291
Snow chains i The specifications on the sample Tire and

Loading Information placard and tire pres-
G WARNING sure tables are examples. Tire pressure
If snow chains are installed to the front specifications are vehicle-specific and may
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle deviate from the data shown here. The tire
body or chassis components. This could pressure specifications that are valid for
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. your vehicle can be found on the Tire and
There is a risk of an accident. Loading Information placard and tire pres-
To avoid hazardous situations: sure table on the vehicle.
Rnever install snow chains to the front
wheels
General notes
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the The recommended tire pressures for the tires
rear wheels. mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Further information can be found in the Digi- Operation with an emergency spare
tal Operator's Manual. wheel: information on operation with an
emergency spare wheel can be found in the
general notes in the "Emergency spare wheel"
Tire pressure section (Y page 329).
Tire pressure specifications Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Wheels and tires

G WARNING Tire and Loading Information placard
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures : Recommended tire pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires includ- The Tire and Loading Information placard is
ing the spare wheel: on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rmonthly, at least (Y page 298).
Rif the load changes The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for
Rbefore beginning a long journey
cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
are valid for the maximum permissible load
off-road driving and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
If necessary, correct the tire pressure. speed.
Z
292 Tire pressure
Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim

diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size
and can be found on the tire sidewall
Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted (Y page 303).
for this vehicle by the factory
If the tire pressures have been set to the
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower
mended pressures for cold tires for various
road speeds, the pressures should be reset to
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
the higher values:
speed conditions.
Rif you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
Wheels and tires
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds
i The tire pressures for increased loads

and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
tire pressure table, may have a negative
effect on driving comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this
can lead to an excessive build-up of heat and
a sudden loss of pressure.
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions For more information, contact a qualified spe-
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire cialist workshop.
pressure information following is only valid
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially
Important notes on tire pressure
laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the
table for different numbers of occupants and G WARNING
amounts of luggage. The actual number of If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
seats may differ. wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
Tire pressure 293
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- pressure to the value specified for cold tires.
tact a qualified specialist workshop. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
G WARNING cold tires:
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and on the B-pillar on the driver's side
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres- fuel filler flap
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a
risk of an accident. Underinflated or overinflated tires
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for Underinflated tires
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
G WARNING
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
does not permit any reliable conclusion about they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire ing properties and the driving characteristics.
pressure can be checked in the on-board There is a risk of an accident.
computer. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
Wheels and tires

The tire temperature and pressure increase tires, including the spare wheel.
when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-
ent on the driving speed and the load. Underinflated tires may:
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres- Roverheat, leading to tire defects
sures when the tires are cold. Radversely affect handling
The tires are cold: Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
Rif the vehicle has been parked without Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
hours and Overinflated tires
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
G WARNING
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
The tire temperature changes depending on
because they are damaged more easily by
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure
severely impair the braking properties and the
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-
accident.
ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correct
the tire pressure if it is too low for the current Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
operating conditions. If you check the tire tires, including the spare wheel.
pressure when the tires are warm, the result-
Overinflated tires may:
ing value will be higher than if the tires were
cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire Rincrease the braking distance
Radversely affect handling
Z
294 Tire pressure
Rwearexcessively and/or unevenly Checking tire pressures manually

Rhavean adverse effect on ride comfort To determine and set the correct tire pres-
Rbe more susceptible to damage sure, proceed as follows:
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to
Maximum tire pressures
be checked.
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
X Read the tire pressure and compare it to
the recommended value on the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the tire
pressure table (Y page 291).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the
tire pressure to the recommended value.
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air.
To do so, press down the metal pin in the
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres- valve, using the tip of a pen for example.
sure Then check the tire pressure again using
the tire pressure checker.
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
inflation pressure. Always observe the rec-
ommended tire pressure for your vehicle X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Wheels and tires
when adjusting the tire pressure

(Y page 291).
Tire pressure monitor
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in General notes
the illustration.
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the
Checking the tire pressures tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-
sure monitor warns you if the pressure drops
Important safety notes in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure
monitor only functions if the corresponding
Observe the notes on tire pressure
sensors are installed in all wheels.
(Y page 291).
Information on tire pressures is displayed in
Information on air pressure for the tires on
the multifunction display. After a few minutes
your vehicle can be found:
of driving, the current tire pressure of each
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa- tire is shown in the Service menu of the mul-
tion placard on the B-pillar tifunction display, see illustration (example).
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
flap
Rin the "Tire pressure" section
Example: Sedan, current tire pressure display

Tire pressure 295
For information on the message display, refer sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
to the "Checking the tire pressure electroni- cle is started as long as the malfunction
cally" section (Y page 296). exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect
Important safety notes or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
G WARNING
reasons, including the installation of incom-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), patible replacement or alternate tires or
should be checked at least once every two wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure from functioning properly. Always check the
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
on the Tire and Loading Information placard or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres- ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires
sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
your vehicle has tires of a different size than function properly.
the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, the tire It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure label, you should determine the pressure to that recommended for cold tires
proper tire pressure for those tires. which is suitable for the operating situation
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has (Y page 291). Note that the correct tire pres-
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sure for the current operating situation must
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.
Wheels and tires

sure telltale when one or more of your tires If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, warning threshold for the warning message is
when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, aligned to the reference values taught-in.
you should stop and check your tires as soon Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjust-
as possible, and inflate them to the proper ing the pressure of the cold tires
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- (Y page 297). The current pressures are
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can saved as new reference values. As a result, a
lead to tire failure. warning message will appear if the tire pres-
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency sure drops significantly.
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
handling and stopping ability. Please note that of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire the notes on the recommended tire pressure
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- (Y page 291).
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
underinflation has not reached the level to you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres- tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
sure telltale. event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when abrupt steering maneuvers.
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp
will flash for approximately a minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
Z
296 Tire pressure
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn- Checking the tire pressure electroni-
ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat- cally
ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
the warning lamp flashes or lights up indi-
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 137).
cates whether a tire pressure is too low or the
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Service menu.
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the
X Press the 9 or : button to select
tire pressure on one or more tires is signif-
icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is Tire Pressure.
not malfunctioning. X Press the a button.
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a

The current tire pressure of each tire is
minute and then remains lit constantly, the shown in the multifunction display.
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. If the vehicle has been parked for over
In addition to the warning lamp, a message 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
appears in the multifunction display. Observe displayed after driving a few
the information on display messages minutes message appears.
(Y page 200). After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunc- monitor automatically detects new wheels or
tion of the tire pressure monitor to be indica- new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of
ted. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire the tire pressure value to the individual
pressure warning lamp flashing for approx- wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure
Monitor Active display message is shown
Wheels and tires
imately one minute and then remaining lit.

When the malfunction has been rectified, the instead of the tire pressure display. The tire
tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a pressures are already being monitored.
few minutes of driving. If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the
The tire pressure values indicated by the on- system may continue to show the tire pres-
board computer may differ from those meas- sure of the wheel that has been removed for a
ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value
The tire pressures shown by the on-board displayed for the position where the spare
computer refer to those measured at sea wheel is mounted is not the same as the cur-
level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val- rent tire pressure of the emergency spare
ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higher wheel.
than those shown by the on-board computer.
In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can sages
be affected by interference from radio trans- If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, loss in one or more tires, a warning message
two-way radios) that may be being operated is shown in the multifunction display and the
in or near the vehicle. yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp
comes on.
RIf the Correct Tire Pressure message
appears in the multifunction display, the
tire pressure in at least one tire is too low
Tire pressure 297
and must be corrected at the next oppor- X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
tunity. 2 in the ignition lock.
RIf the Check Tires message appears in the X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
multifunction display, the tire pressure in ing wheel to select the Service menu.
one or more tires has dropped significantly X Press the 9 or : button to select
and the tires must be checked. Tire Pressure.
RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction mes- X Press the a button.
sage appears in the multifunction display, The multifunction display shows the cur-
the tire pressure in one or more tires has rent tire pressure for the individual tires or
dropped suddenly and the tires must be the Tire pressure will be displayed
checked. after driving a few minutes mes-
Observe the instructions and safety notes in sage.
the display messages in the "Tires" section X Press the : button.
(Y page 200). The Use Current Pressures as New
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rota- Reference Values message appears in
ted, the tire pressures may be displayed for the multifunction display.
the wrong positions for a short time. This is
If you wish to confirm the restart:
rectified after a few minutes of driving, and
the tire pressures are displayed for the cor- X Press the a button.
rect positions. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
Restarting the tire pressure monitor play.
Wheels and tires

After driving for a few minutes, the system
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
checks whether the current tire pressures
existing warning messages are deleted and
are within the specified range. The new tire
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses
pressures are then accepted as reference
the currently set tire pressures as the refer-
values and monitored.
ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the
tire pressure monitor will automatically If you wish to cancel the restart:
detect the new reference values after you X Press the % button.
have changed the tire pressure. However, you The tire pressure values stored at the last
can also define reference values manually as restart will continue to be monitored.
described here. The tire pressure monitor
then monitors the new tire pressure values.
Radio type approval for the tire pres-
X Set the tire pressure to the value recom- sure monitor
mended for the corresponding driving sit-
uation on the Tire and Loading Information In certain countries, a radio type approval for
placard on the driver's side the tire pressure monitor may be required.
B-pillar (Y page 291). The radio type approval number for the tire
Additional tire pressure values for different pressure monitor can be found in the "Wheels
loads can also be found on the tire pressure and tires" section of the Digital Operator's
table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Manual.
(Y page 291).
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
on all four wheels.
Z
298 Loading the vehicle
Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by B-pillar (example: Sedan)
exceeding the maximum load. : B-pillar, driver's side
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show

the maximum possible load. Maximum permissible gross vehicle
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard weight rating
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
of occupants and the maximum permis-
sible vehicle load. It also contains details
Wheels and tires
of the tire sizes and corresponding pres-

sures for tires mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu- X Specification for maximum gross vehicle
pants, the fuel and the cargo. You can weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
also find information about the maximum Information placard: "The combined weight
gross axle weight rating on the front and of occupants and cargo should never
rear axle. exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The maximum gross axle weight rating is The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
the maximum weight that can be carried load and luggage must not exceed the speci-
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never fied value.
exceed the maximum load or the maxi-
mum gross axle weight rating for the i The specifications shown on the Tire and
front or rear axle. Loading Information placard in the illustra-
tion are examples. The maximum permis-
sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-
specific and may differ from that in the
illustration. You can find the valid maximum
permissible gross vehicle weight rating for
your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard.
Loading the vehicle 299
Number of seats X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five
150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load capa-
Maximum number of seats : indicates the city calculated in step 4.
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustra-
tion are examples. The number of seats is
vehicle-specific and can differ from the
Wheels and tires

details shown. The number of seats in your
vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-
ing Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs.
Z
300 Loading the vehicle
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are
using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard (Y page 298).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Step 2

Number of people in 5 3 1
Wheels and tires
the vehicle (driver

and occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs
pants (68 kg) (91 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(82 kg) (86 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(73 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
All about wheels and tires 301
Step 3

Permissible load 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
(maximum gross vehi- 750 lbs (340 kg) = 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
cle weight rating from 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
the Tire and Loading
Information placard
minus the gross
weight of all occu-
pants)
Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires

Even if you have calculated the total cargo Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
carefully, you should still make sure that the ards
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-
be found on the vehicle identification plate on ards
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 298).
Wheels and tires

Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all
passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight
(if applicable) must not exceed the permissi-
ble gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the
maximum permissible weight that can be car-
ried by one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross vehi- Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
cle weight and maximum gross axle weight U.S. government specifications. Their pur-
rating), have your loaded vehicle (including pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-
driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if ble information on tire performance data. Tire
applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle manufacturers have to grade tires using three
weighbridge. performance factors: : tread wear grade, ;
traction grade and = temperature grade.
These regulations do not apply to Canada.
Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America
are provided with the corresponding quality
grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applica-
ble, on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-
der and maximum section width.
Z
302 All about wheels and tires
Example: The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy

RTread wear grade: 200 road is always lower than on dry road surfa-
ces.
RTraction grade: AA
You should pay special attention to road con-
RTemperature grade: A
ditions when temperatures are around freez-
All passenger car tires must conform to the ing point.
statutory safety requirements in addition to Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
these grades. tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tires. Observe the legally required minimum
specific and may deviate from the values in tire tread depth (Y page 289). Winter tires can
the illustration. reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
Treadwear The braking distance is still much further than
on surfaces that are not icy or covered with
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested Further information on winter tires (M+S
under controlled conditions on a specified tires) can be found in the Digital Operator's
U.S. government course. For example, a tire Manual.
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a
Temperature
tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends G WARNING
Wheels and tires
upon the actual conditions of their use, how- The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
ever, and may depart significantly from the lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
norm due to variations in driving habits, ser- not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
vice practices and differences in road char- tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
acteristics and climate. in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
Traction
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
G WARNING and C, representing the tire's resistance to
The traction grade assigned to this tire is the generation of heat and its ability to dissi-
based on straight-ahead braking traction pate heat when tested under controlled con-
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause
acteristics. the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
to the drive train. corresponds to a level of performance which
The traction grades – from highest to lowest – all passenger car tires must meet under the
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
measured under controlled conditions on of performance on the laboratory test wheel
specified government test surfaces of asphalt than the minimum required by law.
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Tire labeling Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
Overview tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
: Tire width
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
= Tire code
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ? Rim diameter
(Y page 307) A Load bearing index
; Department of Transportation, Tire Iden- B Speed rating
Wheels and tires

tification Number (Y page 306) General: depending on the manufacturer's
= Maximum load rating (Y page 305) standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 294) may not contain any letters or may contain
A Manufacturer one letter that precedes the size description.
B Tire material (Y page 306) If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa- tion (as shown above): these are passenger
city and speed rating (Y page 303) vehicle tires according to European manufac-
D Load index (Y page 305) turing standards.
E Tire name If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
The markings described above are on the tire
manufacturing standards.
in addition to the tire name (sales designa-
tion) and the manufacturer's name. If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S. manu-
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- facturing standards.
ate from the data in the example. If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure
Tire size designation, load-bearing that are only designed for temporary use in an
capacity and speed rating emergency.
G WARNING Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- tire width in millimeters.
city and the approved maximum speed could Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There between the tire height and tire width and is
is a risk of accident. shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcu-
Z
lated by dividing the tire width by the tire Index Speed rating
height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires. W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diam- Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the
rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
inches (in).
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A
is a numerical code that specifies the maxi- ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
specified load limit. The maximum permissi- over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and the size description, depending on the
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
the driver's side (Y page 298). RIf a service specification is available, the
Example: maximum speed is limited according to the
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum speed rating in the service specification.
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-
Wheels and tires
bear. For further information on the maximum ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The
(Y page 305). maximum speed of the tire is limited to
186 mph (300 km/h).
For further information on the load bearing
index, see "Load index" (Y page 305). If the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there are no service specifica-
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order to
approved maximum speed of the tire.
find out the maximum speed.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
ate from the data in the example. mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
Regardless of the speed rating, always must include "ZR", and the service specifi-
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and cation must be given in parentheses. Exam-
adapt your driving style to the traffic condi- ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating
tions. "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of
Summer tires the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask
the tire manufacturer about the maximum
Index Speed rating speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) Index Speed rating
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
1 Or M+S i for winter tires.

Index Speed rating Load index
H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide

the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires
also have the i snowflake symbol on
the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill
the requirements of the Rubber Manufac-
turers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
In addition to the load bearing index, load
Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the
index : may be imprinted after the letters
tire traction on snow. They have been espe-
that identify speed index B on the sidewall of
cially developed for driving on snow.
the tire (Y page 303).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
vehicle from exceeding the following speeds: example above), represents a standard
Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles): load (SL) tire
130 mph (210 km/h) RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h) tire
Wheels and tires

RAMG vehicles with Performance Package RLight Load: represents a light load tire
(Wagon): 174 mph (280 km/h) RC, D, E: represents a load range that
RAMG vehicles with Performance Package depends on the maximum load that the tire
(Sedan): 186 mph (300 km/h) can carry at a certain pressure
The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac- i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
tory may be higher than the maximum speed ate from the data in the example.
that the electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required Maximum load rating
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 314).
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.
Maximum tire load : is the maximum per-

missible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissi-
1 Or M+S i for winter tires.
Z
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on by the manufacturer as a code to describe
the driver's side (Y page 298). specific characteristics of the tire.
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
specific and may deviate from the values in A provides information about the age of a
the illustration. tire. The first and second positions represent
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of manufacture.
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire For example, a tire that is marked "2614" was
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN manufactured in week 26 in 2014.
in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
Wheels and tires
The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retread-
ers to inform purchasers of recalls and other
safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible
for the purchaser to easily identify the affec- This information describes the type of tire
ted tires. cord and the number of layers in sidewall :
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi- and under tire tread ;.
cation code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
and manufacturing date A. ate from the data in the example.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with Definition of terms for tires and loading
the requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation. Tire ply composition and material used
Manufacturer identification code: manu- Describes the number of plies or the number
facturer identification code ; provides of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded nylon, polyester and other materials.
tires have a code with four symbols. Bar
For further information about retreaded tires,
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
see (Y page 288).
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Speed rating

DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of The speed rating is part of the tire identifica-
the U S Department of Transportation. tion. It specifies the speed range for which the
tire is approved.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the vehi- GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
(150 lbs). of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-
A uniform standard to grade the quality of ble. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as
and temperature characteristics. The quality specified on the vehicle identification plate on
grading assessment is made by the manufac- the B-pillar on the driver's side.
turer following specifications from the U.S.
government. The ratings are molded into the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
sidewall of the tire. The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
Recommended tire pressures the vehicle including all accessories, occu-
The recommended tire pressure applies to pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-
the tires mounted at the factory. weight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
The Tire and Loading Information placard con- weight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-
tains the recommended tire pressures for tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
Wheels and tires

cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the side.
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
mended pressures for cold tires for various The maximum weight is the sum of:
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
speed conditions. Rthe weight of the accessories
Increased vehicle weight due to optional Rthe load limit
equipment Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
The combined weight of all standard and equipment

optional equipment available for the vehicle, Kilopascal (kPa)
regardless of whether it is actually installed
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
on the vehicle or not.
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure
Rim is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva-
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire lent of 1 bar.
is mounted. Load index
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
rating. The actual load on an axle must never the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The city more precisely.
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side.
Z
Curb weight Tread

The weight of a vehicle with standard equip- The part of the tire that comes into contact
ment including the maximum capacity of fuel, with the road.
oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-
tioning system and optional equipment if Bead
these are installed in the vehicle, but does not The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
include passengers or luggage. securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
Maximum load rating coming loose from the wheel rim.
The maximum load rating is the maximum
permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for Sidewall
which a tire is approved. The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one Weight of optional extras
tire. The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
Maximum load on one tire parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated optional extras, such as high-performance
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-
by two. performance battery, are not included in the
curb weight and the weight of the accesso-
PSI (pounds per square inch) ries.
Wheels and tires
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Aspect ratio This is a unique identifier which can be used
Relationship between tire height and tire by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
width in percent. example for a product recall, and thus identify
Tire pressure the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
Pressure inside the tire applying an outward type code and the manufacturing date.
force to every square inch of the tire's sur-
face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds Load bearing index
per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in The load bearing index (also load index) is a
bar. The tire pressure should only be correc- code that contains the maximum load bearing
ted when the tires are cold. capacity of a tire.
Cold tire pressure Traction
The tires are cold: Traction is the result of friction between the
Rif the vehicle has been parked without tires and the road surface.
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three Tread wear indicators
hours and
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
level with the bars, the wear limit of á in
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
Changing a wheel 309
Occupant distribution Always observe the instructions and safety

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
their designated seating positions. (Y page 309).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
Total load limit differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
the vehicle. wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
Changing a wheel can rotate the wheels according to the inter-
Flat tire vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book
in your vehicle documents. If no warranty
The "Breakdown assistance" section book is available, the tires should be rotated
(Y page 271) contains information and notes every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do
driving with MOExtended tires in the event of not change the direction of wheel rotation.
a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
tires (tires with run-flat characteristics"
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
(Y page 272).
is rotated. Check the tire pressure and reac-
Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in tivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary
the event of a flat tire, the emergency spare (Y page 297).
Wheels and tires

wheel is mounted as described under "Mount-
ing a wheel" (Y page 309).
Direction of rotation
Rotating the wheels Tires with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
G WARNING of hydroplaning. These advantages can only
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may be gained if the tires are installed correspond-
severely impair the driving characteristics if ing to the direction of rotation.
the wheels or tires have different dimensions. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
The wheel brakes or suspension components its correct direction of rotation.
may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
dent.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels Storing wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions. Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
monitor, electronic components are loca-
ted in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used Mounting a wheel
near the valve. This could damage the elec-
tronic components. Preparing the vehicle
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
cialist workshop. level ground.
X Apply the parking brake.
Z
310 Changing a wheel
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-

ahead position.
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that
"normal" level is selected (Y page 166).
lock.
The on-board electronics now have status Securing the vehicle on level ground (example:
Sedan)
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed. X On level ground: place chocks or other
suitable items under the front and rear of
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
ignition lock (Y page 138).
wheel you wish to change.
X If included in the vehicle equipment,
remove the tire-change tool kit from the
vehicle (Y page 270).
X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
Wheels and tires
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

rolling away
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients

(example: Sedan)
X On light downhill gradients: place
chocks or other suitable items in front of
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit G WARNING
(Y page 270). If you do not position the jack correctly at the
The folding wheel chock is an additional appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
safety measure to prevent the vehicle from jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
rolling away, for example when changing a There is a risk of injury.
wheel. Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
X Fold both plates upwards :. ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
X Fold out lower plate ;.
must be positioned vertically, directly under
the jacking point of the vehicle.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the openings in base plate =.
! The jack is designed exclusively for jack- AMG vehicles with Performance Studio
ing up the vehicle at the jacking points. equipment: the wheel bolts are covered by a
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. hub cap. Before you can unscrew the wheel
Observe the following when raising the vehi- bolts, you must remove the hub cap.
cle:
RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-
rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-
cle raised.
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for per-
forming maintenance work under the vehi-
cle. X To remove: turn the center cover of hub
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and
cap : counter-clockwise and remove.
downhill slopes.
X To install: before installing, ensure that
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from
hub cap : is in the open position. To do
rolling away by applying the parking brake this, turn the center cover counter-clock-
and inserting wheel chocks. Never disen- wise.
gage the parking brake while the vehicle is
Wheels and tires

X Position hub cap : and turn the center
raised.
cover clockwise until hub cap : engages
RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
physically and audibly.
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
X Make sure that hub cap : is installed
large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be
securely.
used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip
underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
RDo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
jack will not be able to achieve its load-
bearing capacity due to the restricted
height.
RMake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
RNever place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
X Using lug wrench ;, loosen the bolts on
RDo not lie under the vehicle.
the wheel you wish to change by about one
RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
raised. pletely.
RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid/
tailgate when the vehicle is raised.
RMake sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
Z
312 Changing a wheel
Jacking points (example: Sedan) X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
The jacking points are located just behind the beneath the jacking point.
front wheel housings and just in front of the X Turn crank B clockwise until jack A sits
rear wheel housings (arrows). completely on jacking point ?. The base of
AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG the jack must lie evenly on the ground.
equipment: to protect the vehicle body, the X Turn crank B until the tire is raised a max-
vehicle has covers next to the jacking points imum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
on the outer sills.
Removing a wheel
! AMG vehicles: during removal and repo-
Wheels and tires
sitioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can

strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage
it. Therefore, you should proceed carefully
and get a second person assist to you.
Alternatively, you can use a second align-
ment bolt.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
Cover, front (example: vehicles with AMG Sports
package) threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG
equipment: fold cover = upwards.
X Position jack A at jacking point ?.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
pletely. the wheel securely against the wheel hub
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
surfaces.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the alignment bolt and push it on.
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. ger-tight.
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
Wheels and tires

G WARNING X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts tight.
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip X Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel:
over. There is a risk of injury. inflate the collapsible spare wheel
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts (Y page 331).
when the vehicle is on the ground. Only then lower the vehicle.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec- Lowering the vehicle
tion (Y page 309).
G WARNING
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea- and bolts are not tightened to the specified
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
only use wheel bolts which have been
Have the tightening torque immediately
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
respective wheel.
after a wheel is changed.
! AMG vehicles: during removal and repo-
sitioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can ! Vehicles with a collapsible spare
strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage wheel: before lowering the vehicle, inflate
it. Therefore, you should proceed carefully the collapsible spare wheel with the tire
and get a second person assist to you. inflation compressor. The wheel rim could
Alternatively, you can use a second align- otherwise be damaged.
ment bolt.
Z
314 Wheel and tire combinations
X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clock- These tires have been specially adapted for
wise until the vehicle is once again standing use with the control systems, such as ABS
firmly on the ground. or ESP®, and are marked as follows:
X Place the jack to one side. RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
may only be used on wheels that have been
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-
tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
noise emissions or fuel consumption, may
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-
otherwise be adversely affected. In addi-
wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:
tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-
to A). The specified tightening torque is
sion variations could cause the tires to
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
come into contact with the bodywork and
X Turn the jack back to its initial position. axle components. This could result in dam-
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle age to the tires or the vehicle.
Wheels and tires
tools in the trunk/cargo compartment Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for

again. damage resulting from the use of tires,
X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG wheels or accessories other than those tes-
equipment: insert the cover into the outer ted and approved.
sill. Information on tires, wheels and approved
X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun- combinations can be obtained from any
ted wheel and adjust it if necessary. qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the recommended tire pressure Overview of abbreviations used in the follow-
(Y page 291). ing tire tables:
i All wheels mounted must be equipped RBA: both axles
with functioning sensors. RFA: front axle
RRA: rear axle
The recommended pressures for various
Wheel and tire combinations
operating conditions can be found:
General notes Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- with the recommended tire pressures on
ommends that you only use tires and the B-pillar on the driver's side
wheels which have been approved by Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi- fuel filler flap
cle. Observe the notes on recommended tire
pressures under various operating conditions
(Y page 291).
Wheel and tire combinations 315
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when

the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-
nance recommendations of the tire manufac-
turer in the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
equip the vehicle with:
Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/
right)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum-
mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 272).
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may
Wheels and tires

be obtained from a qualified specialist work-
shop.
i Not all wheel and tire combinations are
available at the factory for all countries.
i On the following pages, you can find infor-
mation on approved wheel rims and tire
sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter
tires. Winter tires are not available at the
factory as standard equipment or optional
extras.
If you would like to equip your vehicle with
approved winter tires, you may also, in cer-
tain circumstances, require rims of the
appropriate size. The size of the approved
winter tires may deviate from that of the
standard tires. This is dependent on the
model and the equipment installed at the
factory.
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
information, can be obtained at a qualified
Z
Tires
E 250 BlueTEC
Summer tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2
All-weather tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
Wheels and tires

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 265/40 R18 97 V XL M+S Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2
2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
3 Available as MOExtended tires.
Winter tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
E 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC

Summer tires
R18
Wheels and tires

Tires Alloy wheels
BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
All-weather tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
Z
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Winter tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheels and tires
E 300 4MATIC
Summer tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
All-weather tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XL M+S 3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Winter tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
Wheels and tires

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i3
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
E 350
Summer tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2
Z
All-weather tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheels and tires
FA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2

RA: 265/40 R18 97 V XL M+S Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2
Winter tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2

E 350 4MATIC
Summer tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
All-weather tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XL M+S3, 4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
Wheels and tires

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+S3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Winter tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2

4 Only for Sedan.
Z
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
E 400
Summer tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
Wheels and tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL2 Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2
All-weather tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
4 Only for Sedan.

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XL M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Winter tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
Wheels and tires

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si3
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Z
E 400 4MATIC
Summer tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W5 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W5 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheels and tires
All-weather tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XL M+S3, 4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XL M+S3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
5 Estate only.
4 Only for Sedan.
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Winter tires
R17
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
Wheels and tires

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
E 550 4MATIC
Summer tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
4 Only for Sedan.

Z
All-weather tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Winter tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S i BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
E 63 AMG
Summer tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 ZR18 (99 Y) XL MO16 FA: 9.0 J x 18 H2
Wheels and tires
RA: 285/35 ZR18 (101 Y) XL MO12, 6 Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
R19
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL7 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL2, 7 Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
6 Not in connection with a ceramic brake system.

7 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".
Winter tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si6 FA: 9.0 J x 18 H2
RA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si6 Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
R19
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i7 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si7, 8 Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i7 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+S i2, 7 Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheels and tires

E 63 AMG S-MODEL 4MATIC

Summer tires
R19
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL7 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
6 Not in connection with a ceramic brake system.

8 Only fine-link snow chains are permitted.
Z
Winter tires
R19
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si7, 9 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i7, 8, 9 Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i7 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
E 63 AMG 4MATIC
Summer tires
R19
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL7 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
Wheels and tires
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Winter tires
R19
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i7, 9 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i7, 8, 9 Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i7 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2

9 Wagon: maximum permissible speed 220 km/h.
8 Only fine-link snow chains are permitted.
Emergency spare wheel 329
Emergency spare wheel Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
Important safety notes emergency spare wheel.
G WARNING i When you are driving with the emergency
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure
the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel monitor cannot function reliably. Only
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. restart the tire pressure monitor when the
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may defective wheel has been replaced with a
severely impair the driving characteristics. new wheel.
There is a risk of an accident. If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,
To avoid hazardous situations: the system may continue to show the tire
pressure of the wheel that has been
Radapt your driving style accordingly and
removed for a few minutes. The value dis-
drive carefully.
played for the mounted emergency spare
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
wheel is not the same as the current tire
emergency spare wheel that differs in size. pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size briefly.
Rdo not switch ESP® off. "Minispare" emergency spare wheel/
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare collapsible spare wheel
wheel of a different size replaced at the Opening the stowage well
Wheels and tires

Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions Sedan: the emergency spare wheel can be
as well as the tire type must be correct. found in the stowage well under the trunk
floor.
When using an emergency spare wheel or X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 248).
spare wheel of a different size, you must not
exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph Wagon: the emergency spare wheel is loca-
(80 km/h). ted in the stowage well under the cargo com-
Snow chains must not be mounted on emer- partment floor.
gency spare wheels. X Remove the seat cushions of the folding
bench seat; see the Digital Operator's Man-
ual, keyword "Folding bench seat (cargo
General notes compartment)".
X Lift the cargo compartment floor up.
You should regularly check the pressure of
the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior
to long trips, and correct the pressure as nec-
essary (Y page 291). The value on the wheel is
valid. In addition, the emergency spare wheel
tire pressure can be found under "Technical
data" (Y page 332).
An emergency spare wheel may also be
mounted against the direction of rotation.
Observe the time restriction on use as well as
the speed limitation specified on the emer-
gency spare wheel.
Z
330 Emergency spare wheel
Removing the emergency spare wheel Removing the emergency spare wheel
(Sedan) (AMG vehicles)
(Example: equipment and country-specific varia- X Reach into cutout : in the tool holder and
tions possible)
lift it up.
X Remove vehicle tool kit tray :. X Remove collapsible spare wheel ;.
X Turn stowage well ; counter-clockwise
Always observe the instructions and safety
and remove it.
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare
(Y page 309).
wheel =.
Wheels and tires
Removing the emergency spare wheel Stowing a used collapsible spare

(Wagon) wheel
! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in
the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, mois-
ture may get into the vehicle.
Take the following steps to stow a used col-
lapsible spare wheel. It will not otherwise fit
into the spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you have this work per-
formed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.
Example: emergency spare wheel X Use the back of the valve cap to unscrew
X Remove vehicle tool kit tray : by the valve insert from the valve and release
recess ;. the air.
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare i Fully deflating the tires can take a few
wheel =. minutes.
X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
X Screw the valve cap back on.
Emergency spare wheel 331
X Remove the protective sheet from the vehi- X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
cle tool kit and pull it over the collapsible tion lock (Y page 137).
spare wheel. X Press on/off switch A on the tire inflation
X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the compressor to I.
emergency spare wheel well under the The tire inflation compressor is switched
trunk/cargo compartment. on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is
shown on pressure gauge =.
X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pres-
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel sure.
! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using The specified tire pressure is printed on the
the tire inflation compressor before lower- yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
ing the vehicle. The wheel rim could other- X When the specified tire pressure has been
wise be damaged. reached, press on/off switch A on the
electric air pump to 0.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-
The tire inflation compressor is switched
sor for longer than eight minutes at a time
off.
without a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be oper-
tion lock.
ated again once it has cooled down.
X If the tire pressure is higher than the speci-
fied pressure, press pressure release valve
button ; until the correct tire pressure has
Wheels and tires

been reached.
X Unscrew air hose union nut : from the
valve.
X Screw the cap onto the valve of the col-
lapsible spare wheel again.
X Stow connector ? and the hose in the
lower section of the tire inflation compres-
sor.
X Mount the collapsible spare wheel as X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the
described (Y page 309). vehicle.
The collapsible spare wheel must be moun-
ted before it is inflated.
X Pull connector ? and the hose out of the
housing.
X Remove the cap from the valve on the col-
lapsible spare wheel.
X Screw union nut : of the hose onto the
valve.
X Make sure on/off switch A of the tire
inflation compressor is set to 0.
X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket
(Y page 251) in your vehicle.
Z
332 Emergency spare wheel
Technical data
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel
Models with 4-cylinder engine
Tires Alloy wheels
T 155/70 R17 110 M 4.0 B x 17 H2
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 1.54 in (39 mm)

Tires Alloy wheels
T 155/70 R17 110 M 4.0 B x 17 H2

Tires Alloy wheels
T 155/60 R18 107 M 4.5 B x 18 H2
Wheels and tires
AMG vehicles
Collapsible spare wheel
Tires Alloy wheels
175/50 – 19 97 P 6.5 B x 19 H2
333

Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 334
Vehicle electronics ........................... 334
Identification plates ......................... 336
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 337
Vehicle data ....................................... 344
Technical data
334 Vehicle electronics
Useful information G WARNING

The electromagnetic radiation from incor-
i This Operator's Manual describes all rectly operated RF transmitters can interfere
models and all standard and optional equip- with the vehicle electronics, for example:
Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with
an exterior antenna
Rthe exterior antenna has been installed
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type
also applies to safety-related systems and This can compromise the operational safety
functions. of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna
mounted at a qualified specialist workshop.
When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-
cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-
tion exterior antenna.
Information regarding technical data
! The operating permit may be invalidated if
G WARNING the instructions for installation and use of
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read RF transmitters are not observed.
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating Instruc- In particular, the following conditions must
tions included in your vehicle literature port- be complied with:
folio. You may otherwise not receive all nec-
Ronly approved wavebands may be used.
essary safety information and warning for the
operation of your vehicle. Rcompliance with the maximum permissi-
ble output in these wavebands is
Technical data
i The data stated here specifically refers to required.

a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult Ronly approved antenna positions may be
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for used.
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
levels.
may cause damage to your health and the
health of others. Using an exterior antenna
takes into account current scientific discus-
Vehicle electronics
sions relating to the possible health hazards
Retrofitting two-way radios and that may result from electromagnetic fields.
mobile phones (RF transmitters) The following antenna positions may be used
if RF transmitters have been properly instal-
G WARNING led:
The electromagnetic radiation from modified
or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can
interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can
compromise the operational safety of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have all work to electrical and
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
Vehicle electronics 335
If your vehicle has installations for two-way

radio equipment, use the power supply or
antenna connections intended for use with
the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the man-
ufacturer's additional instructions when
installing.
Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-
mum transmission outputs or antenna posi-
tions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at
Sedan: approved antenna positions
the base of the antenna must not exceed the
following values:
: Front roof area
; Rear roof area Waveband Maximum
= Rear fender transmission
? Trunk lid output
Short wave 100 W
3 - 54 MHz
4 m waveband 30 W
74 - 88 MHz
2 m waveband 50 W
144 - 174 MHz
Trunked radio/Tetra 10 W
Technical data
380 - 460 MHz
Wagon: approved antenna positions 70 cm waveband 35 W
: Front roof area
400 - 460 MHz
; Rear roof area
= Rear fender Mobile communications 10 W
(2G/3G/4G)
i When installing an antenna on the front
roof area of vehicles with a sliding sunroof,
observe the sweeping range of the roof. The following can be used in the vehicle with-
out restrictions:
On vehicles with panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, installing an antenna to RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
the front or rear roof area is not permitted. sion output of up to 100 mW
On the rear fenders, it is recommended to RRF transmitters with transmission frequen-
position the antenna on the side of the cies in the range 380-410 MHz and a max-
vehicle closest to the center of the road. imum transmission output of 2 W (Tetra)
RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G)
Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS
21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters
(Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installa-
tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmit-
ting equipment). Observe the legal require-
ments for retrofittings.
Z
336 Identification plates
There is no restriction for antenna positions

on the outside of the vehicle for the following
wavebands:
RTrunked radio/Tetra
R70cm waveband
RMobile communications (2G/3G/4G)
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
cle identification number (VIN)
; VIN
= Paint code
i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-
tion plate is used only as an example. This
data is different for every vehicle and can
deviate from the data shown here. You can
find the data applicable to your vehicle on
the vehicle identification plate.
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-

X Open the front left-hand door. cle identification number (VIN)
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Technical data
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) most position.
; VIN X Fold floor covering : upwards.
= Vehicle model You will see VIN ;.
Service products and filling capacities 337
Engine number RWindshield washer fluid

RClimate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must be
matched. Only use products recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused
by the use of products which have not been
recommended is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill ges-
tures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz
Operator's Manual in the appropriate section.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-
: Emission control information plate, Benz Center or on the Internet at
including the certification of both federal http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
and Californian emissions standards You can recognize service products approved
; Engine number (stamped into the crank- by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-
case) tion on the containers:
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
Service products and filling capaci- Other designations or recommendations indi-
ties cate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.
Important safety notes MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
G WARNING
Technical data
Other identifications, for example:
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. R0 W-30
Comply with instructions on the use, storage R5 W-30
and disposal of service products on the labels R5 W-40
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out Fuel
of the reach of children.
H Environmental note G WARNING
Dispose of service products in an environ- Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
mentally responsible manner. incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion.
Service products include the following:
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
RFuels
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
RExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
DEF refueling.
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
RCoolant
RBrake fluid
Z
338 Service products and filling capacities
G WARNING Gasoline
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. Fuel grade
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
You must make sure that fuel does not come
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
tion if you accidentally refuel with the
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
If you or others come into contact with fuel, wrong fuel could result in damage to the
observe the following: fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-
RWash away fuel from skin immediately fied specialist workshop and have the fuel
using soap and water. tank and fuel lines drained completely.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, ! Only refuel using unleaded premium
immediately rinse them thoroughly with grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- 95 RON.
out delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to
ing.
engine failure.
RImmediately change out of clothing which ! Do not use the following:
has come into contact with fuel. RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)
RE100 (100% ethanol)
Tank capacity RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)
depending on the equipment in the vehicle.
Technical data
RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)

RM100 (100% methanol)
Model Total capacity
RGasoline with metalliferous additives
AMG vehicles 17.4 US gal (66.0 l) RDiesel
or Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-
21.1 US gal (80.0 l) mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-
All other models 21.1 US gal (80.0 l) tives. Otherwise, engine damage may
occur. This does not include cleaning addi-
tives for the removal and prevention of res-
Model Of which reserve idue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixed
with cleaning additives recommended by
AMG vehicles Approx. 3.7 US gal Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can
(14.0 l) obtain further information from any author-
All other models Approx. 2.4 US gal ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
(9.0 l) ! To ensure the longevity and full perform-
ance of the engine, only premium-grade
unleaded gasoline must be used.
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila- The quality of the fuel available in some coun-
ble and you have to refuel with unleaded tries may not be sufficient. Residue could
gasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol- build up in the injection system as a result. In
lowing precautions: such cases, and in consultation with an
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-
ular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest line may be mixed with the cleaning additive
with premium-grade unleaded gasoline recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must
as soon as possible. observe the notes and mixing ratios specified
on the container.
RDo not drive at the maximum speed.
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine
Diesel
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuel Fuel grade
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the G WARNING
label on the pump, ask the staff for assis- If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
tance. point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
i For further information, consult a quali- When the engine is running, exhaust system
fied specialist workshop or visit components could overheat without being
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). noticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
with diesel fuel.
Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. ! Only use commercially available vehicular
As a temporary measure, if the recommended ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (ULSD,
fuel is not available, you may also use regular 15 ppm maximum sulfur content) that
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of meets the ASTM D975 standard. If you do
Technical data
87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per- not refuel with ULSD, you may damage the
formance and increase fuel consumption. BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment sys-
Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden accel- tem of the vehicle.
eration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with
AKI.
a diesel engine. Do not mix diesel fuel with
Information on refueling (Y page 146). gasoline, kerosene or paraffin. This may
Additives otherwise result in damage to the fuel sys-
tem and engine.
! Operating the engine with fuel additives
added later can lead to engine failure. Do You will usually find information about the fuel
not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
not include additives for the removal and label on the pump, ask the staff for assis-
prevention of residue buildup. gasoline tance.
must only be mixed with additives recom- i For further information, consult a quali-
mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with fied specialist workshop or visit
the instructions for use on the product http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
label. More information about recommen-
ded additives can be obtained from any Information on refueling (Y page 146).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
branded fuels that have additives.
Z
Low outside temperatures If you or others come into contact with fuel,
i Diesel fuel with improved cold flow prop- observe the following:
erties is available during the winter months. RWash away fuel from skin immediately
Further information about fuel properties using soap and water.
can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
gas stations.
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
Bio-diesel – FAME (fatty acid methyl ester) clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of bio- out delay.
diesel B5 for all BlueTEC diesel engines. The RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
concentration of bio-diesel in the ULSD may tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
not exceed 5% by volume. ing.
Pure bio-diesel and diesel fuel with a higher RImmediately change out of clothing which
percentage of bio-diesel, such as B20, can has come into contact with fuel.
damage the engine and the fuel system. For
this reason, they are not approved. Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with the
following fuel types:
For more information, consult the gas station
staff. The bio-diesel B5 label on the gasoline Rpremium-grade unleaded gasoline
pump must clearly state that the standard for RE85 fuel
ULSD has been fulfilled. If the label is not Ra mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade
clear, do not refuel the vehicle. unleaded gasoline
Do not refuel your vehicle with fuels unless
they have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized
by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the
Information on refueling (Y page 146). inside of the fuel filler flap.
Technical data
Flexible Fuel vehicles Fuel consumption

The energy content of E85 fuel is less than
Important safety notes that of the same amount of premium-grade
G WARNING gasoline. The amount of fuel consumed when
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel operating the vehicle with E85 fuel is there-
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- fore higher than with premium-grade gaso-
sion. line.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating Maintenance
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
Inform your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
ter that you are operating or have operated
refueling.
the vehicle with E85 fuel.
G WARNING Low outside temperatures
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. If the outside temperature is below 32 ‡
There is a risk of injury. (0 †), the starting procedure can take notice-
You must make sure that fuel does not come ably longer when operating with E85 fuel.
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel temperatures under -4 ‡ (-20 †).
DEF Rengine damage

Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas
Important safety notes aftertreatment system
Comply with the important safety notes for Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly
service products when handling DEF important with respect to avoiding malfunc-
(Y page 337). tions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat-
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust ment system.
gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g.
Rnot poisonous during repair work, it must not be returned to
Rcolorless and odorless the tank. The purity of the fluid can no longer
be guaranteed.
Rnot flammable
When you open the DEF container, small Filling capacities
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released.
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are Model Total capacity
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous
membranes and to the eyes. You may expe- All models 6.7 US gal
rience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose (25.5 l)
and throat. Coughing and watering of the
eyes are possible.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF Engine oil
tank only in well-ventilated areas.
General notes
Low outside temperatures ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
specification other than is necessary to ful-
DEF freezes at a temperature of approx-
Technical data
fill the prescribed service intervals. Do not
imately 12 ‡ (-11 †). The vehicle is delivered
change the engine oil or oil filter in order to
from the factory equipped with a DEF pre-
achieve longer replacement intervals than
heating system. Winter operation can thus be
those prescribed. You could otherwise
guaranteed even at temperatures below 12 ‡
cause engine damage or damage to the
(-11 †).
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Additives Follow the instructions in the service inter-
val display regarding the oil change. Other-
! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO wise, you may damage the engine and the
22241. Do not use additives with DEF and exhaust gas aftertreatment.
do not dilute DEF with water. This may When handling engine oil, observe the impor-
destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after- tant safety notes on service products
treatment system. (Y page 337).
The engine oils are matched to the perform-
Purity
ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service
! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other ser- intervals. You should therefore only use
vice products, cleaning agents or dust) lead engine oils and oil filters that are approved for
to: vehicles with maintenance systems.
Rincreased emission values For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
Rdamage
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
to the catalytic converter
Z
ter. Or visit the website Information about approved brake fluid can
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. be obtained at any qualified specialist work-
The table shows which engine oils have been shop or on the Internet at
approved for your vehicle. http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Model MB Approval i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at
a qualified specialist workshop and the
All models 229.5 replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils
for AMG vehicles.
Coolant
i MB approval is indicated on the oil con-
tainers. Important safety notes
Filling capacities G WARNING

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
The following values refer to an oil change ponents in the engine compartment, it may
including the oil filter. ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Model Capacity Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
AMG vehicles 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
E 550 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) antifreeze from components before starting
the engine.
All other models 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
Technical data
Brake fluid could otherwise damage the engine.

Further information on coolants can be
G WARNING found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of on the Internet at
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the tact a qualified specialist workshop.
brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
There is a risk of an accident. even in countries where high temperatures
prevail.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
Comply with the important safety notes for overheating.
service products when handling brake fluid i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
(Y page 337). qualified specialist workshop and the
The brake fluid change intervals can be found replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
in the Maintenance Booklet. Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Comply with the important safety precautions
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. for service products when handling coolant
(Y page 337).
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- Model Capacity

freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the
following tasks: E 550 4MATIC Approx. 11.5 US qt
Rcorrosion protection E 63 AMG S- (10.9 l)
Rantifreeze
MODEL 4MATIC
protection
Rraising the boiling point All other models Approx. 10.1 US qt
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down (9.6 l)
to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the cool-
ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡
(130 †). Windshield washer system
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
tion in the engine cooling system should:
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine G WARNING
cooling system against freezing down to Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat fire and injury.
will not be dissipated as effectively. Make sure that no windshield washer con-
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-
ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod- ! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to
ucts 310.1. the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the
level sensor may be damaged.
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-
led with a coolant mixture that ensures ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
Technical data
adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec- washer fluid should be mixed together. The
tion. spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
i The coolant is checked with every main-
Comply with the important safety notes for
tenance interval at a qualified specialist
service products when handling washer fluid
workshop.
(Y page 337).
Filling capacities At temperatures above freezing:
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
Model Capacity of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.
E 400 Approx. 10.9 US qt MB SummerFit.
E 400 4MATIC (10.3 l) Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
E 250 BlueTEC Approx. 11.0 US qt
E 250 BlueTEC (10.4 l) X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
4MATIC of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-
Fit.
E 63 AMG Approx. 11.4 US qt For the correct mixing ratio refer to the
E 63 AMG 4MATIC (10.8 l) information on the antifreeze reservoir.
Z
344 Vehicle data
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB ? PAG oil part number

SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer A Type of refrigerant
fluid all year round.
Warning symbol : advises you about:
Rpossible dangers
Climate control system refrigerant Rhaving service work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop
The climate control system of your vehicle is Filling capacities
filled with refrigerant R‑134a.
Missing values were not available at time of
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant going to print.
type used can be found on the radiator cross
member. AMG vehicles Capacity
! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG Refrigerant 22.6 ± 0.4 oz
oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be (640 ± 10 g)
used. The approved PAG oil may not be
mixed with any other PAG oil that is not PAG oil
approved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-
wise, the climate control system may be
damaged. All other models Capacity
Service work, such as topping up refrigerant Refrigerant 20.8 ± 0.4 oz

or replacing components, may only be carried (590 ± 10 g)
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
applicable regulations must be adhered to, PAG oil 4.2 oz
SAE standard J639 included. (120 g)
Technical data
Always have work on the climate control sys-

tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop. Vehicle data
General notes
Refrigerant instruction label
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data:
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result
of:
- tires
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload.
Example: refrigerant instruction label
: Warning symbol
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable standards
Vehicle data 345
Dimensions and weights Missing values were not available at time of

going to print.
Model, Wagon : ;
Max. Opening
headroom height
AMG vehicles 82.1 in -

82.9 in
(2086 mm -
2106 mm)
All other mod- 75.8 in 80.6 in
els (1925 mm) (2048 mm)

going to print.
All models (except
AMG vehicles)
Vehicle length, 192.1 in (4879 mm)
Sedan
Missing values were not available at time of Wagon
going to print.
Vehicle width 81.5 in (2071 mm)
Technical data
Model, Sedan : including exterior
Opening height mirrors
AMG vehicles 68.7 in - 69.4 in Wheelbase 113.1 in (2874 mm)
(1744 mm - Maximum roof load 220 lbs (100 kg)
1764 mm)
Maximum trunk 220 lbs (100 kg)
E 550 4MATIC load, Sedan
All other models 69.4 in Maximum trunk
(1763 mm) load, Wagon
Model, Sedan Vehicle height

(except AMG vehi-
cles)
E 550 4MATIC
All other models 58.1 in (1477 mm)
Z
346 Vehicle data
Model, Wagon Vehicle height E 63 AMG 4MATIC Vehicle

(except AMG vehi- E 63 AMG S-MODEL height
cles) 4MATIC
All models 59.4 in (1509 mm) Sedan 57.7 in
(1466 mm)
Model (except AMG Turning radius Wagon 59.9 in
vehicles) (1522 mm)
E 350 37.0 ft (11.28 m)
E 400
E 250 BlueTEC
All other models 37.7 ft (11.50 m)

going to print.
AMG vehicles
Sedan
Wagon
Vehicle width 81.5 in (2071 mm)
Technical data
including exterior
mirrors
Wheelbase 113.1 in (2874 mm)
Maximum roof load 220 lbs (100 kg)
Maximum trunk
load, Sedan
Maximum trunk
load, Wagon
E 63 AMG Vehicle
E 63 AMG S-MODEL height
Sedan 57.1 in
(1450 mm)
Wagon 59.1 in
(1502 mm)
347
348

E-Class: Sedan and Wagon Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

E-Class: Sedan and Wagon Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

E-Class Sedan and Wagon Operator's Manual E-Class

Sedan and Wagon

! Notes on material damage alert you to

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 35

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 25 Safety ................................................... 47

Introduction ......................................... 27 Opening and closing ........................... 89

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 113

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 119

Climate control ................................. 129

Driving and parking .......................... 135

On-board computer and displays .... 187

Audio 20/COMAND .......................... 213

Stowage and features ...................... 237

Maintenance and care ...................... 261

Roadside Assistance ........................ 269

Wheels and tires ............................... 287

Technical data ................................... 333

1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Brake Assist

Anti-Theft Alarm system Driving tips .................................... 144

Activating/deactivating (on- Buttons and controller ...................... 222

Coolant (engine) Declarations of conformity ................. 31

Setting the specified minimum PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 84

see also Digital Operator's Man- Vehicle ............................................. 96

Activating/deactivating (on- Flat tire

iPod® Automatic headlamp mode ............ 121

Low-beam headlamps Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 190 O

Operation ....................................... 189 Position of exterior mirror, front-

Warning lamp ................................. 210 Rear view camera

Reversing feature Switching belt adjustment on/off

Setting the time Rear compartment ......................... 251

Stowage areas ................................... 238 Emergency spare wheel ................. 332

Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 274 Load index (definition) ................... 307

Towing a trailer Trunk lid

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 344 Checking ........................................ 289

X To scroll forwards/backwards: turn

X To select information texts or save

Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and War-

Information for customers in Califor- Maintenance

an accident, no longer withstand the strain Diagnostics connection

Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book- 98 Vanderhoof Avenue

QR codes for the rescue card Event data recorders

("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-

Function Page Function Page

= Instrument cluster 37 G Cruise control lever ~

? Horn ~ H Parking brake ~

A DIRECT SELECT lever 142 I Diagnostics connection 31

B PARKTRONIC warning dis- J Opens the hood 262

Information on displaying the outside tem-

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page Function Page

F h Tire pressure monitor 211 N 8 Reserve fuel ~

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

Center console, lower section

Function Page Function Page

Center console, lower section (AMG vehicles)

H Engages park position P 152 N à Adjusts the suspen-

Overhead control panel

Function Page Function Page

Door control panel

Useful information .............................. 48

Useful information Occupant safety